B-912 (28)

Chapter 1 PLC Link Communication

External Device Setup Manual

Chapter 2 Connection to a PLC

Chapter 3 O/I Link Communication

Chapter 4 DM Link Communication

Chapter 5 Modbus

Chapter 6 1: N Communication (Multi-drop)

Chapter 7 Communication Cables

Confirm that the delivered product is what you have ordered. Read this instruction sheet to makesure of correct operation. Make sure that the instruction sheet is kept by the end user.

SAFETY PRECAUTATIONS• Be certain to read this manual carefully before performing installation, wiring, or maintenance work, or operating the
HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F and Touch.

• The HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F and Touch has been manufactured with careful regard to qual-

ity. However, if you intend to use this product in applications where failure of this equipment may result in damage toproperty or injury, ensure that it used in conjunction with appropriate fail-safe backup equipment.

• In this manual, safety precautions are categorized in order of importance to Warning and Caution:
Warning notices are used to emphasize that improper operation may cause severe personal injury or death.

Caution notices are used where inattention might cause personal injury or damage to equipment.

• The HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F and Touch is not intended to be used for applications which

require high reliability and safety, such as medical equipment, nuclear equipment, railways, aircraft, and vehicles.
The HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F and Touch cannot be used for these applications.

• For other applications which require high reliability in function and precision, provide a failsafe design and redundant
design for the entire system including the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F and Touch.

• Turn off the power to the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F and Touch before installation, removal, wiring, maintenance, and inspection of the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F and Touch. Failure to turnpower off may cause electrical shock or fire hazard.

• Special expertise is required to install, wire, configure, and operate the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G,

HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F and Touch. People without such expertise must not use the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G,
HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F and Touch.

• The HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F and Touch uses an LCD (liquid crystal display) as a display

device. The liquid inside the LCD is harmful to the skin. If the LCD is broken and the liquid attaches to your skin or
clothes, wash the liquid off using soap, and consult a doctor immediately.

• Emergency and interlocking circuits must be configured outside of the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, HG1F/2F/3F/4F

and Touch. Do not use the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, HG1F/2F/3F/4F and Touch’s internal touch switches for an
emergency circuit. If the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F and Touch failed, the external equipment
connected to the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F and Touch will no longer be protected, and serious
injury to operators and equipment damage may be caused. Also, connect the emergency stop switch (Direct opening
action, Red switch) or the stop switch (Direct opening action, Gray switch) on the HG2S to the emergency stop circuit
fixed to the machine in accordance with ISO13850/EN418.

• If an emergency stop switch is used for the HG2S, it should be secured and connected to the machine for fear of disconnecting easily.

• Connect the emergency stop switch or the stop switch and the enabling switch on the HG2S to function as either acategory 0 or category 1 stop in accordance with IEC/EN60204-1 which applies to the HG2S.

• When the HG2S cable can be easily disconnected from the machine, use the HG2S with a stop switch so that theoperator can easily notice that the HG2S is NOT an emergency stop device which always functions.

i

External Device Setup ManualSAFETY PRECAUTATIONS• Prevent the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F and Touch from falling while moving or transporting, otherwise damage or malfunction of the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F and Touch will result.

• Use the product within the environmental limits given in the catalog and manual. Use of the product in high-temperature or high-humidity environments, or in locations where it is exposed to condensation, corrosive gas or large shockloads can create the risk of electrocution and fire.

• The HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F and Touch is designed for use in pollution degree 2. Use the
HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F and Touch in environments of pollution degree 2. (based on the
IEC60664-1 rating)• Install the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F and Touch according to the instructions. Improper installa-tion will result in falling, failure, electrical shock, fire hazard, or malfunction of the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, HG1F/
2F/2S/3F/4F and Touch.

• Prevent metal fragments or wire chips from dropping inside the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F andTouch housing. Ingress of such fragments and chips may cause fire hazard, damage, and malfunction.

• Use a power supply of the rated value. Using a wrong power supply may cause fire hazard.
• The HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, HG1F/2F/3F/4F and Touch uses “PS2 of EN61131” as DC power supply. (based on
the IEC/EN61131 rating)• Use wire of a proper size to meet the voltage and current requirements.
• When exporting the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, HG1F/2F/3F/4F and Touch to Europe, use an EN60127 (IEC60127)
approved fuse on the power line outside the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, HG1F/2F/3F/4F and Touch.

• The D-sub connector on the end of the cable of the HG2S is not water- and dust-proof. If protection against water anddust is required, the user must implement a water-proof provision on the connector or replace the D-sub connector
with a water-proof connector.

• When exporting the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, HG1F/2F/3F/4F and Touch to Europe, use an EU-approved circuit
protector.

• Make sure of safety before starting and stopping the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F and Touch.

Incorrect operation of the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F and Touch may cause mechanical damage or accidents.

• Use the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, HG3F/4F and Touch in a local area network if you download, upload or monitor
the project data via the Ethernet port.

• The touch panel of the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F and Touch is made of glass, and will break if
exposed to excessive shock. Take due care when handling it.

• When more than one button is pressed at the same time, due to the detection characteristics of an analog type touch
panel, only the gravity center of the pressed area is sensed and the unit assumes that only one button is pressed.
Thus, when more than one button is pressed simultaneously, the resulting operation is not guaranteed.

• The screen becomes blank when the backlight is burnt out, however, the touch panel remains enabled. Incorrect

touch panel operation will occur when operating the touch panel when the backlight appears to be turned off but isactually burnt out. Note that this erroneous operation may result in damage.

• Do not push hard or scratch the touch panel and protection sheet with a hard object such as a tool, because they aredamaged easily.

• At temperatures over the rated operating temperature, the clock accuracy is affected. Adjust the clock before use.
• For applications which require clock accuracy, adjust the clock periodically.
• Do not install the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F and Touch in areas subjected to strong ultraviolet
rays, since ultraviolet rays may impair the quality of the LCD.

• Do not attempt to disassemble, repair or modify the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F and Touch. Thiscan create the risk of fire or electrocution.

• When disposing of the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F and Touch, do so as an industrial waste.

External Device Setup Manualii• Do not switch off the power or pull out the Memory Card while it is being accessed, as this may result in destruction of
the stored data. If the data on the Memory Card is corrupted, format the Memory Card.

• Be sure to confirm that the Memory Card Access lamp is not lit prior to turning the power off to the HG2G-5F,
HG3G/4G, HG2F/3F/4F or pulling out the Memory card. Refer to the WindO/I-NV2 User’s Manual for details.

• Do not switch off the power or pull out the USB flash drive while it is being accessed, as this may result in destructionof the stored data. If the data on the USB flash drive is corrupted, format the USB flash drive.

iii

External Device Setup Manual

Revision history

Revision history
December 2004:

First Edition

April 2005:

Second Edition

September 2005:

Third Edition

March 2006:

Fourth Edition

April 2006:

Fifth Edition

May 2006:

Sixth Edition

September 2006:

Seventh Edition

January 2007:

Eighth Edition

March 2007:

Ninth Edition

July 2007:

Tenth Edition

January 2008:

Eleventh Edition

November 2008:

Twelfth Edition

December 2008:

Thirteenth Edition

February 2009:

Fourteenth Edition

April 2009:

Fifteenth Edition

November 2009:

Sixteenth Edition

March 2010:

Seventeenth Edition

July 2010:

Eighteenth Edition

January 2011:

Nineteenth Edition

June 2011:

Twentieth Edition

September 2011:

Twenty-first Edition

February 2012:

Twenty-second Edition

June 2012:

Twenty-third Edition

March 2013:

Twenty-Fourth Edition

June 2013:

Twenty-Fifth Edition

July 2013:

Twenty-Sixth Edition

December 2013:

Twenty-Seventh Edition

March 2014:

Twenty-Eighth Edition

April 2014:

Twenty-Ninth Edition

External Device Setup Manualiv

Caution• The contents of this manual and the WindO/I-NV2 or WindO/I-NV3 application are copyrighted. All rights are reserved
by IDEC Corporation. Unauthorized reproduction is prohibited.

• The contents of this manual and the WindO/I-NV2 or WindO/I-NV3 application are subject to change without notice.
• IDEC Corporation accepts no responsibility for circumstances arising from the use of this manual or the
WindO/I-NV2 or WindO/I-NV3 application.

• Please contact your vendor or IDEC Corporation with any problems regarding the operation of this product.

Trademarks
WindO/I and MICRO/I are registered trademarks of IDEC CORPORATION in JAPAN. Microsoft, Windows, Windows XP,
Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 8 are trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation of the United States, other countries, or both. Adobe is a trademark of Adobe System Incorporated.
All other company names and product names used in this manual or the WindO/I-NV2 application are trademarks of theirrespective owners.

v

External Device Setup ManualSymbols Used in this Document

Symbols Used in this Document
This manual uses the following symbols to facilitate description.

Symbols
Useful information relating to a function

Information that requires special attention. Failure to operate the product in accordance with the information
provided can lead to serious injury or damage.

Indicates the location of related information.

Screen buttons are indicated by enclosing text inside a rectangle or by using the actual graphic icon.

[A5]

Keyboard keys are indicated by the keyboard inscription enclosed in square brackets.

[****]

Controls are indicated by enclosing text inside a rectangle

External Device Setup ManualviAbbreviations, Generic Terms, and Terminology Used in this Manual
Item

vii

Description

HG2G-S

The name is short for MICRO/I HG2G-S*2**F-*.

HG2G-5S

The name is short for MICRO/I HG2G-5ST22*F-*.

HG2G-5F

The name is short for MICRO/I HG2G-5FT22TF-*.

HG3G

The name is short for MICRO/I HG3G-*JT22*F-*.

HG4G

The name is short for MICRO/I HG4G-CJT22*F-B.

HG1F

The name is short for MICRO/I HG1F-SB22*F-*.

HG2F

The name is short for MICRO/I HG2F-S**2V**.

HG2S

The name is short for MICRO/I HG2S-S**2H-*.

HG3F

The name is short for MICRO/I HG3F-FT22*F-*.

HG4F

The name is short for MICRO/I HG4F-JT22*F-*.

HG2G-S/-5S/-5F

The format used to refer to HG2G-S, HG2G-5S and HG2G-5F.

HG3G/4G

The format used to refer to HG3G and HG4G.

HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F

The format used to refer to HG1F, HG2F, HG2S, HG3F and HG4F.

MICRO/I

Generic term used to refer to the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F.

SmartAXIS

Another name for the SmartAXIS FT1A Series.

Touch

The generic term for the SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and the FT1A-C12RA-*.

Pro

The generic term for the FT1A Series that includes an LCD, excluding the Touch.

Lite

The generic term for the FT1A Series that does not include an LCD, excluding the Touch.

External device

Generic term used to refer to a PLC or micro computer that is connected to and communicateswith the MICRO/I or Touch.

Device Address

Memory that is capable of storing values in unit of bits or words loaded on the MICRO/I or Touchand external device.

System Area

Device area that is pre-allocated for exchanging screen management, error information, and clock
data between the MICRO/I or Touch and external device.

PLC Link Communication

A communication method that performs communication with the external device according to thesetting of the screen and without a program.

DM Link Communication

A communication method that reads to or writes from the MICRO/I or Touch device from a computer or microcomputer board.

User Communication

A communication method which performs communication with external devices such as barcode
readers and inverters.

No External Devices

A method that is capable of operating the MICRO/I or the Touch independently without connecting to external device.

O/I Link

A connection format that enables connections of up to 16 units of MICRO/I or Touch with highspeed communication of 115200bps.

O/I Link Master

The MICRO/I or Touch unit that is directly connected to external device on the O/I Link network.

O/I Link Slave

The MICRO/I or Touch units that are not directly connected to external device on the O/I Link network.

WindO/I-NV2

Software for creating projects of the MICRO/I.

WindO/I-NV3

Software for creating projects of the Touch.

Project

Data including image data required for operating the MICRO/I or Touch, which is created with
WindO/I-NV2 or WindO/I-NV3 Software.

External Device Setup ManualAbbreviations, Generic Terms, and Terminology Used in this Manual

Item

Description

Device Monitor

A special Popup Screen on the MICRO/I or Touch on which value of the device can be displayedor changed.

System Screen

Pre-allocated screen dedicated for performing initial setting of the MICRO/I or Touch, self-diagnosis, and clearing the log data etc.

Pass-ThroughA function that enables maintenance of the external device via the MICRO/I.

Memory Card

A term referring to either a CF or SD Memory Card.

External memory

A term referring to either a CF, SD Memory Card or a USB flash drive.

External Device Setup Manual

viii

ix

External Device Setup ManualContents

Contents
SAFETY PRECAUTATIONS .................................................................. i
Revision history .................................................................................... iv
Caution ..................................................................................................v
Trademarks ............................................................................................v
Symbols Used in this Document ........................................................... vi
Abbreviations, Generic Terms, and Terminology Used in this Manual vii

Chapter 1
1

PLC Link Communication
1.1
1.2
1.3

2
3

......................................................................................................8

Connection Table ..................................................................................................................8
System Configuration .........................................................................................................12
Connection Diagram ...........................................................................................................20
Environment Settings .........................................................................................................35
Usable Devices ...................................................................................................................37.............................................................................................38

Connection Table ................................................................................................................38
System Configuration .........................................................................................................46
Connection Diagram ...........................................................................................................56
Environment Settings .........................................................................................................84
Usable Devices ...................................................................................................................90

Omron
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5

4

Connection to a PLC

Mitsubishi
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5

3

Overview ..............................................................................................................................2
Operation ..............................................................................................................................2
1: N Communication ............................................................................................................2

IDEC
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5

2

......................................................................2

Important Points Regarding Wiring ........................................................3
Settings for PLC Link Communication ...................................................4

Chapter 2
1

PLC Link Communication................................................................................................108

Connection Table ..............................................................................................................108
System Configuration .......................................................................................................113
Connection Diagram .........................................................................................................122
Environment Settings .......................................................................................................145
Usable Devices .................................................................................................................151

Allen-Bradley....................................................................................157

External Device Setup Manual1

Contents

4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7

5

SIEMENS
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5

6

8

9

..............................................................................................266

Connection Table ............................................................................................................. 266
System Configuration ...................................................................................................... 267
Connection Diagram ........................................................................................................ 269
Environment Settings ....................................................................................................... 288
Usable Devices ................................................................................................................ 289

Hitachi
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5

.............................................................................................240

Connection Table ............................................................................................................. 240
System Configuration ...................................................................................................... 241
Connection Diagram ........................................................................................................ 244
Environment Settings ...................................................................................................... 259
Usable Devices ................................................................................................................ 261

SHARP
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5

...........................................................................................217

Connection Table ............................................................................................................. 217
System Configuration ...................................................................................................... 218
Connection Diagram ........................................................................................................ 219
Environment Settings ....................................................................................................... 231
Usable Devices ................................................................................................................ 235

Keyence
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5

7

Connection Table ............................................................................................................. 157
System Configuration ...................................................................................................... 160
Connection Diagram ........................................................................................................ 164
Environment Settings ....................................................................................................... 182
Usable Devices ................................................................................................................ 187
The way to set device address when use ControlLogix, CompactLogix series ............... 209
The way to set device address when use Ethernet/IP (Logix Native Tag) ...................... 211................................................................................................291

Supported Programmable Logic Controllers ................................................................... 291
System Configuration ...................................................................................................... 292
Connection Diagram ........................................................................................................ 294
Environment Settings ....................................................................................................... 303
Usable Devices ................................................................................................................ 304

JTEKT (Toyoda)
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5

................................................................................306

Connection Table ............................................................................................................. 306
System Configuration ...................................................................................................... 306
Connection Diagram ........................................................................................................ 307
Environment Settings ....................................................................................................... 313
Usable Devices ................................................................................................................ 314

10 Toshiba Machine Works
10.1
10.2

2

....................................................................318

Connection Table ............................................................................................................. 318
System Configuration ...................................................................................................... 319

External Device Setup ManualContents

10.3
10.4
10.5

Connection Diagram .........................................................................................................320
Environment Settings .......................................................................................................327
Usable Devices .................................................................................................................328

11 GE Fanuc Automation
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5

.......................................................................329

Connection Table ..............................................................................................................329
System Configuration .......................................................................................................330
Connection Diagram .........................................................................................................331
Environment Settings .......................................................................................................341
Usable Devices .................................................................................................................343

12 Panasonic Electric Works
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5

..................................................................344

Connection Table ..............................................................................................................344
System Configuration .......................................................................................................345
Connection Diagram .........................................................................................................348
Environment Settings .......................................................................................................367
Usable Devices .................................................................................................................369

13 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5

Connection Table ..............................................................................................................370
System Configuration .......................................................................................................371
Connection Diagram .........................................................................................................373
Environment Settings .......................................................................................................387
Usable Devices .................................................................................................................389

14 Koyo
14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5

...................................................................................................390

Connection Table ..............................................................................................................390
System Configuration .......................................................................................................391
Connection Diagram .........................................................................................................393
Environment Settings .......................................................................................................400
Usable Devices .................................................................................................................402

15 FANUC
15.1
15.2
15.3
15.4
15.5

..............................................................................................406

Connection Table ..............................................................................................................406
System Configuration .......................................................................................................407
Connection Diagram .........................................................................................................408
Environment Settings .......................................................................................................416
Usable Devices .................................................................................................................417

16 YOKOGAWA
16.1
16.2
16.3
16.4
16.5

..........................................370.....................................................................................418

Connection Table ..............................................................................................................418
System Configuration .......................................................................................................419
Connection Diagram .........................................................................................................421
Environment Settings .......................................................................................................429
Usable Devices .................................................................................................................430

17 INVERTER.........................................................................................434

External Device Setup Manual3

Contents

17.1
17.2
17.3
17.4
17.5

Connection Table ............................................................................................................. 434
System Configuration ...................................................................................................... 434
Connection Diagram ........................................................................................................ 435
Environment Settings ....................................................................................................... 438
Usable Devices ................................................................................................................ 439

18 FUJI
18.1
18.2
18.3
18.4
18.5

...................................................................................................440

Connection Table ............................................................................................................. 440
System Configuration ...................................................................................................... 443
Connection Diagram ........................................................................................................ 447
Environment Settings ....................................................................................................... 470
Usable Devices ................................................................................................................ 474

19 Toshiba
19.1
19.2
19.3
19.4
19.5
19.6

..............................................................................................478

Connection Table ............................................................................................................. 478
System Configuration ...................................................................................................... 480
Connection Diagram ........................................................................................................ 483
Environment Settings ....................................................................................................... 501
Usable Devices ................................................................................................................ 502
The mapping table of devices between PROSEC T Series and V Series ........................ 503

20 LS Industrial Systems
20.1
20.2
20.3
20.4
20.5

21 VIGOR
21.1
21.2
21.3
21.4
21.5

...............................................................................................518

Connection Table ............................................................................................................. 518
System Configuration ...................................................................................................... 519
Connection Diagram ........................................................................................................ 520
Environment Settings ....................................................................................................... 535
Usable Devices ................................................................................................................ 536

22 Emerson
22.1
22.2
22.3
22.4
22.5

........................................................................504

Connection Table ............................................................................................................. 504
System Configuration ...................................................................................................... 505
Connection Diagram ........................................................................................................ 507
Environment Settings ....................................................................................................... 516
Usable Devices ................................................................................................................ 517............................................................................................537

Connection Table ............................................................................................................. 537
System Configuration ...................................................................................................... 537
Connection Diagram ........................................................................................................ 538
Environment Settings ....................................................................................................... 540
Usable Devices ................................................................................................................ 541

23 Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems
23.1
23.2
23.3

4

...............................................547

Connection Table ............................................................................................................. 547
System Configuration ...................................................................................................... 548
Environment Settings ....................................................................................................... 549

External Device Setup ManualContents

23.4

Chapter 3
1

Chapter 4

Conditions.....................567.........................................................................................................................567

DM Link Communication...............................................................................................570

Outline ..............................................................................................................................570
DM Link Communication ................................................................................................570........................................................................572

DM Link 1:1 Communication ..........................................................................................572
DM Link 1:N Communication .........................................................................................572
DM Link 1:N Communication .........................................................................................573

Wiring3.1
3.2

4................................................................................566

Runtime System Software Version of the MICRO/I or Touch ........................................566
Communication Traffic Volume of the O/I Link Network ..............................................566
Notice of the case of HG1F ..............................................................................................566

System Configuration
2.1
2.2
2.3

3

.................................................564

Master Error Processing ...................................................................................................564
Slave Error Processing ......................................................................................................564
Status of a Slave in the O/I Link .......................................................................................564
Slave changes status from Online to Offline in the O/I Link ...........................................565

Outline1.1
1.2

2

Slave Registration Setting Register (LSD102 in the master) ...........................................563
Slave Online Data Register (LSD104 in the master) ........................................................563
O/I Link Polling Period Register (LSD101 in the slaves) ................................................563
Slave Error information Register(LSD106 in the master) ................................................563

Result on the Performance Evaluation of the MICRO/I
6.1

1

Outline ..............................................................................................................................554
Operation ..........................................................................................................................554
Required Optional Parts ....................................................................................................555
O/I Link Wiring Diagram .................................................................................................555

Notice to O/I link
5.1
5.2
5.3

6

....................................................................554

Communication Status Confirmation
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4

5

O/I Link Communication

O/I Link Communication Settings ......................................................561
Communication Service .....................................................................563
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4

4

.................................................................................................................550

O/I Link Communication
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4

2
3

Usable Devices.................................................................................................574

RS232C .............................................................................................................................574
RS422/485 ........................................................................................................................578

Communication Specifications...........................................................585

External Device Setup Manual5

Contents

4.1
4.2
4.3

5

Data Memory (DM) Allocation
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4

6

DM Link 1:1 Communication / DM Link 1:N Communication ...................................... 588
DM Link Ethernet (UDP) Communication ..................................................................... 589

Read ................................................................................................................................. 601
Write ................................................................................................................................ 604
Clear ................................................................................................................................. 607
Station Number ................................................................................................................ 607

10.1

Chapter 56................................................................................................................. 615

Modbus...............................................................................618

Compatible Protocols ....................................................................................................... 618
Compatible PLCs ............................................................................................................. 619

System Configuration
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4

..................................... 614.......................................................................................615

Response Time

Connection Table
1.1
1.2................................................................................614

BCC Calculation Example (for DM Link 1:N Communication)

11 Error Codes
11.1..........................................608

Read ................................................................................................................................. 608
Write ................................................................................................................................ 611

10 BCC Calculation2.................................................601

DM Link Ethernet (UDP) Communication
9.1
9.2

1

..................................................590

Read ................................................................................................................................. 590
Write ................................................................................................................................ 593
Transmission Control ....................................................................................................... 596
Clear Command ............................................................................................................... 598
Event Transmission .......................................................................................................... 599

DM Link 1:N Communication Format
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4

9

......................................................588

DM Link 1:1Communication Format
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5

8

............................................................587

System Area .................................................................................................................... 587
D0 to D11 Event Transmission (DM14) .......................................................................... 587
Event Area Setting (DM15) ............................................................................................. 587
User Area (DM16 to DM8191) ....................................................................................... 587

DM Link Communication Settings
6.1
6.2

7

Communication Method .................................................................................................. 585
Communication Conditions ............................................................................................. 585
Flow control ..................................................................................................................... 586........................................................................620

Modbus RTU Master ....................................................................................................... 620
Modbus ASCII Master ..................................................................................................... 620
Modbus TCP Client ......................................................................................................... 620
Modbus TCP Server ....................................................................................................... 621

External Device Setup ManualContents

2.5
Modbus RTU Slave .....................................................621
2.6
Twido ................................................................................................................................621
2.7
Momentum (MODUBS/TCP Client) ................................................................................625
2.8
1: N Communication-TWDL CAA16DRF/TWDLCAA24DRF +TWDNAC485D(Communication board) 625
2.9
1: N Communication- TWDLCAA16DRF/TWDLCAA24DRF +TWDNAC485T(Communication board) 626

3

Connection Diagram
3.1
3.2
3.3

4

5

Chapter 6
1

1: N Communication (Multi-drop)
Outline............................................654..............................................................................................................................654

Compatible Communication Drivers..................................................656

Initial Setting ....................................................................................................................656
External Device Settings ..................................................................................................656
Connection Diagram .........................................................................................................660

1:N Communication Operation
4.1.................655................................................................................655

Settings of the 1: N Communication
3.1
3.2
3.3

4

...........................638

Overview of the Modbus TCP Server, Modbus RTU Slave Function .............................638
Modbus TCP Server function system configuration ........................................................639
Modbus TCP Slave function system configuration .........................................................640
Devices .............................................................................................................................640
Settings .............................................................................................................................641
Modbus TCP Server Function Communication Format ...................................................642
Modbus RTU Slave Function Communication Format ....................................................643........................................................Modbus TCP/Modbus RTU shared protocol format 644

Communication Drivers Supporting 1: N Communication
2.1

3..................................................................................637

Modbus RTU Master, Modbus ASCII Master, Modbus TCP Client ...............................637
Twido (Modbus RTU Master) ..........................................................................................637
Momentum (Modbus TCP Client) ....................................................................................637

About 1: N Communication (Multi-drop)
1.12.........................................................................636

Modbus TCP Server/Modbus RTU Slave Function
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8

.....................................627.....................................630.....................................633

Twido ................................................................................................................................636
Momentum (Modbus TCP Client) ....................................................................................636

Usable Devices
5.1
5.2
5.3

6

Connection Diagram 1: TWDNAC232D to MICRO/I or Touch
Connection Diagram 2: TWDNAC485D to MICRO/I or Touch
Connection Diagram 3: TWDNAC485T to MICRO/I or Touch

Environment Settings
4.1
4.2..........................................................................627

1:N Communication Operation..........................................................666........................................................................................666

External Device Setup Manual

7

Contents

5

Restrictions

Chapter 7
1

Communication Cables

Communication Cables
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
1.17
1.18
1.19
1.20
1.21
1.22

8

........................................................................................668......................................................................670

Maintenance Cable: HG9Z-XCM22 ................................................................................ 670
PLC connection cable: FC4A-KC2C ............................................................................... 670
PLC connection cable: HG9Z-3C115 .............................................................................. 671
PLC connection cable: HG9Z-3C125 .............................................................................. 671
PLC connection cable: HG9Z-3C135 .............................................................................. 672
PLC connection cable: HG9Z-3C145 .............................................................................. 672
PLC connection cable: HG9Z-3C155 .............................................................................. 673
PLC connection cable: HG9Z-3C165 .............................................................................. 674
Printer/ External devices/ PLC connection cable: FC2A-KP1C ..................................... 675
PLC connection cable: FC4A-KC1C ............................................................................... 676
PLC connection cable: HG9Z-XC145 ............................................................................. 676
PLC connection cable: HG9Z-XC155 ............................................................................. 677
PLC connection cable: HG9Z-XC183 ............................................................................. 677
PLC connection cable: HG9Z-XC203 ............................................................................. 678
PLC connection cable: HG9Z-XC213 ............................................................................. 678
PLC connection cable: HG9Z-XC245 ............................................................................. 679
PLC connection cable: HG9Z-XC255 ............................................................................. 679
PLC connection cable: HG9Z-XC265 ............................................................................. 680
PLC connection cable: HG9Z-XC275 ............................................................................. 680
PLC connection cable: HG9Z-XC295 ............................................................................. 682
PLC connection cable: HG9Z-XC305 ............................................................................. 682
PLC connection cable: HG9Z-XC315 ............................................................................. 683

External Device Setup ManualChapter 1 PLC Link Communication
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1

Chapter 1

1

PLC Link Communication

1.1

Overview

With the PLC Link communication, the MICRO/I and Touch reads from and writes data to external devices such as relays and registers via the PLC's Link Unit or the CPU Unit Programming Port (the terminology used depends on the PLC manufacturer). No special
communication program is required on the PLC when PLC Link communication is used.

1.2

Operation

The MICRO/I and Touch can use PLC Link communication to read from and write to external devices.

• Reading from the PLC
The continuously reads data from external devices set in the currently displayed screen, and display parts (such as Numerical Displays and Pilot
Lamps) in the MICRO/I or Touch are updated with the latest data at all Times.

• Writing to the PLC
When data input parts in the MICRO/I or Touch (such as Bit or Word buttons) are operated, reading from the PLC is interrupted, and data is written
to the PLC.

1.3

1: N Communication

When the Host I/F Driver or Communication Driver supporting the 1: N Communication is selected, two or more external devices
can be connected to a single MICRO/I or Touch. Refer to Chapter 6 "1: N Communication (Multi-drop)" on page 653 for the details.
Reading from and writing to PLC devices

MICRO/I or Touch

2

External Device Setup Manual2 Important Points Regarding Wiring

2

Important Points Regarding Wiring

Take note of the following points when connecting a PLC to the MICRO/I or Touch.

• Depending on the environment, connect a shield wire to the FG terminal on either the PLC side or the MICRO/I or

1• When using the RS422/485 interface, use a twisted-pair cable so that the + and - signals are paired.
• In case of HG2F/3F/4F when using the RS422/485 interface, wire it using a twisted-pair cable so that the + and - sig-

1

Touch side.

• In case of HG2S when using RS422/485 interface, setting the communication switch (SW2) as the below figure
inserts a 330-Ohm terminating resistor. Use it if necessary.

• In case of HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G and HG1F when using RS422/485 interface, setting the terminator switch ON
inserts a 120-Ohm at HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G, 100-Ohm at HG2G-S/-5S or 330-Ohm at HG1F. *1Use it if necessary.

• The Touch is not equipped with terminating resistance. When using the RS422/485 interface, insert terminating resistance with the appropriate value (around 100 to 120 Ω) between terminal No. 8 (RDA) and terminal No. 9 (RDB) as
required.

HG2G-S/-5S

HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G

PLC Link Communication

nals are paired.

1
1
1
1
1

㼀㼑㼞㼙㼕㼚㼍㼠㼛㼞㻌㻿㼣㼕㼠㼏㼔

HG1F

HG2S

1
1
1
1
1

Touch

1
1
1

*1. In case of HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G inserts terminating resistor to only Terminal Port, not D-SUB port.
Insert 100-120 Ohm terminating resistor when using RS422/485 interface at D-SUB port if necessary.

External Device Setup Manual3Chapter 1

3

Settings for PLC Link Communication

You must setup MICRO/I or Touch using WindO/I-NV2 or WindO/I-NV3 in order for it to be able to communicate with the PLC thatyou will be using.
You will find the WindO/I-NV2 or WindO/I-NV3 setting items for PLC Link Communication in the Host I/F Selection and Configuration - System Setup - Project dialog boxes (refer to WindO/I-NV2 User’s Manual or SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual).
Match the settings for the items in the following table to those of the PLC that you will be using.
Configuration Procedure
On the status bar, click
Change Host I/F Driver or
Change Communication
Driver.
On the Configuration tab,in the System Setup
group, click Project, andthen click the Communication Interface tab.

Setting

Description

Manufacturer

Select the manufacturer, the Host I/F Driver or Communication Driverfrom the list of compatible PLCs given in Chapter 2 that corresponds
to the one you will be using.

Host I/F DriverCommunication Driver
Connection Type
ProtocolWhen the driver supporting 1: N communication is selected, the 1: N
Communication option becomes selectable.
The setting depends on the Connection to the PLC that you will use.
HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G:
Select Host Communication as the interface for PLC communication, and O/I Link Master or O/I Link Slave as the interface for
O/I Link communication. Refer to Chapter 3 "O/I Link Communication" on page 553.
HG2G-S/-5S, HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F:
Select Host Communication or O/I Link Slave from theSERIAL 1. Select O/I Link Master or O/I Link Slave from theO/I Link. Refer to Chapter 3 "O/I Link Communication" onpage 553.
Touch:
Select the External Device Communication as the Port
(RS232C). Select the External Device Communication, O/I
Link Master or O/I Link Slave as the Port (RS422/485). Refer to
Chapter 3 "O/I Link Communication" on page 553.

Baud Rate
Data Bits

The setting depends on the Connection to the PLC that you will use.
Refer to Chapter 2 "Connection to a PLC" on page 7.

Stop Bits
ParityFlow Control
Serial Interface

HG1F transmits the data even if CS signal line is OFF.

4

External Device Setup Manual

3 Settings for PLC Link Communication

Configuration Procedure

Setting

Description

On the Configuration tab,in the System Setup
group, click Project, andthen click the Host I/F
Driver or the Communication Driver tab.

Transmission Wait

The settings depend on the PLC that you will use. Refer to theEnvironment Settings for your PLC. If there is no setting given
for Transmission Wait, set it to 0.

1

If communication errors occur despite trying the number set here,
an error is displayed on the screen and the error information is set
in the system area.

1(x 10 msec.)
Retry Cycles

Time Out(x 100 msec.)

This is the time that the MICRO/I or Touch will wait for a reply
from the PLC after it sends a communication command. When
this time elapses, the MICRO/I or Touch will send the commandagain. The default setting is 20.
Give careful consideration to the value that you will use beforechanging this setting.

On the Configuration tab,in the System Setup
group, click Project, andthen click the Host I/F Network tab

On the Configuration tab,in the System Setup
group, click Project, andthen click the System tab

PLC Link Communication

The default setting is 5.

1
1
1

Other setting

The settings depend on the PLC that you will use. Refer to theEnvironment Settings for your PLC.

Station No

This number is used to distinguish a PLC when set to a device
address.

IP Address

IP address of each PLCs

Port No

Port Number of each PLCs

1

Other setting items

These items depend on the Host I/F Driver or the Communication
Driver. You can see some items if the selected Host I/F Driver has
any setting items. Refer to each manual.

1

Start Time (sec.)

Use System Area
Use System Areas 3, 4
Watch Dog
DeviceThis is the time delay until the MICRO/I or Touch sends a communication command after the power is switched on. Set thiswhen there may be occasions when the PLC is switched on after
the MICRO/I or Touch, or when some time is required until the
PLC communication port can be used.
When Use System Area is selected, set Device Address for System Area so that the PLC device range is not exceeded.
When Watch Dog is selected, set the write device and the time forthe write interval.

Time (sec.)

1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

External Device Setup Manual

5Chapter 1

6External Device Setup ManualChapter 2 Connection to a PLC
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

7

Chapter 2

1

IDEC

Selecting OpenNet,MicroSmart,SmartAXIS Pro/Lite(RS232C/485) as the Host I/F Driver allows the user to use the 1: N Communication and Pass-through function. However, SmartAXIS Pro/Lite does not support the Pass-through function. Selecting
OpenNet,MicroSmart,SmartAXIS Pro/Lite(Ethernet) as the Host I/F Driver allows the user to use 1: N Communication.

• Pass-through function (Refer to “Pass-Through Function” in the WindO/I-NV2 User’s Manual)
However, Touch does not support the Pass-through function.

• 1: N Communication function (Refer to Chapter 6 "1: N Communication (Multi-drop)" on page 653)
1.1

Connection Table

1.1.1

Compatible PLCs

System(CPU unit)

Link unit

WindO/I-NV2, WindO/I-NV3 Settings
Interface

Flow
Control

Host I/F Driver,
Communication
DriverProduct Series
HG2G-5F, HG2G HG1F/ Touch
HG3G/4G -S/-5S 2F/ 2S/
3F/ 4F

OpenNet Controller
FC3A-CP2

Not required(connects to CPU unit)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P20)
RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P23)

Web Server Unit
(FC4A-SX5ES1E)

8

Ethernet

Hardware OpenNet,
MicroSmart,
SmartAXIS Pro/Lite(RS232C/485)
None-

OpenNet,MicroSmart,
SmartAXIS Pro/Lite(Ethernet)

External Device Setup Manual

X

X

X

X

1 IDEC

System(CPU unit)

Link unit

WindO/I-NV2, WindO/I-NV3 Settings
Interface

Flow
Control

Host I/F Driver,
Communication
DriverProduct Series
HG2G-5F, HG2G HG1F/ Touch
HG3G/4G -S/-5S 2F/ 2S/
3F/ 4FMICROSmart*1
FC4A-C10R2

Not required(connects to CPU unit)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 3(refer to P26)

None

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P20)
Ethernet

Not required(connects to CPU unit)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 3(refer to P26)

FC4A-D20K3,
FC4A-D20S3,
FC4A-D20RK1,
FC4A-D20RS1,
FC4A-D40K3,
FC4A-D40S3

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P20)

X

X

X

2
2

-

None

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P20)
FC4A-PC1X

OpenNet,MicroSmart,
SmartAXIS Pro/Lite(Ethernet)
OpenNet,MicroSmart,
SmartAXIS Pro/Lite(RS232C/485)

2
Connection to a PLC

FC4A-C16R2,
FC4A-C24R2Web Server Unit
(FC4A-SX5ES1E)

OpenNet,MicroSmart,
SmartAXIS Pro/Lite(RS232C/485)

2

2
2

Hardware2

FC4A-PC3

RS422/485 2-wire Con- None
nection Diagram 2(refer to P23)

Web Server Unit
(FC4A-SX5ES1E)

Ethernet

Not required(connects to CPU unit)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 3(refer to P26)

-

None

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P20)

2OpenNet,MicroSmart,
SmartAXIS Pro/Lite(Ethernet)
OpenNet,MicroSmart,
SmartAXIS Pro/Lite(RS232C/485)

2
2
2

FC4A-HPC1

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P20)

Hardware

FC4A-HPC3

RS422/485 2-wire Con- None
nection Diagram 2(refer to P23)

FC4A-HPH1 +FC4A-PC1

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P20)

FC4A-HPH1 +FC4A-PC3

RS422/485 2-wire Con- None
nection Diagram 2(refer to P23)

Web Server Unit
(FC4A-SX5ES1E)

Ethernet

2
2

Hardware-2
OpenNet,MicroSmart,
SmartAXIS Pro/Lite(Ethernet)

External Device Setup Manual29Chapter 2

System(CPU unit)

Link unit

WindO/I-NV2, WindO/I-NV3 Settings
Interface

Flow
Control

Host I/F Driver,
Communication
Driver

None

OpenNet,MicroSmart,
SmartAXIS Pro/Lite(RS232C/485)

Product Series
HG2G-5F, HG2G HG1F/ Touch
HG3G/4G -S/-5S 2F/ 2S/
3F/ 4FMICROSmart Pentra*1
FC5A-C10R2,
FC5A-C16R2,
FC5A-C24R2,
FC5A-C10R2C,
FC5A-C16R2C,
FC5A-C24R2C

FC5A-D16RK1,
FC5A-D16RS1,
FC5A-D32K3,
FC5A-D32S3

10

Not required(connects to CPU unit)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 3(refer to P26)
RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P20)

FC4A-PC1

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P20)

Hardware

FC4A-PC3

RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P23)

None

FC5A-SIF2

RS232C
Connection Diagram 4(refer to P29)

FC5A-SIF4

RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P23)

Web Server Unit
(FC4A-SX5ES1E)

Ethernet-

OpenNet,MicroSmart,
SmartAXIS Pro/Lite(Ethernet)

Not required(connects to CPU unit)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 3(refer to P26)

None

OpenNet,MicroSmart,
SmartAXIS Pro/Lite(RS232C/485)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P20)
FC4A-HPC1

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P20)

Hardware

FC4A-HPC3

RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P23)

None

FC4A-HPH1 +FC4A-PC1

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P20)

Hardware

FC4A-HPH1 +FC4A-PC3

RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P23)

None

FC5A-SIF2

RS232C
Connection Diagram 4(refer to P29)

FC5A-SIF4

RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P23)

Web Server Unit
(FC4A-SX5ES1E)

Ethernet-

OpenNet,MicroSmart,
SmartAXIS Pro/Lite(Ethernet)

External Device Setup Manual

X

X

X

X

1 IDEC

System(CPU unit)

Link unit

WindO/I-NV2, WindO/I-NV3 Settings
Interface

FC5A-D12K1E,
FC5A-D12S1E

FlowControl

Host I/F Driver,
Communication
Driver

Not required(connects to CPU unit)

Ethernet-

OpenNet,MicroSmart,
SmartAXIS Pro/Lite(Ethernet)

FC4A-HPC1

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P20)

FC4A-HPC3

RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P23)

Hardware OpenNet,
MicroSmart,
SmartAXIS Pro/Lite(RS232C/485)
None

FC4A-HPH1 +FC4A-PC1

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P20)

Hardware

FC4A-HPH1 +FC4A-PC3

RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P23)

None

FC5A-SIF2

RS232C
Connection Diagram 4(refer to P29)

FC5A-SIF4

RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P23)

Not required(connects to CPU unit)

Ethernet

Product Series
HG2G-5F, HG2G HG1F/ Touch
HG3G/4G -S/-5S 2F/ 2S/
3F/ 4F
X

X

X

X

2
2
2
Connection to a PLC

2
2
2
2

SmartAXIS Pro/Lite
FT1A-H24RA
FT1A-H24RC,
FT1A-B24RA,
FT1A-B24RC,
FT1A-H40RKA,
FT1A-H40RSA,
FT1A-H40RC,
FT1A-B40RKA,
FT1A-B40RSA,
FT1A-B40RC,
FT1A-H48KA,
FT1A-H48SA,FT1A-H48KC,
FT1A-H48SC,
FT1A-B48KA,
FT1A-B48SA,FT1A-B48KC,
FT1A-B48SC

2

FT1A-PC1

RS232C
Connection Diagram 3(refer to P26)

FT1A-PC2

RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 5(refer to P32)

FT1A-PC3

RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P23)

-

None

OpenNet,MicroSmart,
SmartAXIS Pro/Lite(Ethernet)
OpenNet,MicroSmart,
SmartAXIS Pro/Lite(RS232C/485)*1 This PLC was used to test & verify communications.

X

X

X

X

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual11

Chapter 2

1.2

System Configuration

This is the system configuration for the connection of IDEC PLCs to the MICRO/I.

1.2.1

OpenNet Controller (connects to RS232C port of the CPU unit)
FC3A-CP2

MICRO/I
Touch
OpenNet Controller Interface
Connection Diagram 1 (refer to P20)

- In case of HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G a connection cable is available. (part number: HG9Z-XC295).
- In case of HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G a connection cable is available. (part number: HG9Z-XC275).
- In case of HG2F/3F/4F a connection cable is available. (part number: HG9Z-3C125).
- In case of HG1F a connection cable is available. (part number: HG9Z-XC183).

1.2.2

OpenNet Controller (connects to RS485 port of the CPU unit)
FC3A-CP2

MICRO/I
Touch
OpenNet Controller Interface
Connection Diagram 2 (refer to P23)

12

External Device Setup Manual

1 IDEC

1.2.3

MicroSmart/MICROSmart Pentra (uses the communication port1)
FC4A , FC5A

MICRO/I
Touch
RS232C

2

Connection Diagram 1 (refer to P20)
or 3 (refer to P26)

2
2

FC5A-D12K1E and FC5A-D12S1E can not be connected to the HMI with RS232C cable because they don't have built-in
RS232C port.

- In case of HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 1 or 3 (part number: HG9Z-XC275).
- In case of HG2F/3F/4F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 1 (part number: HG9Z-3C125).
- In case of HG1F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 1 (part number: HG9Z-XC183)22
2- In case of HG2F/3F/4F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 3 (part number: FC4A-KC2C).
- In case of HG1F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 3 (part number: FC4A-KC1C).

1.2.4

Connection to a PLC- In case of HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 1 or 3 (part number: HG9Z-XC295).

22

MicroSmart/MICROSmart Pentra (uses the communication port 2)
MICRO/I
Touch
RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P20)

FC4A-C16R2
FC4A-C24R2

FC5A- C10R2
FC5A-C16R2
FC5A-C24R2
FC5A-C10R2C
FC5A-C16R2C
FC5A-C24R2C

FC4A-PC1(Communication Adapter)

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual13

Chapter 2

MICRO/I
Touch
RS485
Connection Diagram 2(refer to P23)

FC4A-C16R2
FC4A-C24R2

FC5A-C10R2
FC5A-C16R2
FC5A-C24R2
FC5A-C10R2C
FC5A-C16R2C
FC5A-C24R2C

FC4A-PC3(Communication Adapter)

MICRO/I
Touch
RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P20)

FC4A-D*****
FC5A-D*****

FC4A-HPH1(HMI Base Module)

FC4A-PC1(Communication Adapter)

MICRO/I
Touch
RS485
Connection Diagram 2(refer to P23)

FC4A-D*****
FC5A-D*****

FC4A-HPH1(HMI Base Module)

FC4A-PC3(Communication Adapter)- In case of HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 1 (part number: HG9Z-XC295).
- In case of HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 1 (part number: HG9Z-XC275).
- In case of HG2F/3F/4F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 1 (part number: HG9Z-3C125).
- In case of HG1F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 1 (part number: HG9Z-XC183).

14

External Device Setup Manual

1 IDEC

1.2.5

MicroSmart/MICROSmart Pentra (uses the Communication Module)
MICRO/I
Touch

2

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1

2(refer to P20)

FC4A-D*****
FC5A-D*****

2

FC4A-HPC1

2

RS485
Connection Diagram 22(refer to P23)

FC4A-D*****
FC5A-D*****

2
Connection to a PLC

MICRO/I
Touch

2

FC4A-HPC32
MICRO/I
Touch
RS232C
Connection Diagram 4(refer to P29)

2
2
2

FC5A-D*****

FC5A-SIF22222

External Device Setup Manual

15

Chapter 2

MICRO/I
Touch
RS485
Connection Diagram 2(refer to P23)

FC5A-D*****

FC5A-SIF4- In case of HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 1 (part number: HG9Z-XC295).
- In case of HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 1 (part number: HG9Z-XC275).
- In case of HG2F/3F/4F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 1 (part number: HG9Z-3C125).
- In case of HG1F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 1 (part number: HG9Z-XC183).

16

External Device Setup Manual

1 IDEC

1.2.6

OpenNet Controller/MICROSmart/MICROSmart Pentra (uses Web Server Unit)
MICRO/ITouch
PLC Connecting Cable
FC4A-KC3C

2

Ethernet

2
FC3A
FC4A
FC5A

2

MICROSmart Pentra (FC5A-D12K1E, FC5A-D12S1E)

Ethernet

Connection to a PLC

1.2.7

2

Web Server Unit
FC4A-SX5ES1E

2

MICRO/I
Touch

2
2

FC5A-D12K1E,
FC5A-D12S1E

2

1.2.8

2

SmartAXIS Pro/Lite (with Communication cartridge)
RS232C
Connection Diagram 3

MICRO/I
Touch(refer to P26)

2
2

FT1A-PC1

RS485
Connection Diagram 5

MICRO/I
Touch(refer to P32)

2
2

FC4A-PC2FT1A-H24
-B24
-H40
-B40
-H48
-B48

RS485
Connection Diagram 2(refer to P23)

MICRO/I
Touch

2
2

FC4A-PC3

External Device Setup Manual

17Chapter 2

1.2.9

SmartAXIS Pro/Lite

Ethernet

MICRO/I
Touch

FT1A-H24
-B24
-H40
-B40
-H48
-B48

1.2.10 1: N Communication-OpenNet Controller/MICROSmart/MICROSmart Pentra/
SmartAXIS Pro/Lite
The 1: N communication can be established by using the following connections• OpenNet Controller (Connects to the RS485 port of the CPU unit)• MICROSmart/MICROSmart Pentra (Port 2) on RS485 connection• MICROSmart/MICROSmart Pentra (with Communication module) on RS485 connection• SmartAXIS Pro/Lite (with Communication cartridge) on RS485 connection
MICRO/I
Touch

RS485
Connection Diagram 2

...

PLC1

18

PLC2

PLC3

External Device Setup Manual

PLCn

1 IDEC

1.2.11

1: N Communication-OpenNet Controller/MICROSmart/MICROSmart Pentra/
SmartAXIS Pro/Lite (uses Web Server Unit)

The 1: N communication can be established by using the following connections• OpenNet Controller(uses Web Server Unit)• MICROSmart/MICROSmart Pentra (uses Web Server Unit)• MICROSmart Pentra FC5A-D12K1E, FC5A-D12S1E (Do not uses Web Server Unit)• SmartAXIS Pro/Lite (Do not uses Web Server Unit)

2
2
2

MICRO/I
Touch

2
Connection to a PLC

2

Ethernet

2
2

...

2
2
2

...

2
PLC1

PLC2

PLC3

PLCn

2
- Use a crossover cable to connect the MICRO/I and PLC directly.
- When using a hub (Ethernet switch), use a cable that can be used with the hub.

222External Device Setup Manual

19Chapter 2

1.3

Connection Diagram

The connector types given in the Connection Diagrams are for the unit and not the cable. For details regarding wiring, refer
to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

1.3.1

Connection Diagram 1: OpenNet Controller (RS232C port) to MICROI, Touch
MICROSmart Pentra (RS232C port) to MICRO/I, Touch

Mini Din 8P

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

- In case of HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G a connection cable is available. (part number: HG9Z-XC295).
- The Connection Diagram 1 is not same as HG9Z-XC295. But both diagrams are available. Refer to Chapter 7 "1.20 PLC connection cable:
HG9Z-XC295" on page 682 about the connection diagram of HG9Z-XC295.

20

External Device Setup Manual

1 IDEC22
2
2
Terminal- In case of HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G a connection cable is available. (part number: HG9Z-XC275).
- Refer to Chapter 7 "1.19 PLC connection cable: HG9Z-XC275" on page 680 about the connection diagram of HG9Z-XC275.

Connection to a PLC

Mini Din 8P

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Mini Din 8P

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

- In case of HG1F a connection cable is available. (part number: HG9Z-XC183).
- The Connection Diagram 1 is not same as HG9Z-XC183. But both diagrams are available. Refer to Chapter 7 "1.13 PLC connection cable:
HG9Z-XC183" on page 677 about the connection diagram of HG9Z-XC183.

22
2

External Device Setup Manual21

Chapter 2

Mini Din 8P

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

- In case of HG2F/3F/4F a connection cable is available. (part number: HG9Z-3C125).
- The Connection Diagram 1 is not same as HG9Z-3C125. But both diagrams are available. Refer to Chapter 7 "1.4 PLC connection cable:
HG9Z-3C125" on page 671 about the connection diagram of HG9Z-3C125.

Mini Din 8P

22

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

External Device Setup Manual

1 IDEC

1.3.2

Connection Diagram 2: OpenNet Controller (RS485 port) to MICRO/I, Touch
MICROSmart/MICROSmart Pentra (RS485 port) to MICRO/I, Touch
MICROSmart/MICROSmart Pentra (FC5A-SIF4) to MICRO/I, Touch
SmartAXIS Pro/Lite (FT1A-PC3) to MICRO/I, Touch22
2
2
Connection to a PLC

2Screw terminal block

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2

Screw terminal block

Terminal

2- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.
- HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G Series uses only RDA and RDB when using RS422/485 2-wire, you don’t need to connect SDA or SDB.
If connecting COM1 on the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G to the external device, do not insert terminating resistor to the external device. If terminating resistor can not be removed, use COM2 on the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G instead of COM1.
- Touch has no pin number corresponding to TERM. When a termination resistor is necessary, insert one with suitable resistance value
between pin 8 (RDA) and pin 9 (RDB).

2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual

23Chapter 2

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Screw terminal block

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG1F, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control to NONE.

24

External Device Setup Manual

1 IDEC2222Connection to a PLC

2Screw terminal block

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual

25

Chapter 2

1.3.3

Connection Diagram 3: MICROSmart/MICROSmart Pentra (RS232C Port 1) to MICRO/I, Touch
SmartAXIS Pro/Lite (FT1A-PC1) to MICRO/I, Touch

Mini DIN 8P

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeIn case of HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G a connection cable is available. (part number: HG9Z-XC295).

Mini Din 8P

Terminal- In case of HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G a connection cable is available. (part number: HG9Z-XC275).
- Refer to Chapter 7 "1.19 PLC connection cable: HG9Z-XC275" on page 680 about the connection diagram of HG9Z-XC275.

26

External Device Setup Manual

1 IDEC2222
D-sub, 9P connector socket type

- In case of HG1F a connection cable is available. (part number: FC4A-KC1C).
- The Connection Diagram 3 is not same as FC4A-KC1C. But both diagrams are available. Refer to Chapter 7 "1.10 PLC connection cable:
FC4A-KC1C" on page 676 about the connection diagram of FC4A-KC1C.

Connection to a PLC

Mini DIN 8P

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Mini DIN 8P

D-sub, 25P connector socket type2
- In case of HG2F/3F/4Fa connection cable is available. (part number: FC4A-KC2C).
- The Connection Diagram 3 is not same as FC4A-KC2C. But both diagrams are available. Refer to Chapter 7 "1.2 PLC connection cable:
FC4A-KC2C" on page 670 about the connection diagram of FC4A-KC2C.

2
2

External Device Setup Manual27

Chapter 2

Mini DIN 8P

28

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

External Device Setup Manual

1 IDEC

1.3.4

Connection Diagram 4: MICROSmart/MICROSmart Pentra (FC5A-SIF2) to MICRO/I, Touch22
2
2
Connection to a PLC

2Terminal

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2

Terminal

Terminal2222External Device Setup Manual29Chapter 2

30

Terminal

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Terminal

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

External Device Setup Manual

1 IDEC2222
D-sub, 37P connector plug type

Connection to a PLC

Terminal

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual31

Chapter 2

1.3.5

Connection Diagram 5: SmartAXIS Pro/Lite (FT1A-PC2) to MICRO/I, Touch

7
2
1

MiniDIN8P

D-sub, 9P connector plug type7
2
1

MiniDIN8P

Terminal- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.
- HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G Series uses only RDA and RDB when using RS422/485 2-wire, you don’t need to connect SDA or SDB.
If connecting COM1 on the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G to the external device, do not insert terminating resistor to the external device. If terminating resistor can not be removed, use COM2 on the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G instead of COM1.
- In case of HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G a connection cable is available. (part number: HG9Z-XC275).
- Refer to Chapter 7 "1.19 PLC connection cable: HG9Z-XC275" on page 680 about the connection diagram of HG9Z-XC275.
- Touch has no pin number corresponding to TERM. When a termination resistor is necessary, insert one with suitable resistance value
between pin 8 (RDA) and pin 9 (RDB).

32

External Device Setup Manual

1 IDEC

2
2

7
2
1

2
2

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

MiniDIN8P

2
2
2
2

7
2
1

2
MiniDIN8P

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2
2

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG1F, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control to NONE.

222

External Device Setup Manual

33

Chapter 2

MiniDIN8P

D-sub, 25P connector socket type7
2
1

MiniDIN8P

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

34

External Device Setup Manual

1 IDEC

1.4

Environment Settings

1.4.1

OpenNet Controller and MICROSmart

Item

Setting

Baud Rate (bps)9600

Data Bits (bits)

7

ParityEven

Stop Bits

1

Network Number0(DEC)*1*1Set a decimal number for the Network Number.

2
2
2
2

Item

Setting

Connection to a PLC

IP Address (MICRO/I)

Set the IP address for MICRO/I.
(Set this item in Communication Interface tab.)2

Subnet Mask

Set the subnet mask for MICRO/I.
(Set this item in Communication Interface tab.)Default Gateway

Set the default gateway for MICRO/I.
(Set this item in Communication Interface tab.)

IP Address (Web Server Unit)

Set the IP address for Web Server Unit.
(Set this item in Host I/F Network tab.)

Port Number (Web Server Unit)

Set the port number for Web Server Unit.
(Set this item in Host I/F Network tab.)When connecting an OpenNet Controller to the MICRO/I, you must set the OpenNet Controller special Internal Relay
M8014 to on.

1.4.2

OpenNet Controller, MICROSmart/MICROSmart Pentra (uses Web Server Unit)

Set the following items on Project Settings dialog box.

- When connecting an OpenNet Controller to the MICRO/I, you must set the OpenNet Controller special Internal Relay M8014 to on.

2
2
2

2
2
2
2

- If the HG3F/4F is connected to the IDEC Web Sever Unit, the communication speed of the Web Sever Unit (Ethernet) must be set to “10Base” or “Auto”.

22
2

External Device Setup Manual

35

Chapter 2

1.4.3

MICROSmart Pentra (FC5A-D12K1E, FC5A-D12S1E)

Set the following items on Project Settings dialog box.

36

Item

Setting

IP Address (MICRO/I)

Set the IP address for MICRO/I.
(Set this item in Communication Interface tab.)Subnet Mask

Set the subnet mask for MICRO/I.
(Set this item in Communication Interface tab.)Default Gateway

Set the default gateway for MICRO/I.
(Set this item in Communication Interface tab.)

IP Address (FC5A)

Set the IP address for FC5A.
(Set this item in Host I/F Network tab.)

Port Number (FC5A)

Set the port number for FC5A.
(Set this item in Host I/F Network tab.)External Device Setup Manual

1 IDEC

1.5

Usable Devices

1.5.1

OpenNet Controller/MICROSmart (uses Web Server Unit)

Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Internal Relay (Bit)MM

0 - 2557, 8000 - 8317

R/W

*1

Input (Bit)II

0 - 627

R*1

Output (Bit)Q

Q

0 - 627

R/W*1

Timer (Contact)TT

0 - 255

R

Dec

Counter (Contact)CC

0 - 255

R

Dec

Shift Register (Bit)RR

0 - 255

R

Dec

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual2

Word Device
Device Symbol
MICRO/I

PLC

Data RegisterDD

0 - 49999

R/W

Dec

Input (Word)

WI

I

0 - 620R

Dec*1

Output (Word)

WQ

Q

0 - 620

R/W

Dec*1

Internal Relay (Word)

WM

M

0 - 2540, 8000 - 8300

R/W

Dec*1

Timer (Current)TCT

0 - 255

R

Dec

Counter (Current)CCC

0 - 255

R

Dec

Timer (Preset)TPT

0 - 255

R/W

Dec

Counter (Preset)

CPC

0 - 255

R/W

Dec

Link RegisterLL

100 - 1317

R/W

*2

Shift Register (Word)

WRR

0 - 240R

Dec*3

Error Register

E

-

0-5

R/W

Dec

2
2
Connection to a PLC*1 Set position 1 for this device in octal.

Device Name

2

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

*1 Set this device using a multiplier of 20.
*2 Set position 1 for this device in octal.
*3 Set this device using a multiplier of 16.

2- Usage limitations may exist for PLC devices depending on the operating conditions. Refer to the PLC manual to confirm performance
under your actual operating conditions.

2- When connecting an OpenNet Controller to the MICRO/I, you must set the OpenNet Controller special Internal Relay M8014 to on.

2

External Device Setup Manual37

Chapter 2

2

Mitsubishi

Selecting MELSEC-Q (CPU), MELSEC-FX (CPU), MELSEC-FX2N (CPU), or MELSEC-FX3U (CPU) for the Host I/F Driverallows the user to use the Pass-through function.
Selecting MELSEC-Q/QnA (Ethernet), MELSEC-FX3U(Ethernet) or MELSEC-FX(LINK) for the Host I/F Driver allows the user to
use the 1: N Communication.

• Pass-through function (Refer to “Pass-Through Function” in the WindO/I-NV2 User’s Manual)
However, Touch does not support the Pass-through function.

• 1: N Communication function (Refer to Chapter 6 "1: N Communication (Multi-drop)" on page 653)
2.1

Connection Table

2.1.1

Compatible PLCs

System(CPU unit)

Link unit

WindO/I-NV2, WindO/I-NV3 Settings

Product Series

Interface

Flow
Control

Host I/F Driver, HG2G-5F, HG2G
Communication HG3G/4G -S/-5S
Driver

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P56)

Hardware

MELSEC-AnN(LINK)

HG1F/ Touch
2F/ 2S/
3F/ 4FMELSEC-A
A1N, A2N, A3N

AJ71C24,
AJ71C24-S3/-S6/-S8,
AJ71UC24

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P59)
A1SJ71C24-R2*1,
A1SJ71UC24-R2

RS232C
Connection Diagram 3(refer to P62)

A1SJ71C24-R4,
A1SJ71UC24-R4

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P59)

A2CCPUC24

Not required(Connects to CPU unit)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 3(refer to P62)

A0J2, A0J2H

A0J2-C214-S1

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P56)

A1SH*1

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P59)
A2A, A3A,
A2U, A3U,
A4U

AJ71C24-S6/-S8,
AJ71UC24

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P56)

MELSEC-AnA(Link)

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P59)
A2US,
A2USH-S1

38

A1SJ71C24-R2,
A1SJ71UC24-R2*1

RS232C
Connection Diagram 3(refer to P62)

A1SJ71C24-R4

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P59)

External Device Setup Manual

X

X

X

---

2 Mitsubishi

System(CPU unit)

Link unit

WindO/I-NV2, WindO/I-NV3 Settings
Interface

Flow
Control

Host I/F Driver, HG2G-5F, HG2G
Communication HG3G/4G -S/-5S
DriverNone

MELSEC-AnN(CPU)

Not required(Connects to CPU unit)

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 4(refer to P65)

A1SJH
A1SH, A2SH,
A2C, A0J2H

Not required(Connects to CPU unit)

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 4(refer to P65)

MELSEC-A1S/
A2C(CPU)

A2A, A3A, A2US, Not required
A2USH(Connects to CPU unit)

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 4(refer to P65)

MELSEC-AnA(CPU)

Not required(Connects to CPU unit)

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 4(refer to P65)

MELSEC-AnU(CPU)

AJ71QC24N-R2
AJ71QC24N

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P56)

AJ71QC24N-R4

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P59)

---

---

HG1F/ Touch
2F/ 2S/
3F/ 4F
X

---

2
2
2

MELSEC-QnA
Q4ACPU,
Q4ARCPU,
Q3ACPU,Q2ACPU-S1,
Q2ACPU

Hardware/ MELSEC-Q/QnA
None(LINK)

X

X

X

---

Ethernet

2-

AJ71QE71N-B2MELSEC-Q/
QnA (Ethernet)

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

---

A1SJ71QC24N-R2
A1SJ71QC24N

RS232C
Connection Diagram 3(refer to P62)

Hardware/ MELSEC-Q/QnA
None(LINK)

2

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P59)
A1SJ71QE71N3-T
A1SJ71QE71N-B2

2
2

AJ71QE71N-B5
Q2ASHCPU-S1,
Q2ASHCPU,
Q2ASCPU-S1,
Q2ASCPU2
2

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 9(refer to P76)
AJ71QE71N3-T

2Connection to a PLC

A2N*1

A2U*1,
A2USH-S1*1

Product Series

Ethernet-

MELSEC-Q/
QnA (Ethernet)

X

X

X

X

2
2

A1SJ71QE71N-B52
22

External Device Setup Manual39

Chapter 2

System(CPU unit)

Link unit

WindO/I-NV2, WindO/I-NV3 Settings

Product Series

Interface

Flow
Control

Host I/F Driver, HG2G-5F, HG2G
Communication HG3G/4G -S/-5S
Driver

Not required(connects to CPU unit)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 6(refer to P70)
Connection Diagram 7(refer to P72)

Hardware

MELSEC-Q/QnA(LINK)QJ71C24N-R2*1

RS232C
Connection Diagram 3(refer to P62)

HG1F/ Touch
2F/ 2S/
3F/ 4FMELSEC-Q
Q00CPU*1,
Q01CPU*1,
Q00UJCPU,
Q00UCPU,
Q01UCPU,
Q02UCPU
Q02CPU*1,
Q02HCPU,
Q06HCPU*1,
Q12HCPU,
Q25HCPU,Q00UJCPU,
Q00UCPU,
Q01UCPU,
Q02UCPU,
Q03UDCPU,
Q04UDHCPU,
Q06UDHCPU,
Q10UDHCPU,
Q13UDHCPU,
Q20UDHCPU,
Q26UDHCPU,
Q03UDECPU,
Q04UDEHCPU,
Q06UDEHCPU,
Q10UDEHCPU,
Q13UDEHCPU,
Q20UDEHCPU,
Q26UDEHCPU,
Q50UDEHCPU,
Q100UDEHCPU

40

QJ71C24N

*1

X

X

X

---

---

---

X

---

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P59)

Q02CPU*1,
Q02HCPUNot required(connects to CPU unit)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 6(refer to P70)
Connection Diagram 7(refer to P72)

MELSEC-Q (CPU)Q02CPU-AmodeNot required(connects to CPU unit)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 6(refer to P70)
Connection Diagram 7(refer to P72)

MELSEC-AnU(CPU)

External Device Setup Manual

2 Mitsubishi

System(CPU unit)

Link unit

WindO/I-NV2, WindO/I-NV3 Settings
Interface

Q00JCPU,
Q00CPU,
Q01CPU

QJ71E71-100*1,
QJ71E71-B5,
QJ71E71-B2

Ethernet

Flow
Control-

Host I/F Driver, HG2G-5F, HG2G
Communication HG3G/4G -S/-5S
Driver
MELSEC-Q/QnA(Ethernet)

X

X

HG1F/ Touch
2F/ 2S/
3F/ 4F
X

X

2
2

Q02CPU*1,
Q02HCPU,
Q06HCPU,
Q12HCPU,
Q25HCPU,Q00UJCPU,
Q00UCPU,
Q01UCPU,
Q02UCPU,
Q03UDCPU,
Q04UDHCPU,
Q06UDHCPU,
Q10UDHCPU,
Q13UDHCPU,
Q20UDHCPU,
Q26UDHCPU,
Q03UDECPU,
Q04UDEHCPU,
Q06UDEHCPU,
Q10UDEHCPU,
Q13UDEHCPU,
Q20UDEHCPU,
Q26UDEHCPU,
Q50UDEHCPU,
Q100UDEHCPU

2
2
Connection to a PLC

Q03UDECPU,
Q04UDEHCPU,
Q06UDEHCPU,
Q10UDEHCPU,
Q13UDEHCPU,
Q20UDEHCPU,
Q26UDEHCPU,
Q50UDEHCPU,
Q100UDEHCPU

Product Series

2
2
2
2
2
2

Not required(connects to CPU unit)

2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual41

Chapter 2

System(CPU unit)

Link unit

WindO/I-NV2, WindO/I-NV3 Settings

Product Series

Interface

Flow
Control

Host I/F Driver, HG2G-5F, HG2G
Communication HG3G/4G -S/-5S
Driver

Hardware

MELSEC-FX(CPU)

HG1F/ Touch
2F/ 2S/
3F/ 4FMELSEC-FX
FX1,FX2, FX2C

Not required(connects to CPU unit)

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 4(refer to P65)

FX0, FX0N,(FX1N)*1,
FX0S*1,FX1S*1

Not required(connects to CPU unit)

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 4(refer to P65)

FX1NC,
FX2NC

Not required(connects to CPU unit)

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 10(refer to P79)
RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 4(refer to P65)

MELSEC-FX2N(CPU)RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 10(refer to P79)

FX1N

FX2NC-232ADP

RS232C
Connection Diagram 8(refer to P74)

Not required(connects to CPU unit)

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 4(refer to P65)
RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 10(refer to P79)

FX1N-232-BD *2

RS232C
Connection Diagram 5(refer to P68)

FX1N-422-BD*2

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 4(refer to P65)
RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 10(refer to P79)

FX1N-CNV-BD +FX2NC-232ADP

42

RS232C
Connection Diagram 8(refer to P74)

External Device Setup Manual

X

X

X

---

2 Mitsubishi

System(CPU unit)

FX2N

Link unit

Not required(connects to CPU unit)

WindO/I-NV2, WindO/I-NV3 Settings

Product Series

Interface

Flow
Control

Host I/F Driver, HG2G-5F, HG2G
Communication HG3G/4G -S/-5S
Driver

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 4(refer to P65)

Hardware

MELSEC-FX2N
(CPU)

X

X

HG1F/ Touch
2F/ 2S/
3F/ 4FX---

2

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 10(refer to P79)
RS232C
Connection Diagram 5(refer to P68)

FX2N-422-BD*2

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 4(refer to P65)22
Connection to a PLC

FX2N-232-BD*2

2

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 10(refer to P79)

FX3UC*1,
FX3U

FX2N-CNV-BD +FX2NC-232ADP

RS232C
Connection Diagram 8(refer to P74)

Not required(connects to CPU unit)

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 4(refer to P65)

2

MELSEC-FX3UC
(CPU)

2

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 10(refer to P79)
FX3U-232ADP*1
or
FX3U-CNV-BD +FX3U-232ADP

2

RS232C
Connection Diagram 8(refer to P74)

2

FX3U-232-BD

FX3G

FX3U-ENET-L*3

Ethernet

Not required(connects to CPU unit)

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 4(refer to P65)

FX3G-CNV-ADP +FX3U-232ADP*1

2-

MELSEC-FX3U(Ethernet)

X

X

X

X

Hardware

MELSEC-FX3UC
(CPU)

X

X

X

---

2
2

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 10(refer to P79)

2

RS232C
Connection Diagram 8(refer to P74)22
2

External Device Setup Manual

43

Chapter 2

System(CPU unit)

Link unit

WindO/I-NV2, WindO/I-NV3 Settings
Interface

FX1S,
FX1N

FX1N-232-BD
FX1N-CNV-BD +FX2NC-232ADPFX1N-485-BD

RS232C
Connection Diagram 8(refer to P74)

Flow
Control

Host I/F Driver, HG2G-5F, HG2G
Communication HG3G/4G -S/-5S
DriverNone

MELSEC-FX(LINK)

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 11(refer to P82)
RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 12(refer to P83)

FX1N-CNV-BD +FX2NC-485ADP

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 11(refer to P82)
RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 12(refer to P83)

FX2N

FX2N-232-BD
FX2N-CNV-BD +FX2NC-232ADP
FX2N-485-BD

RS232C
Connection Diagram 8(refer to P74)
RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 11(refer to P82)
RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 12(refer to P83)

FX2N-CNV-BD +FX2NC-485ADP

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 11(refer to P82)
RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 12(refer to P83)

FX1NC,FX2NC

FX2NC-232ADP

RS232C
Connection Diagram 8(refer to P74)

FX2NC-485ADP

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 11(refer to P82)
RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 12(refer to P83)

44

Product Series

External Device Setup ManualXX

HG1F/ Touch
2F/ 2S/
3F/ 4F---X

2 Mitsubishi

System(CPU unit)

Link unit

WindO/I-NV2, WindO/I-NV3 Settings
Interface

FX3U

FX3U-232-BD
FX3U-CNV-BD +FX3U-232ADP
FX3U-485-BD

RS232C
Connection Diagram 8(refer to P74)

Flow
Control

Host I/F Driver, HG2G-5F, HG2G
Communication HG3G/4G -S/-5S
DriverNone

MELSEC-FX(LINK)

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 11(refer to P82)
RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 12(refer to P83)

FX3U-CNV-BD +FX3U-485ADP

FX3U-232-BD
FX3U-232ADP
FX3U-485-BD

RS232C
Connection Diagram 8(refer to P74)
RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 11(refer to P82)
RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 12(refer to P83)

FX3U-485ADP

FX3G

FX3G-232-BD
FX3G-CNV-ADP +FX3U-232ADP
FX3G-485-BD

FX3G-CNV-ADP +FX3U-485ADPXX

HG1F/ Touch
2F/ 2S/
3F/ 4F
---

X

2
2
2
2
Connection to a PLC

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 11(refer to P82)
RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 12(refer to P83)

FX3UC

Product Series

2
2
2
2

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 11(refer to P82)

2

RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 12(refer to P83)

2

RS232C
Connection Diagram 8(refer to P74)

2

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 11(refer to P82)

2

RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 12(refer to P83)

2

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 11(refer to P82)

2

RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 12(refer to P83)

2

*1 This PLC was used to test & verify communications.
*2 These are communication boards.
*3 When connecting with MELSEC-FX3UC, FX2NC-CNV-IF or FX3UC-1PS-5V is required.

External Device Setup Manual45

Chapter 2

2.2

System Configuration

This is the system configuration for the connection of Mitsubishi PLCs to the MICRO/I.

2.2.1

MELSEC-A Series (using the Computer Link Unit)
RS232C
Connection Diagram 1

MICRO/I(refer to P56)

A1N, A2N, A3N

AJ71C24
AJ71C24-S3

A1N, A2N, A3N
A2A, A3

AJ71C24-S6
AJ71C24-S8

A1N, A2N, A3N
A2A, A3A
A2U, A3U, A4U

AJ71UC24

AQJ2, A0J2H

A0J2-C214-S1

RS485
Connection Diagram 2(refer to P59)

- In case of HG2F/3F/4F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 1 (part number: HG9Z-3C135).
- In case of HG1F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 1 (part number: HG9Z-XC145).

RS232CMICRO/I

Connection Diagram 3(refer to P62)

A1SH,

A1SJ71C24-R2

A2US, A2USH

A1SJ71UC24-R2
RS485
Connection Diagram 2(refer to P59)

A1SH,

A1SJ71C24-R4

A2US, A2USH

A1SJ71UC24-R4- In case of HG2F/3F/4F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 3 (part number: HG9Z-3C145).
- In case of HG1F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 3 (part number: HG9Z-XC203).

46

External Device Setup Manual

2 Mitsubishi

2.2.2

MELSEC-A Series (connected to the CPU Unit Link I/F)
RS232CMICRO/I

Connection Diagram 3(refer to P62)

2
2

A2CCPU24

2- In case of HG2F/3F/4F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 3 (part number: HG9Z-3C145).
- In case of HG1F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 3 (part number: HG9Z-XC203).

Connection to a PLC

2.2.3

2
2

MELSEC-A Series (connected to the CPU Unit Programming Port)
RS422

MICRO/I

Connection Diagram 4(refer to P65)

2
2

Mitsubishi 2-point adapter
A0J2H

2

X-2PIF

A1SJH, AISH

2

A2N, A2SH, A2C
A2A, A3A, A2US

Mitsubishi Cable

RS422

A2USH, A2U

FX-422CAB(Connection Diagram 4)(refer to P65)

- In case of HG2F/3F/4F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 4 (part number: HG9Z-3C165).
- In case of HG1F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 4 (part number: HG9Z-XC255).

2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual47

Chapter 2

2.2.4

MELSEC-Q/QnA Series (using the Computer Link Unit)
RS232C
Connection Diagram 3

MICRO/I(refer to P62)

Q02CPU,Q02HCPU,
Q06HCPU,Q12HCPU,
Q25HCPU,Q00UJCPU,Q00UCPU,
Q01UCPU,Q02UCPU,
Q03UD(E)CPU,
Q04UD(E)HCPU,
Q06UD(E)HCPU,
Q10UD(E)HCPU,
Q13UD(E)HCPU,
Q20UD(E)HCPU,
Q26UD(E)HCPU,
Q50UDEHCPU,
Q100UDEHCPU

QJ71C24N

RS485
Connection Diagram 2(refer to P59)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 3

MICRO/I(refer to P62)

QJ71C24N-R2

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1

MICRO/I(refer to P56)

Q4ACPU

A71QC24N

RS485
Connection Diagram 2(refer to P59)

Q4ARCPU
Q3ACPURS232C
Connection Diagram 1

MICRO/I(refer to P56)

Q2ACPU-S1
Q2ACPU
AJ71QC24N-R2

RS485
Connection Diagram 2(refer to P59)

A71QC24N-R4

RS485
Connection Diagram 9(refer to P76)

48

External Device Setup Manual

MICRO/I

2 Mitsubishi

RS232C
Connection Diagram 3

MICRO/I(refer to P62)

2
Q2ASHCPU-S1

RS485
Connection Diagram 2

A1S71QC24N

2(refer to P59)

Q2ASHCPU
Q2ASCPU-S1

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1

Q2ASCPU(refer to P56)

MICRO/I2
2
Connection to a PLC

A1SJ71QC24N-R2

2- In case of HG2F/3F/4F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 3 (part number: HG9Z-3C145).
- In case of HG1F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 3 (part number: HG9Z-XC203).

2
2

2.2.5

MELSEC-Q Series (connected to the CPU Unit Programming Port)
Mitsubishi Cable
QC30R2

RS232C
Connection Diagram 6

MICRO/I2(refer to P70)22Q00CPU, Q01CPU,
Q02CPU, Q02HCPU,Q00UJCPU,Q00UCPU,
Q01UCPU,Q02UCPU

2RS232C
Connection Diagram 7

MICRO/I(refer to P72)22
2Q00CPU, Q01CPU,
Q02CPU, Q02HCPU,Q00UJCPU,Q00UCPU,
Q01UCPU,Q02UCPU

2- In case of HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 7 (part number: HG9Z-XC315).
- In case of HG1F connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 7 (part number: HG9Z-XC265).

External Device Setup Manual49

Chapter 2

2.2.6

MELSEC-FX Series (connects to the CPU unit programming port)
RS422
Connection Diagram 4

MICRO/I(refer to P65)

FX1, FX2, FX2C

Mitsubishi Cable
FX20P-CADP

RS422
Connection Diagram 4

MICRO/I(refer to P65)

FX0S,FX1S,FX0N,FX1N,
FX1NC,FX2N,FX2NC,
FX3UC,FX3U,FX3G

RS422
Connection Diagram 10

MICRO/I(refer to P79)

FX0S,FX1S,FX0N,FX1N,
FX1NC,FX2N,FX2NC,
FX3UC,FX3U,FX3G- In case of HG2F/3F/4F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 4 (part number: HG9Z-3C165).
- In case of HG1F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 4 (part number: HG9Z-XC255).
- In case of HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram for Connection Diagram 10(part number: HG9Z-XC305).
- In case of HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram for Connection Diagram
10 (part number: HG9Z-XC275).
Please do not use the communication cable part number HG9Z-XC275 for FX3U/FX3UC-32-MT-LT of the MELSEC-FX
Series described in this manual because the Mini Din connector interferes with the housing of the PLC.
- In case of HG1F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 10 (part number: HG9Z-XC245).
Please do not use the communication cable part number HG9Z-XC245 for FX3U/FX3UC-32-MT-LT of the MELSEC-FX
Series described in this manual because the Mini Din connector interferes with the housing of the PLC.

50

External Device Setup Manual

2 Mitsubishi

Mitsubishi 2-port adapter
FX-2PIF

FX1, FX2, FX2C

MICRO/I

Mitsubishi Electric Cable

RS422

FX-422CAB

Connection Diagram 42
2(refer to P65)

Mitsubishi Cable
FX20P-CADP

Mitsubishi 2-port adapter
FX-2PIFMICRO/I2

RS422
Connection Diagram 4

Connection to a PLC

Mitsubishi Cable
FX-422CAB

2(refer to P65)

2
2

FX0, FX0N,
FX2N, FX2NC
FX3UC, FX3U
FX3G2- In case of HG2F/3F/4F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 4 (part number: HG9Z-3C165).

2- In case of HG1F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 4 (part number: HG9Z-XC255).

2
Mitsubishi Cable
FX-20P-CADP

FX1N

FX1N-422-BD

FX2N

FX2N-422-BD

RS422
Connection Diagram 4

MICRO/I(refer to P65)

2
2
2

- In case of HG2F/3F/4F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 4 (part number: HG9Z-3C165).
- In case of HG1F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 4 (part number: HG9Z-XC255).

2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual51

Chapter 2

RS422
Connection Diagram 10

MICRO/I(refer to P79)

FX1N

FX1N-422-BD

FX2N

FX2N-422-BD- In case of HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G a connection cable is available. (part number: HG9Z-XC305).
- In case of HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram for Connection Diagram
10(part number: HG9Z-XC275).
Please do not use the communication cable part number HG9Z-XC275 for FX3U/FX3UC-32-MT-LT of the MELSEC-FX
Series described in this manual because the Mini Din connector interferes with the housing of the PLC.
- In case of HG1F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 10 (part number: HG9Z-XC245).
Please do not use the communication cable part number HG9Z-XC245 for FX3U/FX3UC-32-MT-LT of the MELSEC-FX
Series described in this manual because the Mini Din connector interferes with the housing of the PLC.
RS232C
Connection Diagram 5

MICRO/I(refer to P68)

FX1N

FX1N-232-BD

FX2N

FX2N-232-BD

RS485 4-wireConnection Diagram 11

MICRO/I
Touch(refer to P82)

FX1S,
FX1N

FX1N-485-BD

FX2N

FX2N-485-BD

RS485 2-wireConnection Diagram 12(refer to P83)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 8(refer to P74)

52

FX3UC,FX3U

FX3U-232-BD

FX3G

FX3G-232-BD

External Device Setup Manual

MICRO/ITouch

2 Mitsubishi

RS485 4-wireConnection Diagram 11

MICRO/I
Touch(refer to P82)

2
FX3UC,
FX3U
FX3G

2.2.7

FX3U-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD

2

RS485 2-wireConnection Diagram 12(refer to P83)

2

MELSEC-FX Series (connects to FX2NC-232ADP/FX2NC-485ADP/FX3U-232ADP/FX3U-485ADP)MICRO/I
Touch(refer to P74)

Connection to a PLC

RS232C
Connection Diagram 8

2
2
2

FX1NC

FX2NC-232ADP

2

FX2NC

RS485 4-wireConnection Diagram 11

MICRO/I
Touch(refer to P82)

FX1NC

2

FX2NC-485ADP

FX2NC

2

2

RS485 2-wireConnection Diagram 12(refer to P83)

2
RS232C
Connection Diagram 8(refer to P74)

FX1N + FX1N-CNV-BD

FX2NC-232ADPMICRO/I
Touch

2
2

FX2N + FX2N-CNV-BD

2
2

External Device Setup Manual

53

Chapter 2

RS485 4-wireConnection Diagram 11

MICRO/I
Touch(refer to P82)

FX1N + FX1N-CNV-BD

FX2NC-485ADPFX2N + FX2N-CNV-BD

RS485 2-wireConnection Diagram 12(refer to P83)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 8

MICRO/I
Touch(refer to P74)

FX3UC

FX3U-232ADP

RS485 4-wireConnection Diagram 11

MICRO/I
Touch(refer to P82)

FX3UC

FX3U-485ADPRS485 2-wireConnection Diagram 12(refer to P83)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 8

MICRO/I
Touch(refer to P74)

FX3U+ FX3U-CNV-BD

FX3U-232ADPFX3G + FX3G-CNV-ADP

RS485 4-wireConnection Diagram 11(refer to P82)

FX3U+ FX3U-CNV-BD
FX3G + FX3G-CNV-ADP

54

FX3U-485ADPRS485 2-wireConnection Diagram 12(refer to P83)

External Device Setup Manual

MICRO/ITouch

2 Mitsubishi

2.2.8

MELSEC-Q/QnA Series (Using the Ethernet Unit)
Ethernet (TCP/IP)

MICRO/I
Touch

2
Q00JCPU, Q00CPU
Q01CPU, Q02CPU

QJ71E71-100

Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU

QJ71E71-B5

Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU

QJ71E71-B2

2
2
Ethernet (TCP/IP)

MICRO/I
Touch

2
Connection to a PLC

2

Q4ACPU
Q4ARCPU

AJ71QE71N3-T

Q3ACPU

AJ71QE71N3-T

Q2ACPU-S1

AJ71QE71N-B5

2
2

Ethernet (TCP/IP)

MICRO/ITouch

2
2

Q2ASHCPU-S1
Q2ASHCPUA1SJ71QE71N3-T

Q2ASCPU-S1

A1SJ71QE71N-B2

Q2ASHCPUA1SJ71QE71N-B5

2
2- Use a crossover cable to connect the MICRO/I and PLC directly.

2- When using a hub (Ethernet switch), use a cable that can be used with the hub.

2.2.9

MELSEC-FX Series (Using the Ethernet Unit)
MICRO/I
Touch
Ethernet

FX3UC
FX3U

FX3U-ENET-L

2
2
2

When connecting with MELSEC-FX3UC, FX2NC-CNV-IF or FX3UC-1PS-5V is required.

External Device Setup Manual

55

Chapter 2

2.3

Connection Diagram

The connector types given in the Connection Diagrams are for the unit and not the cable.

2.3.1

56

Connection Diagram 1: Computer Link Unit (RS232C) to MICRO/I

D-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type

Terminal

External Device Setup Manual

2 Mitsubishi

222
2
D-sub, 9P connector socket type

- In case of HG1F a connection cable is available. (part number: HG9Z-XC145).
- The connection diagram 1 is not same as HG9Z-XC145. But both diagrams are available. Refer to Chapter 7 "1.11 PLC
connection cable: HG9Z-XC145" on page 676 about the connection diagram of HG9Z-XC145.

Connection to a PLC

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type

- In case of HG2F/3F/4Fa connection cable is available. (part number: HG9Z-3C135).
- The connection diagram 1 is not same as HG9Z-3C135. But both diagrams are available. Refer to Chapter 7 "1.5 PLC
connection cable: HG9Z-3C135" on page 672 about the connection diagram of HG9Z-3C135.

External Device Setup Manual

2
2
2

57

Chapter 2

D-sub, 25P connector socket type58

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

External Device Setup Manual

2 Mitsubishi

2.3.2

Connection Diagram 2: Computer Link Unit (RS485) to MICRO/I22
2
2
D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Connection to a PLC

Screw down terminal block2

When using the QJ71C24 Serial Communication Unit, connect a terminator resistor in accordance with the instruction manual.

2
2
2
2
2

Screw down terminal block

Terminal

2- When using the QJ71C24 Serial Communication Unit, connect a terminator resistor in accordance with the instruction
manual.

2- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" onpage 4.

2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual59

Chapter 2

Screw down terminal block

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Screw down terminal block

Terminal- When using the QJ71C24 Serial Communication Unit, connect a terminator resistor in accordance with the instruction
manual.
- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG1F, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control to NONE.

60

External Device Setup Manual

2 Mitsubishi

2222Connection to a PLC

2Screw down terminal block

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

When using the QJ71C24 Serial Communication Unit, connect a terminator resistor in accordance with the instruction manual.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Screw down terminal block

D-sub, 37P connector plug type2
- When using the QJ71C24 Serial Communication Unit, connect a terminator resistor in accordance with the instruction
manual.
- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

External Device Setup Manual261

Chapter 2

2.3.3

62

Connection Diagram 3: Computer Link Unit (RS232C) to MICRO/I

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector socket type

Terminal

External Device Setup Manual

2 Mitsubishi

222
2
D-sub, 9P connector socket type

- In case of HG1F a connection cable is available. (part number: HG9Z-XC203).
- The connection diagram 3 is not same as HG9Z-XC203. But both diagrams are available. Refer to Chapter 7 "1.14 PLC
connection cable: HG9Z-XC203" on page 678 about the connection diagram of HG9Z-XC203.

Connection to a PLC

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type2

- In case of HG2F/3F/4F a connection cable is available. (part number: HG9Z-3C145).

2- The connection diagram 3 is not same as HG9Z-3C145. But both diagrams are available. Refer to Chapter 7 "1.6 PLC
connection cable: HG9Z-3C145" on page 672 about the connection diagram of HG9Z-3C145.

External Device Setup Manual263Chapter 2

D-sub, 9P connector socket type64

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

External Device Setup Manual

2 Mitsubishi

2.3.4

Connection Diagram 4: PLC, 2-port Adapter to MICRO/I22
22
Connection to a PLC

22

D-sub, 25P connector socket type (unit side)

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 25P connector socket type (unit side)

Terminal

2
There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor,
use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page
4.

External Device Setup Manual265Chapter 2

D-sub, 25P connector socket type (unit side)

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type (unit side)

Terminal- In case of HG1F a connection cable is available. (part number: HG9Z-XC255).
- In case of HG1F there is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, usea terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

When you connect to the CPU port of MELSEC-A series and MELSEC-FX series of Mitsubishi Electric, use D-sub 9Pin
connector, NOT the Terminal Block type.

66

External Device Setup Manual

2 Mitsubishi

2222Connection to a PLC

2

D-sub, 25P connector socket type (unit side)

D-sub, 25P connector socket typeIn case of HG2F/3F/4F a connection cable is available. (part number: HG9Z-3C165).

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 25P connector socket type (unit side)

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

External Device Setup Manual

2
2

67

Chapter 2

2.3.5

68

Connection Diagram 5: FX2N-232-BD to MICRO/I

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector plug type

Terminal

External Device Setup Manual

2 Mitsubishi

222
2
D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

External Device Setup Manual69

Chapter 2

2.3.6

70

Connection Diagram 6: MELSEC-Q (Mitsubishi cable QC30R2) to MICRO/I

D-sub, 9P connector socket type (cable side)

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector socket type (cable side)

Terminal

D-sub, 9P connector socket type (cable side)

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

External Device Setup Manual

2 Mitsubishi

222
2
D-sub, 25P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

D-sub, 9P connector socket type (cable side)

2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector socket type (cable side)

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual71Chapter 2

2.3.7

Connection Diagram 7: MELSEC-Q (CPU unit programming port) to MICRO/I

Mini Din 6P socket connector (unit side)

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeIn case of HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G a connection cable is available. (part number: HG9Z-XC315).

Mini Din 6P socket connector (unit side)

Terminal

Mini Din 6P socket connector (unit side)

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeIn case of HG1F a connection cable is available. (part number: HG9Z-XC265).

72

External Device Setup Manual

2 Mitsubishi

222
2
D-sub, 25P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

Mini Din 6P socket connector (unit side)

2
2
2
2
2

Mini Din 6P socket connector (unit side)

D-sub, 37P connector plug typeMini-Din 6 Pin plug pin assignment by the side of the Mitsubishi Q series

2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual73Chapter 2

2.3.8

74

Connection Diagram 8: FX2NC-232ADP/FX3U-232ADP/FC3U-232-BD to MICRO/I, Touch

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector plug type

Terminal

External Device Setup Manual

2 Mitsubishi

222
2
D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

External Device Setup Manual75

Chapter 2

2.3.9

Connection Diagram 9: Computer Link Unit (RS485) to MICRO/I

D-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor,
use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page
4.

76

External Device Setup Manual

2 Mitsubishi

2222Connection to a PLC

2

D-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2
2

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG1F, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control to NONE.

2External Device Setup Manual77

Chapter 2

D-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

78

External Device Setup Manual

2 Mitsubishi

2.3.10Connection Diagram 10: MELSEC-FX Series CPU (RS485) to MICRO/I22
2
2
D-sub, 9P connector plug typeIn case of HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G a connection cable is available. (part number: HG9Z-XC305).

Connection to a PLC

Mini Din 8P Connector

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Mini Din 8P Connector

Terminal

2- In case of HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G a connection cable is available. (part number: HG9Z-XC275). Please do not use
HG9Z-XC275 because there is the case that FX3U/FX3UC-32-MT-LT of the MELSEC-FX Series described in this manual and a part of it interfere.
- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" onpage 4.

2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual79

Chapter 2

Mini Din 8P Connector

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Mini Din 8P Connector

Terminal- In case of HG1F a connection cable is available. (part number: HG9Z-XC245).
- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

80

External Device Setup Manual

2 Mitsubishi

2222Connection to a PLC

2Mini Din 8P Connector

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2

Mini Din 8P Connector

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual81

Chapter 2

2.3.11 Connection Diagram 11: FX1N-485-BD/FX2N-485-BD/FX3U-485-BD/FX3G-485-BD/
FX2NC-485ADP/FX3U-485ADP(4-wire) - MICRO/I, Touch

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Screw terminal block

Terminal- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" onpage 4.
- Touch has no pin number corresponding to TERM. When a termination resistor is necessary, insert one with suitable resistance value between pin 8 (RDA) and pin 9 (RDB).

82

External Device Setup Manual

2 Mitsubishi

2.3.12Connection Diagram 12: FX1N-485-BD/FX2N-485-BD/FX3U-485-BD/FX3G-485-BD/
FX2NC-485ADP/FX3U-485ADP(2-wire) - MICRO/I, Touch222
2
D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Connection to a PLC

Screw terminal block

2
2
2
2
2

Screw terminal block

Terminal- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" onpage 4.
- HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G Series uses only RDA and RDB when using RS422/485 2-wire, you don’t need to connect SDA or
SDB.
If connecting COM1 on the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G to the external device, do not insert terminating resistor to the external
device. If terminating resistor can not be removed, use COM2 on the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G instead of COM1.
- Touch has no pin number corresponding to TERM. When a termination resistor is necessary, insert one with suitable resistance value between pin 8 (RDA) and pin 9 (RDB).

2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual83Chapter 2

2.4

Environment Settings

2.4.1

MELSEC-A Series: Settings for the Computer Link Unit and CPU Unit Link I/F

Item

Setting

Interface

RS232C

Transmission Control Protocol

RS485

Format 4 protocol mode
Set the mode setting switch to 4.

Station Number*1
Data Bits

Use the same settings
as for the MICRO/I.

Set the mode setting switch to 8.

Set using the Station Number setting switch.
7 or 8 (set using the Transmission Specifications setting switch)

Baud Rate

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200 bps

ParityNone, Even or Odd (set using the Transmission Specifications setting
switch)Stop Bits

1 or 2 (set using the Transmission Specifications setting switch)

ChecksumYes (set using the Transmission Specifications setting switch)

Write During RUN

Possible (set using the Transmission Specifications setting switch)

Transmission Side Termination Resistor

No(set using the Transmission Specifications setting switch)Yes(set using the Transmission Specifications setting switch)

Receive Side Termination ResistorNo

Yes(set using the Transmission Specifications setting switch)

Computer Link/Multi Drop Selection

Computer Link (set using the Transmission Specifications setting switch)
Note: Only set if this item is present.

*1 Set a decimal number for the Station Number.

Refer to the Link Unit manual for details.

2.4.2

MELSEC-A Series: Connection to the Programming Port or 2-port Adapter

Item

Setting

Interface

RS422

Data Bits
Baud Rate

Use the same settings as
for the MICRO/I.

8 (fixed)
9600 (fixed)

ParityOdd (fixed)

Stop Bits

1 (fixed)

When using CPU Direct for the connection, the PLC program scan time will increase when it starts communicating with the
MICRO/I. Investigate this under your actual operating conditions.

84

External Device Setup Manual

2 Mitsubishi

2.4.3

MELSEC-Q/QnA Series: Settings for the Computer Link Unit

Item

Setting

Interface

RS232C, RS422

Communication protocol

MC Protocol (Format 4)

Station Number*1
Data Bits

Use the same settings as
for the MICRO/I.

0(DEC)
7 or 8

Baud Rate

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200 bps

ParityNone, Even or Odd

Stop Bits

1 or 2Checksum Code

Yes

Write During RUN

Possible222Connection to a PLC

2*1 Set a decimal number for the Station Number.
The PLC settings are performed using the I/O allocation for the GPPW.

Refer to the Q-compatible Serial Communication Unit user manual (Basic) for details.

2.4.4

2

MELSEC-Q00, 01CPU: Connection to the Programming Port

2
2

Please confirm by parameter setup of MELSEC-Q00 and 01CPU “using a serial communication function.”
Item

Setting

Station Number*1
Data Bits

Use the same settings as
for the MICRO/I.

0(DEC)
8bit (fixed)

Baud Rate

19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200 bps

ParityOdd

Stop Bits

1bit

Checksum Code

Yes

2
2
2
2

*1 Set a decimal number for the Station Number.

2.4.5

MELSEC-Q02CPU: Connection to the Programming Port

Item

Setting

Data Bits

8bit(fixed)

Baud Rate

9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200 bps

ParityOdd

Stop Bits

1bit

External Device Setup Manual

2
2
2
2

85

Chapter 2

2.4.6

MELSEC-FX Series : Host I/F Driver MELSEC-FX(CPU)/FX2N(CPU)/FX3UC(CPU) Settings

Item

Setting

Interface
Data Bits
Baud Rate*1

RS232C, RS422
Use the same settings as
for the MICRO/I.

7 (fixed)
9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200

ParityEven (fixed)

Stop Bits

1 (fixed)*1 The communication speed settings varies depending on the brand of PLC. Please refer to the PLC manual for details.

- When using CPU Direct for the connection, the PLC program scan time will increase when it starts communicating with the
MICRO/I. Investigate this under your actual operating conditions.
- To connect MELSEC-FX series PLC and MICRO/I, check the following two things.
·

Unchecked the communication setting by the programming software.

· Data Register 8120 (D8120) must be 0.
If the PLC is MELSEC-FX3U or MELSEC-3UC, check the following two thins too.
If MICRO/I connects to CH1 on the PLC, Data Register 8400 (D8400) must be 0.
If MICRO/I connects to CH2 on the PLC, Data Register 8420 (D8420) must be 0.

86

External Device Setup Manual

2 Mitsubishi

2.4.7

MELSEC-FX Series : Host I/F Driver MELSEC-FX(LINK) Settings

Item

Setting

Interface

RS232C, RS422

Data Bits
Baud Rate*1

Use the same settings as
for the MICRO/I.

7, 8
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400

ParityNone, Even or Odd

Stop Bits

1 or 2

ProtocolSpecial protocol Communication

Sum check

EnableTransmission Control Protocol

2
2
2

00-0F

*2

In the case of FX1S, FX1N, and FX1NC, there must be an interval time of two scan times or more otherwise the commandcannot be received after sending data for a command from an external device.
Example: If the PLC scan time is 10 msec, set transmission wait for the MICRO/I to 20 msec or more.

Connection to a PLC

Station No.

With Type 4 (CR, LF)

2

MELSEC-Q/QnA: in case using Ethernet Unit setting

2*1 The communication speed settings varies depending on the brand of PLC. Please refer to the "Communication Control Edition" of the FX Series
User's Manual for details.
*2 Set a decimal number for the Station Number.

2
2

2.4.8

2

1. MICRO/I settings - Project Settings dialog box
Item

Setting

Communication Interface tab

Host I/F Network tab

IP Address

Set the IP address of MICRO/I.

Subnet mask

Set the subnet mask of MICRO/I.

Default Gateway

Set the default gateway of MICRO/I.

IP Address

Set the IP address of PLC.

Port Number

Set the port number of PLC to communicate with MICRO/I.

2
2
2
2

This Host I/F Driver does not support MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 network.

222

External Device Setup Manual87

Chapter 2

2. PLC Settings
Item
Network parameter

Operation Setting

setting

notes

Network type

Ethernet*1

Starting I/O No.

0020

*2

Network No.

1*2

Total stations--

Group No.

0

*2

Station No.

1

*2

Mode

On line*1

Communication data code

Binary code

*1

Initial Timing

Always wait for OPEN

*1

Input format

Decimal*2

IP address

Set IP address of PLC*2

Send frame setting

Ethernet*1

Enable Write at RUN time

Check mark (enable)*1

TCP Existence confirmation setting

Use the Keep Alive*1

ProtocolTCP/IP*1

Open system

Impassive open

*1

Fixed buffer

Send

*1

Fixed buffer communication

Procedure exist*1

Pairing open

No pairs*1

Existence confirmation

No confirm*1

Local station Port No.

Set an arbitrary port number*2 *3

IP Address

Open Setting

Destination IP address--

Dest. Port No.

--*1 The setting of the above-mentioned is recommended.
*2 Set it according to the environment.
*3 MICRO/I is set by the decimal number though PLC is set by the hexadecimal number.

Refer to the Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User’s Manual or Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module
User’s Manual for detail.

88

External Device Setup Manual

2 Mitsubishi

2.4.9

MELSEC-FX: in case using Ethernet Unit setting

1. MICRO/I settings - Project Settings dialog box
Item
Communication Interface tab

Host I/F Network tab

Setting
IP Address

Set the IP address of MICRO/I.

Subnet Mask

Set the subnet mask of MICRO/I.

Default Gateway

Set the default gateway of MICRO/I.

IP Address

Set the IP address of CPU Unit or Link Unit.

Port Number

Set the port number of CPU Unit or Link Unit in.

222

2. PLC Settings

2

Ethernet Operation Setting
Setting

Received data code setting

Binary code

Initial Timing

Always wait for OPEN (Communication possible during STOP)

IP Address

Set IP address of PLC

Send frame setting

Ethernet (V2.0)

TCP Existence confirmation setting

Use the Keep Alive

Open Setting
Item

Setting

Connection

Use 3 or 4

ProtocolTCP/IP

Connection to a PLC

Item

2
2
2
2
2

Open system

Impassive open

Existence confirmation

No confirm

2

Local station Port No. (Decimal)

Set an arbitrary port number
1025 to 5548 or 5552 to 65534
The default is1025.

2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual89

Chapter 2

2.5
2.5.1

Usable Devices
MELSEC-AnA (LINK)

Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Input Relay

X

X

0 - 1FFF

R*1

Output Relay

YY

0 - 1FFF

R/W*1

Internal RelayM

M

0 - 8191

R/W

Link Relay

B

B

0 - 1FFF

R/W*1

Latch Relay

LL

0 - 8191

R/W

Timer (contact)TST

0 - 2047

R

Timer (coil)TCT

0 - 2047

R/W

Counter (contact)CSC

0 - 1023

R

Counter (coil)CCC

0 - 1023

R/W

Special Internal Relay

SM

SM

9000 - 9255

R

AnnunciatorFF

0 - 2047

R/W

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual*1 Set this device using hexadecimal.

Word Device
Device Name

Device Symbol
MICRO/I

PLC

Input Relay

WX

X

0 - 1FF0R*1 *2

Output Relay

WY

Y

0 - 1FF0

R/W

*1 *2

Internal Relay

WM

M

0 - 8176

R/W*2

Link Relay

WB

B

0 - 1FF0

R/W

*1 *2

Latch Relay

WL

L

0 - 8176

R/W*2

Timer (current value)TNT

0 - 2047

R

Counter (current value)CNC

0 - 1023

R

Data RegisterDD

0 - 8191

R/W

Link RegisterWW

0 - 1FFF

R/W*1

Annunciator

WF

F

0 - 2032

R/W*2

Special Internal Relay

WSM

SM

9000 - 9240

R

*2

Special registerSD

SD

9000 - 9255

R

File registerRR

0 - 8191

R/W

Expansion file registerER

ZR

0 - 58191

R/W*1 Set this device using hexadecimal.
*2 Set this device using a multiplier of 16.

90

External Device Setup Manual

2 Mitsubishi

2.5.2

MELSEC-AnN (LINK)

Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual2

MICRO/I

PLC

Input Relay

X

X

0 - 7FFR*1

Output RelayYY

0 - 7FF

R/W

*1

2

Internal RelayM

M

0 - 2047

R/W

Link Relay

B

B

0 - 3FF

R/W

*1

2

Latch Relay

LL

0 - 2047

R/W

Timer (contact)TST

0 - 255

R

TC

T

0 - 255

R/W

CS

C

0 - 255

RCounter (coil)CCC

0 - 255

R/W

Special Internal Relay

SM

SM

9000 - 9255

R

AnnunciatorFF

0 - 255

R/W

Connection to a PLC

Timer (coil)Counter (contact)

2
2
2*1 Set this device using hexadecimal.

2

Word Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Input Relay

WX

X

0 - 7F0R*1 *2

Output Relay

WY

Y

0 - 7F0

R/W

*1 *2

Internal Relay

WM

M

0 - 2032

R/W*2

Link Relay

WB

B

0 - 3F0

R/W

*1 *2

Latch Relay

WL

L

0 - 2032

R/W*2

Timer (current value)TNT

0 - 255

RCounter (current value)CNC

0 - 255

R

Data RegisterDD

0 - 1023

R/W

Link RegisterWW

0 - 3FF

R/W*1

Annunciator

WF

F

0 - 240

R/W*2Special Internal Relay

WSM

SM

9000 - 9240

R

*2

Special registerSD

SD

9000 - 9255

R

File registerRR

0 - 8191

R/W*1 Set this device using hexadecimal.
*2 Set this device using a multiplier of 16.

External Device Setup Manual

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

91

Chapter 2

2.5.3

MELSEC-AnA (CPU)Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Input Relay

X

X

0 - 7FFR*1

Output RelayYY

0 - 7FF

R/W*1

Internal RelayM

M

0 - 8191

R/W

Link Relay

B

B

0 - 7FF

R/W*1

Latch Relay

LL

0 - 8191

R/W

Timer (contact)TST

0 - 2047

R

Timer (coil)TCT

0 - 2047

R/W

Counter (contact)CSC

0 - 1023

R

Counter (coil)CCC

0 - 1023

R/W

Special Internal Relay

SM

SM

9000 - 9255

R

AnnunciatorFF

0 - 2047

R/W

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual*1 Set this device using hexadecimal.

Word Device
Device Name

Device Symbol
MICRO/I

PLC

Input Relay

WX

X

0 - 7F0R*1 *2

Output Relay

WY

Y

0 - 7F0

R/W

*1 *2

Internal Relay

WM

M

0 - 8176

R/W*2

Link Relay

WB

B

0 - 7F0

R/W

*1 *2

Latch Relay

WL

L

0 - 8176

R/W*2

Timer (current value)TNT

0 - 2047

R

Counter (current value)CNC

0 - 1023

R

Data RegisterDD

0 - 6143

R/W

Link RegisterWW

0 - FFF

R/W*1

Annunciator

WF

F

0 - 2032

R/W*2

Special Internal Relay

WSM

SM

9000 - 9240

R

*2

Special RegisterSD

SD

9000 - 9255

R

*1 Set this device using hexadecimal.
*2 Set this device using a multiplier of 16.

92

External Device Setup Manual

2 Mitsubishi

2.5.4

MELSEC-AnN (CPU)Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual2

MICRO/I

PLC

Input Relay

X

X

0 - 7FFR*1

Output RelayYY

0 - 7FF

R/W

*1

2

Internal RelayM

M

0 - 2047

R/W

Link Relay

B

B

0 - 3FF

R/W

*1

2

Latch Relay

LL

0 - 2047

R/W

Timer (contact)TST

0 - 255

R

TC

T

0 - 255

R/W

CS

C

0 - 255

RCounter (coil)CCC

0 - 255

R/W

Special Internal Relay

SM

SM

9000 - 9255

R

AnnunciatorFF

0 - 255

R/W

Connection to a PLC

Timer (coil)Counter (contact)

2
2
2*1 Set this device using hexadecimal.

2

Word Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Input Relay

WX

X

0 - 7F0R*1 *2

Output Relay

WY

Y

0 - 7F0

R/W

*1 *2

Internal Relay

WM

M

0 - 2032

R/W*2

Link Relay

WB

B

0 - 3F0

R/W

*1 *2

Latch Relay

WL

L

0 - 2032

R/W*2

Timer (current value)TNT

0 - 255

RCounter (current value)CNC

0 - 255

R

Data RegisterDD

0 - 1023

R/W

Link RegisterWW

0 - 3FF

R/W*1

Annunciator

WF

F

0 - 240

R/W*2Special Internal Relay

WSM

SM

9000 - 9240

R

*2

Special RegisterSD

SD

9000 - 9255

R

*1 Set this device using hexadecimal.
*2 Set this device using a multiplier of 16.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual93Chapter 2

2.5.5

MELSEC-AnU (CPU)Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Input Relay

X

X

0 - 1FFF

R*1

Output Relay

YY

0 - 1FFF

R/W*1

Internal RelayM

M

0 - 8191

R/W

Link Relay

B

B

0 - 1FFF

R/W*1

Latch Relay

LL

0 - 8191

R/W

Timer (contact)TST

0 - 2047

R

Timer (coil)TCT

0 - 2047

R/W

Counter (contact)CSC

0 - 1023

R

Counter (coil)CCC

0 - 1023

R/W

Special Internal Relay

SM

SM

9000 - 9255

R

AnnunciatorFF

0 - 2047

R/W

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual*1 Set this device using hexadecimal.

Word Device
Device Name

Device Symbol
MICRO/I

PLC

Input Relay

WX

X

0 - 1FF0R*1 *2

Output Relay

WY

Y

0 - 1FF0

R/W

*1 *2

Internal Relay

WM

M

0 - 8176

R/W*2

Link Relay

WB

B

0 - 1FF0

R/W

*1 *2

Latch Relay

WL

L

0 - 8176

R/W*2

Timer (current value)TNT

0 - 2047

R

Counter (current value)CNC

0 - 1023

R

Data RegisterDD

0 - 8191

R/W

Link RegisterWW

0 - 1FFF

R/W*1

Annunciator

WF

F

0 - 2032

R/W*2

Special Internal Relay

WSM

SM

9000 - 9240

R

*2

Special RegisterSD

SD

9000 - 9255

R

*1 Set this device using hexadecimal.
*2 Set this device using a multiplier of 16.

94

External Device Setup Manual

2 Mitsubishi

2.5.6

MELSEC-A1S/A2C (CPU)Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual2

MICRO/I

PLC

Input Relay

X

X

0 - 1FFR*1

Output Relay

YY

0 - 1FF

R/W

*1

2

Internal RelayM

M

0 - 2047

R/W

Link Relay

B

B

0 - 3FF

R/W

*1

2

Latch Relay

LL

0 - 2047

R/W

Timer (contact)TST

0 - 255

R

TC

T

0 - 255

R/W

CS

C

0 - 255

RCounter (coil)CCC

0 - 255

R/W

Special Internal Relay

SM

SM

9000 - 9255

R

AnnunciatorFF

0 - 255

R/W*1 Set this device using hexadecimal.

Connection to a PLC

Timer (coil)Counter (contact)

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual95Chapter 2

Word Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Input Relay

WX

X

0 - 1F0R*1 *2

Output Relay

WY

Y

0 - 1F0

R/W

*1 *2

Internal Relay

WM

M

0 - 2032

R/W*2

Link Relay

WB

B

0 - 3F0

R/W

*1 *2

Latch Relay

WL

L

0 - 2032

R/W*2

Timer (current value)TNT

0 - 255

RCounter (current value)CNC

0 - 255

R

Data RegisterDD

0 - 1023

R/W

Link RegisterWW

0 - 3FF

R/W*1

Annunciator

WF

F

0 - 240

R/W*2Special Internal Relay

WSM

SM

9000 - 9240

R

*3

Special RegisterSD

SD

9000 - 9255

R

File RegisterRR

0 - 8191

R/W*1 Set this device using hexadecimal.
*2 Set this device using a multiplier of 16.
*3 This can only be used when the Link Unit is being used.

- File Register is not available, if Memory Cassettes is used.
- File Register is tested only MELSEC-A1S/A1SH/A1SJH/A2SH/A2C.
Don’t use expect those CPU Unit.
- In case of using File Register, must reset to MICRO/I if PLC parameter is changed.

96

External Device Setup Manual

2 Mitsubishi

2.5.7

MELSEC-Q/QnA (Link)

Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

PLC

Internal RelayM

M

0 - 32767

R/W

Input Relay

X

X

0 - 1FFF

R*1

Output Relay

YY

0 - 1FFF

R/W*1

Link Special RelaySBSB

0 - 7FF

R/W*1

Link Relay

B

B

0 - 7FFF

R/W*1

Latch Relay

LL

0 - 32767

R/W

Timer (contact)TST

0 - 8191

R

Timer (coil)TCT

0 - 8191

R/W

Counter (contact)CSC

0 - 8191

R

Counter (coil)CCC

0 - 8191

R/W

Special RelaySMSM

0 - 2047

R

AnnunciatorFF

0 - 32767

R/W

Retentive Timer (contact)SSST

0 - 2047

R

Retentive Timer (coil)SCST

0 - 2047

R/W

Step Relay

SS

0 - 32767

R/W

Edge RelayVV

0 - 32767

R/W

2
2
2
2
Connection to a PLC

MICRO/I22
2
2
2*1 Set this device using hexadecimal.

2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual97Chapter 2

Word Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Input Relay

WX

X

0 - 1FF0R*1 *2

Output Relay

WY

Y

0 - 1FF0

R/W

*1 *2

Internal Relay

WM

M

0 - 32752

R/W*2

Link Special Relay

WSB

SB

0 - 7F0

R/W

*1 *2

Link Relay

WB

B

0 - 7FF0

R/W

*1 *2

Latch Relay

WL

L

0 - 32752

R/W*2

Timer (current value)TNT

0 - 8191

R

Counter (current value)CNC

0 - 8191

R

Data RegisterDD

0 - 25599

R/W

Link RegisterWW

0 - 24FF

R/W

File registerRR

0 - 32767

R/W

Annunciator

WF

F

0 - 32752

R/W*2

Special Relay

WSM

SM

0 - 2032

R*2

Special registerSDSD

0 - 2047

R

Edge Relay

WVV

0 - 32752

R/W*2

Step Relay

WSS

0 - 32752

R/W*2

Retentive Timer (current value)SNST

0 - 2047

R/W

Special Link RegisterSWSW

0 - 7FF

R/W*1

Ext File Register

ZR

ZR

0 - FFFF

R/W*1*1 Set this device using hexadecimal.
*2 Set this device using a multiplier of 16.

98*1

External Device Setup Manual

2 Mitsubishi

2.5.8

MELSEC-Q (CPU)Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

PLC

Internal RelayM

M

0 - 32767

R/W

Input Relay

X

X

0 - 1FFF

R*1

Output Relay

YY

0 - 1FFF

R/W*1

Link Special RelaySBSB

0 - 7FF

R/W*1

Link Relay

B

B

0 - 1FFF

R/W*1

Latch Relay

LL

0 - 32767

R/W

AnnunciatorFF

0 - 32767

R/W

Step Relay

SS

0 - 8191

R/W

Edge RelayVV

0 - 32767

R/W

Timer (contact)TST

0 - 23087

R

Timer (coil)TCT

0 - 23087

R/W

Counter (contact)CSC

0 - 23087

R

Counter (coil)CCC

0 - 23087

R/W

Retentive Timer (contact)SSST

0 - 23087

R

Retentive Timer (coil)SCST

0 - 23087

R/W

Special RelaySMSM

0 - 2047

R

2
2
2
2
Connection to a PLC

MICRO/I22
2
2
2*1 Set this device using hexadecimal.

2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual99Chapter 2

Word Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Input Relay

WX

X

0 - 1FF0R*1 *2

Output Relay

WY

Y

0 - 1FF0

R/W

*1 *2

Internal Relay

WM

M

0 - 32752

R/W*2

Link Relay

WB

B

0 - 7FF0

R/W

*1 *2

Latch Relay

WL

L

0 - 32752

R/W*2

Annunciator

WF

F

0 - 32752

R/W*2

Edge Relay

WVV

0 - 32752

R/W*2

Step Relay

WSS

0 - 8176

R/W*2

Timer (current value)TNT

0 - 23087

R

Counter (current value)CNC

0 - 23087

R

Retentive Timer (current value)SNST

0 - 23087

R/W

Data RegisterDD

0 - 25983

R/W

Link RegisterWW

0 - 657F

R/W

Special Relay

WSM

SM

0 - 2032

R*2

Link Special Relay

WSB

SB

0 - 7F0

R/W

*1 *2

Special RegisterSDSD

0 - 2047

R

Special link RegisterSWSW

0 - 7FF

R/W

File RegisterRR

0 - 32767

R/W

Extend file Register

ZR

ZR

0 - 131072

R/W*1 Set this device using hexadecimal.
*2 Set this device using a multiplier of 16.

100

External Device Setup Manual

2 Mitsubishi

2.5.9

MELSEC-FX (CPU)Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Input Relay

X

X

0 - 337

R*1

Output RelayYY

0 - 337

R/W*1Internal RelayM

M

0 - 1535

R/W

Timer (contact)TST

0 - 255

RCounter (contact)CSC

0 - 255

R

State

S

S

0 - 999R/W

2
22Connection to a PLC*1 Set this device using octal.

2

Word Device
Device Name

2

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Input Relay

WX

X

0 - 320R*1 *2

Output Relay

WY

Y

0 - 320

R/W

*1 *2

Internal Relay

WM

M

0 - 1520

R/W*2

Timer (current value)TNT

0 - 255

RCounter (current value)CNC

0 - 199

R

32-Bit Counter (current value)

DCN

C

2000 - 2551

R

Data RegisterDD

0 - 999

R/W

State

WS

WS

0 - 976

R/W*1 Set this device using octal.
*2 Set this device using a multiplier of 16.
*3 This device is a 32-bit device.

2
2
2

*3

2

*2

2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual101Chapter 2

2.5.10 MELSEC-FX2N (CPU)Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Input Relay

X

X

0 - 337

R*1

Output RelayYY

0 - 337

R/W*1Internal RelayM

M

0 - 3071

R/W

Timer (contact)TST

0 - 255

RCounter (contact)CSC

0 - 255

R

Special Int. Relay

SM

SM

8000 - 8255

R

State

S

S

0 - 999

R/W

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual*1 Set this device using octal.

Word Device
Device Name

Device Symbol
MICRO/I

PLC

Input Relay

WX

X

0 - 360

R*1 *2

Output Relay

WY

Y

0 - 360

R/W

*1 *2

Internal Relay

WM

M

0 - 3056

R/W*2

Timer (current value)TNT

0 - 255

RCounter (current value)CNC

0 - 199

R

32-Bit Counter (current value)

DCN

C

2000 - 2551

R

Data RegisterDD

0 - 7999

R/W

State

WS

S

0 - 976

R/W

Special Int. Relay

WSM

SM

8000 - 8240

R

Special RegisterSD

SD

8000 - 8255

R

*1 Set this device using octal.
*2 Set this device using a multiplier of 16.
*3 This device is a 32-bit device.

102

External Device Setup Manual*3*2

2 Mitsubishi

2.5.11MELSEC-FX3UC (CPU)Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Input Relay

X

X

0 - 377

R*1

Output RelayYY

0 - 377

R/W*1Internal RelayMM

0 - 7679

R/W

Timer (contact)TST

0 - 511RCS

C

0 - 255

R

Special Internal Relay

SM

SM

8000 - 8511

R

State

S

S

0 - 4095

R/W

2
2
2

*1 Set this device using octal.

Word Device
Device Name

2

Connection to a PLC

Counter (contact)2

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Input Relay

WX

X

0 - 360

R*1 *2

Output Relay

WY

Y

0 - 360

R/W

*1 *2

Internal Relay

WM

M

0 - 7664

R/W*2

Timer (current value)TNT

0 - 511

R

Counter (current value)CNC

0 - 199R

32-bit counter (current value)

DCN

C

2000 - 2551

R/W

2
2
2

*3

2

Data RegisterDD

0 - 7999

R/W

State

WS

S

0 - 4080

R/W*2

Special Internal Relay

WSM

SM

8000 - 8496

R

*2

Special Data RegisterSD

SD

8000 - 8511

R

Extended RegisterRR

0 - 32767

R/W*1 Set this device using octal.
*2 Set this device using a multiplier of 16.
*3 This device is a 32-bit device.

2

2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual103

Chapter 2

2.5.12 MELSEC-FX (LINK)
Bit Device
Device Name

Int. Relay

Device Symbol
MICRO/I

PLC

M

M

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

0 - 7679

R/W

dec

Input Relay

X

X

0 - 377

R/W

hex

Output RelayYY

0 - 377

R/W

hex

Timer Relay (contact)TST

0 - 511

R/W

dec

Counter Relay (contact)CSC

0 - 255

R/W

dec

Special Internal Relay

M

SM

8000 - 8511

R/W

dec

State

S

S

0 - 4095

R/W

dec

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
GradualWord Device
Device Name

Device Symbol
MICRO/I

PLC

Data RegisterDD

0 - 7999

R/W

dec

Input Relay (word)

WXX

0 - 360

R/W

hex*1

Output Relay (word)WYY

0 - 360

R/W

hex*1

Int. Relay (word)WM

M

0 - 7664

R/W

dec*1

Timer (Current Value)TNT

0 - 511

R/W

dec

Counter (Current Value)CNC

0 - 199

R/W

dec

State (word)WSS

0 - 4080

R/W

dec*1

Special Internal Relay (word)

WSM

M

8000 - 8496

R/W

dec*1

Special Data RegisterSD

D

8000 - 8511

R/W

dec

32-bit counter (current value)

DCN

C

2000 - 2511

R/W

*2

Extended RegisterRR

0 - 32767

R/W

dec

*1 Set this device using hexadecimal.
*2 This is a 32-bit device address.
The upper 3 digits represent an address in decimal, the last digit represents the upper and lower parts of 32-bit data in binary.

2.5.13 MELSEC-Q/QnA (Ethernet)
Bit Device
Device Name

104

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Special Relay (bit)SM

SM000000 - 002047

R

dec

Input Relay (bit)X

X

000000 - 001FFF

R

hex

Output Relay (bit)Y

Y

000000 - 001FFF

R/W

hex

Internal Relay (bit)M

M

000000 - 475135

R/W

dec

Latch Relay (bit)L

L

000000 - 475135

R/W

dec

External Device Setup Manual

2 Mitsubishi

Bit Device
Device Name

Annunciator (bit)Device Symbol
MICRO/I

PLC

F

F

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

000000 - 475135

R/W

dec

V

V

000000 - 475135

R/W

dec

B

B

000000 - 073FFF

R/W

hex

Timer (contact)

TS

TS

000000 - 475135

R

dec

Timer (coil)TC

TC

000000 - 475135

R/W

dec

Retentive Timer (contact)

SS

SS

000000 - 475135

R

dec

Retentive Timer (coil)

SC

SC

000000 - 475135

R/W

dec

Counter (contact)

CS

CS

000000 - 475135

R

dec

Counter (coil)CC

CC

000000 - 475135

R/W

dec

Link Special Relay (bit)SB

SB000000 - 0007FF

R/W

dec

Step Relay (bit)S

S

000000 - 008191

R/W

dec

2
2
2
Connection to a PLC

Edge Relay (bit)Link Relay (bit)

2

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual105

Chapter 2

Word Device
Device Name

Device Symbol
MICRO/I

Address Range

Address
GradualPLC

Special RegisterSD

SD

000000 - 002047

R

dec

Data Register

D

D

000000 - 029695

R/W

dec

Link Register

W

W

000000 - 0073FF

R/W

hex

Timer (current value)TN

TN

000000 - 029695

R

dec

Retentive Timer (current value)SN

SN

000000 - 029695

R/W

dec

Counter (current value)

CN

CN

000000 - 029695

R

dec

Special Link Register

SW

SW

000000 - 0007FF

R/W

hex

File Register

R

R

000000 - 032767

R/W

dec

Extend file Register

ZR

ZR

000000 - 0FE7FF

R/W

hex

Special Relay (word)

WSM

SM

000000 - 002032

R

dec*1

Input Relay (word)

WX

X

000000 - 001FF0

R

hex*1

Output Relay (word)

WY

Y

000000 - 001FF0

R/W

hex*1

Internal Relay (word)

WM

M

000000 - 475120

R/W

dec*1

Latch Relay (word)

WL

L

000000 - 475120

R/W

dec*1

Annunciator (word)

WF

F

000000 - 475120

R/W

dec*1

Edge Relay (word)

WV

V

000000 - 475120

R/W

dec*1

Link Relay (word)

WB

B

000000 - 073FF0

R/W

hex*1

Link Special Relay (word)

WSB

SB

000000 - 0007F0

R/W

hex*1

Step Relay (word)

WS

S

000000 - 008176

R/W

dec*1

*1 Set this device using a multiplier of 16.

106

Read
/WriteExternal Device Setup Manual

2 Mitsubishi

2.5.14

MELSEC-FX (Ethernet)

Bit Device
Device Name

Int. Relay

Device Symbol
MICRO/I

PLC

M

M

Address Range

0 - 7679

Read/WriteAddress
GradualR/W

dec

Input Relay

X

X

0 - 377

R

hex

Output RelayYY

0 - 377

R/W

hex

Timer Relay (contact)TST

0 - 511R

dec

Counter Relay (contact)CSC

0 - 255

R

dec

M

SM

8000 - 8511

R

dec

State

S

S

0 - 4095

R/W

dec

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

0 - 7999

R/W

dec

Word Device
Device Name

Device Symbol
MICRO/I

PLC

Data Register

D

D

Input Relay (word)

WXX

0 - 360

R

hex

Output Relay (word)WYY

0 - 360

R/W

hex

Int. Relay (word)WM

M

0 - 7664

R/W

dec

Timer (Current Value)TNT

0 - 511R

dec

Counter (Current Value)CNC

0 - 199

R

dec

State (word)WSS

0 - 4080

R/W

hex

Special Internal Relay (word)

WSM

M

8000 - 8496

R

dec

Special Data RegisterSD

D

8000 - 8511

Rhex

32-bit counter (current value)

DCN

C

2000 - 2511

R

*1

Extended RegisterRR

0 - 32767

R/W

hex

2
2
2
Connection to a PLC

Special Internal Relay

2

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

*1 This device is a 32-bit device.

2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual107

Chapter 2

3

Omron

3.1

Connection Table

3.1.1

Compatible PLCs

System (CPU unit)

Link Unit

WindO/I-NV2, WindO/I-NV3 Settings
Interface

Flow
Control

Product Series

Host I/F Driver HG2G-5F, HG2G HG1F/ Touch
Communication HG3G/4G -S/-5S 2F/ 2S/
Driver
3F/ 4FSYSMAC-C
C500,
C500F,
C1000H,
C2000,
C2000H

C120-LK201-V1

RS232C
HardwareConnection Diagram 1(refer to P122)

C120-LK202-V1

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P125)

C500-LK201-V1

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P122)

SYSMAC-C
Series

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P125)
C500-LK203

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P122)
RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 3(refer to P128)

C1000HF

C500-LK203

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P122)
RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 3(refer to P128)

C200HS

C200HE,
C200HG,
C200HX

108

C200H-LK201

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P122)

C200H-LK202

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P125)

C200H-LK201

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P122)

C200H-LK202

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P125)

C200HWCOM02/COM04/
COM05/COM06

RS232C
Connection Diagram 6(refer to P136)

C200HWCOM03/COM06

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 7(refer to P139)

External Device Setup Manual

X

X

X

---

3 Omron

System (CPU unit)

Link Unit

WindO/I-NV2, WindO/I-NV3 Settings
Interface

C120,
C120F

C120-LK201-V1

RS232C
HardwareConnection Diagram 1(refer to P122)

C120-LK202-V1

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P125)

Not required
RS232C(connects to CPU unit) Connection Diagram 4(refer to P131)

CQM1H,C200HS-CPU21/
23/31/33

Not required
RS232C(connects to CPU unit) Connection Diagram 5(refer to P133)

C200HE-CPU42,
C200HG-CPU43/63,
C200HX-CPU44/64

Not required
RS232C(connects to CPU unit) Connection Diagram 6(refer to P136)

CPM1,
CPM1A,
CPM2A

CPM1-CIF01

RS232C
Connection Diagram 5(refer to P133)

CPM1-CIF11

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 8(refer to P142)

Host I/F Driver HG2G-5F, HG2G HG1F/ Touch
Communication HG3G/4G -S/-5S 2F/ 2S/
Driver
3F/ 4FSYSMAC-C
Series

X

X

X

---

2
2
2
2
Connection to a PLC

C20H, C28H,
C40H, C60H

CPM2A

Flow
Control

Product Series222

Not required
RS232C(connects to CPU unit) Connection Diagram 5(refer to P133)

2

SYSMAC-CS1
CS1G*1,
CS1H

Not required
RS232C
Hardware(connects to CPU unit) Connection Diagram 6(refer to P136)

SYSMACCS1Series

X

X

X

---

2

CS1W-SCB41 (port1)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 6(refer to P136)

2

CS1W-SCB41 (port2)

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 7(refer to P139)

2

CS1W-ENT01,
CS1W-ENT11,
CS1W-ENT21

Ethernet-

SYSMAC-CS1/
CJ Series(Ethernet)

X

X

X

X

2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual109

Chapter 2

System (CPU unit)

Link Unit

WindO/I-NV2, WindO/I-NV3 Settings
Interface

Flow
Control

Product Series

Host I/F Driver HG2G-5F, HG2G HG1F/ Touch
Communication HG3G/4G -S/-5S 2F/ 2S/
Driver
3F/ 4FSYSMAC-CJ1CJ1M*1,CJ1H,
CJ1G

Not required
RS232C
Hardware(connects to CPU unit) Connection Diagram 6(refer to P136)
CJ1W-SCU21-V1

RS232C
Connection Diagram 6(refer to P136)

CJ1W-SCU31-V1

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 7(refer to P139)

CJ1W-SCU41-V1(port1)

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 7(refer to P139)

CJ1W-SCU41-V1(port2)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 6(refer to P136)

CJ1W-ETN21

Ethernet-

SYSMACCS1 Series

X

X

X

---

SYSMAC-CS1/
CJ Series(Ethernet)

X

X

X

X

SYSMACCS1 Series

X

X

X

---

SYSMAC-CS1/
CJ Series(Ethernet)

X

X

X

X

SYSMAC-CJ2
CJ2M-CPU11/12/
13/14/15
CJ2H-CPU64/
65/66/67/68

110

Not required
RS232C
Hardware(connects to CPU unit) Connection Diagram 6(refer to P136)
CJ1W-SCU21-V1

RS232C
Connection Diagram 6(refer to P136)

CJ1W-SCU31-V1

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 7(refer to P139)

CJ1W-SCU41-V1(port1)

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 7(refer to P139)

CJ1W-SCU41-V1(port2)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 6(refer to P136)

CJ1W-ETN21

Ethernet-

External Device Setup Manual

3 Omron

System (CPU unit)

Link Unit

WindO/I-NV2, WindO/I-NV3 Settings
Interface

CJ2M-CPU31/
32/33/34/35

Flow
Control

CP1W-CIF01

RS232C
HardwareConnection Diagram 6(refer to P136)

CP1W-CIF11

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 8(refer to P142)

CJ1W-SCU21-V1

RS232C
Connection Diagram 6(refer to P136)

CJ1W-SCU31-V1

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 7(refer to P139)

CJ1W-SCU41-V1(port1)

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 7(refer to P139)

CJ1W-SCU41-V1(port2)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 6(refer to P136)

Ethernet porton the CPU Unit

Ethernet

Host I/F Driver HG2G-5F, HG2G HG1F/ Touch
Communication HG3G/4G -S/-5S 2F/ 2S/
Driver
3F/ 4FSYSMACCS1 Series

X

X

X

---

2
2
2
2
Connection to a PLC

2
2-

CJ1W-ETN21
CJ2H-CPU64-EIP/
65-EIP/66-EIP/
67-EIP/68-EIP

Product Series

Not required
RS232C
Hardware(connects to CPU unit) Connection Diagram 6(refer to P136)

SYSMAC-CS1/
CJ Series(Ethernet)

X

X

X

X

SYSMACCS1 Series

X

X

X

---

2
2

CJ1W-SCU21-V1

RS232C
Connection Diagram 6(refer to P136)

2

CJ1W-SCU31-V1

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 7(refer to P139)

2

CJ1W-SCU41-V1(port1)

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 7(refer to P139)

2

CJ1W-SCU41-V1(port2)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 6(refer to P136)

2

Ethernet porton the CPU Unit

Ethernet

CJ1W-ETN21-

SYSMAC-CS1/
CJ Series(Ethernet)

X

X

X

X

2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual111

Chapter 2

System (CPU unit)

Link Unit

WindO/I-NV2, WindO/I-NV3 Settings
Interface

Flow
Control

Product Series

Host I/F Driver HG2G-5F, HG2G HG1F/ Touch
Communication HG3G/4G -S/-5S 2F/ 2S/
Driver
3F/ 4FSYSMAC-CP1
CP1E-N14/N20

Not required
RS232C
Hardware(connects to CPU unit) Connection Diagram 6(refer to P136)

CP1E-NA20/N30/
N40/N60

Not required
RS232C(connects to CPU unit) Connection Diagram 6(refer to P136)
CP1W-CIF01

RS232C
Connection Diagram 6(refer to P136)

CP1W-CIF11

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 8(refer to P142)

CP1L-L14/20
CP1L-M30/40/60
CP1L-EL20
CP1L-EM20/30/40

CP1W-CIF01

RS232C
Connection Diagram 6(refer to P136)

CP1W-CIF11

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 8(refer to P142)

CP1H-Y20D/
X40/XA20

CP1W-CIF01

RS232C
HardwareConnection Diagram 6(refer to P136)

CP1W-CIF11

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 8(refer to P142)

CJ1W-SCU21-V1

RS232C
Connection Diagram 6(refer to P136)

CJ1W-SCU31-V1

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 7(refer to P139)

CJ1W-SCU41-V1(port1)

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 7(refer to P139)

CJ1W-SCU41-V1(port2)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 6(refer to P136)

CJ1W-ETN21

Ethernet-

SYSMACCS1Series

X

X

---

X

X

X

X

SYSMACCS1Series

SYSMAC-CS1/
CJ Series(Ethernet)*1 This PLC was used to test & verify communications.

112

X

External Device Setup Manual

3 Omron

3.2

System Configuration

This is the system configuration for the connection of Omron PLCs to the MICRO/I

3.2.1

SYSMAC-C Series (using the PLC Link Unit)

2
RS232C
Connection Diagram 1

MICRO/I2(refer to P122)

2
C500,C500F
C1000H

C120-LK201-V1

C2000, C2000H

MICRO/I

2

MICRO/I

Connection to a PLC

RS422
Connection Diagram 22(refer to P125)

2
2

C120-LK202-V1
RS232C
Connection Diagram 1

MICRO/I2(refer to P122)

2

RS422
Connection Diagram 2(refer to P125)

2
2

C500-LK201-V1
RS232C
Connection Diagram 1

MICRO/I(refer to P122)

2

RS422
Connection Diagram 3

2(refer to P128)

2
C500-LK203

2

C1000HF- In case of HG2F/3F/4F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 1 (part number: HG9Z-3C135).
- In case of HG1F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 1 (part number: HG9Z-XC155).

External Device Setup Manual113

Chapter 2

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1

MICRO/I(refer to P122)

C200HS
C200H-LK201
MICRO/I
RS422
Connection Diagram 2(refer to P125)

C200H-LK202- In case of HG2F/3F/4F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 1 (part number: HG9Z-3C135).
- In case of HG1F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 1 (part number: HG9Z-XC155)
RS232C
Connection Diagram 1

MICRO/I(refer to P122)

C120, C120F

C120-LK201-V1
MICRO/I
RS422
Connection Diagram 2(refer to P125)

C120-LK202-V1- In case of HG2F/3F/4F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 1 (part number: HG9Z-3C135).
- In case of HG1F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 1 (part number: HG9Z-XC155)

114

External Device Setup Manual

3 Omron

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1

MICRO/I(refer to P122)

22

C200HE,
C200HG,

C200H-LK201-V1

C200HX

RS422
Connection Diagram 2

MICRO/I2(refer to P125)

2
Connection to a PLC

2

C200H-LK202-V1

2- In case of HG2F/3F/4F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 1 (part number: HG9Z-3C135).
- In case of HG1F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 1 (part number: HG9Z-XC155).

2

Communication Board
RS232C
Connection Diagram 6

MICRO/I2(refer to P136)

22

C200HE,
C200HG,
C200HX

C200HW-COM02, COM04,
COM05, COM06
Communication Board

RS422
Connection Diagram 7(refer to P139)

MICRO/I

2
2
2

C200HW-COM03, COM06

2

You can use the same cable for Connection Diagram 6 as for Connection Diagram 5.

2External Device Setup Manual115

Chapter 2

RS232C
Connection Diagram 5

MICRO/I(refer to P133)

CPM1,
CPM1A,CPM2A

Omron RS232C Adapter
CPM1-CIF01

RS422
Connection Diagram 8

MICRO/I(refer to P142)

CPM1,
CPM1A,CPM2A

Omron RS422 Adapter
CPM1-CIF11- In case of HG2F/3F/4F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 5 (part number: HG9Z-3C155).
- In case of HG1F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 5 (part number: HG9Z-XC213).

3.2.2

SYSMAC-C Series (using the Link I/F on the CPU Unit)
RS232C
Connection Diagram 4 (refer to P131)

MICRO/I

C20H, C28H, C40H and C60H
RS232C
Connection Diagram 5 (refer to P133)

MICRO/I

C200HS-CPU21/23/31/33
CQM1H- In case of HG2F/3F/4F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 5 (part number: HG9Z-3C155).
- In case of HG1F a connection cable is available for Connection Diagram 5 (part number: HG9Z-XC213).

116

External Device Setup Manual

3 Omron

C200H

MICRO/I
RS232C
Connection Diagram 6 (refer to P136)

22

C200HE-CPU42
C200HG-CPU43/63

2

You can use the same cable for Connection Diagram 6 as for Connection Diagram 5.

2
2

SYSMAC-CS/CJ/CP Series (using RS232C Port on the CPU Unit)
MICRO/I
RS232C
Connection Diagram 6 (refer to P136)

Connection to a PLC

3.2.3

C200HX-CPU44/64

2
2
2
2

You can use the same cable for Connection Diagram 6 as for Connection Diagram 5.

2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual117

Chapter 2

3.2.4

SYSMAC-CS/CJ/CP Series (Using the Ethernet Communication Unit)

SYSMAC-CS1 Series

Communication Board

MICRO/I
RS232C
Connection Diagram 6(refer to P136)

CS1G, CS1H

CS1W-SCB41(port1)
RS422
Connection Diagram 7(refer to P139)

CS1W-SCB41(port2)

You can use the same cable for Connection Diagram 6 as for Connection Diagram 5.

118

External Device Setup Manual

MICRO/I

3 Omron

SYSMAC-CJ/CP Series

Communication Board

MICRO/I
RS232C
Connection Diagram 6(refer to P136)

22

CJ1M, CJ1H, CJ1G,

CJ1W-SCU21-V1

CJ2M, CJ2H, CP1H

RS422
Connection Diagram 7

MICRO/I(refer to P139)

2
2
Connection to a PLC

2

CJ1W-SCU31-V1

RS232C
Connection Diagram 6(refer to P136)

RS422
Connection Diagram 7

MICRO/I222(refer to P139)

2
CJ1W-SCU41-V1

You can use the same cable for Connection Diagram 6 as for Connection Diagram 5.

2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual119Chapter 2

SYSMAC-CJ/CP Series

Communication Board

MICRO/I

RS232C
Connection Diagram 6(refer to P136)

CP1E, CP1L, CP1H,
CJ2M-CPU31/32/33/34/35

CP1W-CIF01
Communication Board

MICRO/I

RS422
Connection Diagram 8(refer to P142)

CP1W-CIF11

You can use the same cable for Connection Diagram 6 as for Connection Diagram 5.

120

External Device Setup Manual

3 Omron

3.2.5

SYSMAC-CS/CJ/CP Series (Using the Ethernet Communication Unit)
SYSMAC-CS1 Series

MICRO/I
Touch

Ethernet Communication Unit
Ethernet

2
2

CS1G, CJ1H

MICRO/I
Touch

Ethernet Communication Unit

2
Connection to a PLC

SYSMAC-CJ1/CJ2 Series

2

CS1W-ENT01
CS1W-ENT11
CS1W-ENT21

2

Ethernet

2
2

CJ1M,CJ1H,CJ1G,
CJ2M,CJ2H,CP1H

CJ1W-ENT21

2
MICRO/I
Touch

SYSMAC-CJ2 Series

2

Ethernet

2
2
CJ2M-CPU31/32/33/34/35
CJ2H-CPU64-EIP/65-EIP/
66-EIP/67-EIP/68-EIP

2
2- Use a crossover cable to connect the MICRO/I and PLC directly.
- When using a hub (Ethernet switch), use a cable that can be used with the hub.

22External Device Setup Manual

121Chapter 2

3.3

Connection Diagram

For details regarding wiring refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

3.3.1

122

Connection Diagram 1: RS232C Link Unit to MICRO/I

D-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type

Terminal

External Device Setup Manual

3 Omron2222
D-sub, 9P connector socket type

- In case of HG1F a connection cable is available (part number: HG9Z-XC155).
- The connection diagram 1 is not same as HG9Z-XC155. But both diagrams are available. Refer to Chapter 7 "1.12 PLC
connection cable: HG9Z-XC155" on page 677 about the connection diagram of HG9Z-XC155.

Connection to a PLC

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type2

- In case of HG2F/3F/4Fa connection cable is available. (part number: HG9Z-3C135).
- The connection diagram 1 is not same as HG9Z-3C135. But both diagrams are available. Refer to Chapter 7 "1.5 PLC
connection cable: HG9Z-3C135" on page 672 about the connection diagram of HG9Z-3C135.

22

External Device Setup Manual123Chapter 2

D-sub, 25P connector socket type124

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

External Device Setup Manual

3 Omron

3.3.2

Connection Diagram 2: RS422 Link unit to MICRO/I22
22
Connection to a PLC

2

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug type2

We recommend that you switch on the termination resistor on the PLC Link Unit side for long-distance transmission.

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Terminal

2- We recommend that you switch on the termination resistor on the PLC Link Unit side for long-distance transmission.
- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" onpage 4.

External Device Setup Manual

2
2

125

Chapter 2

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket type

Terminal- We recommend that you switch on the termination resistor on the PLC Link Unit side for long-distance transmission.
- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG1F, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control to NONE.

126

External Device Setup Manual

3 Omron2222Connection to a PLC

2

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type

We recommend that you switch on the termination resistor on the PLC Link Unit side for long-distance transmission.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

- We recommend that you switch on the termination resistor on the PLC Link Unit side for long-distance transmission.
- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

External Device Setup Manual

2
2
2

127

Chapter 2

3.3.3

Connection Diagram 3: RS422 Link unit to MICRO/I

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug type

We recommend that you switch on the termination resistor on the PLC Link Unit side for long-distance transmission.

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Terminal- We recommend that you switch on the termination resistor on the PLC Link Unit side for long-distance transmission.
- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" onpage 4.

128

External Device Setup Manual

3 Omron2222Connection to a PLC

2

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Terminal

2- We recommend that you switch on the termination resistor on the PLC Link Unit side for long-distance transmission.

2- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG1F, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control to NONE.

22

External Device Setup Manual

129

Chapter 2

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type

We recommend that you switch on the termination resistor on the PLC Link Unit side for long-distance transmission.

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

- We recommend that you switch on the termination resistor on the PLC Link Unit side for long-distance transmission.
- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

130

External Device Setup Manual

3 Omron

3.3.4

Connection Diagram 4: CPU Unit Link I/F to MICRO/I22
22
Connection to a PLC

2

D-sub, 9P connector socket type (unit side)

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector socket type (unit side)

Terminal2222External Device Setup Manual131

Chapter 2

132

D-sub, 9P connector socket type (unit side)

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket type (unit side)

D-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket type (unit side)

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

External Device Setup Manual

3 Omron

3.3.5

Connection Diagram 5: CPU Unit Link I/F to MICRO/I22
22
Connection to a PLC

2

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Terminal2222External Device Setup Manual133

Chapter 2

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket type

- In case of HG1F a connection cable is available. (part number: HG9Z-XC213).
- The connection diagram 5 is not same as HG9Z-XC213. But both diagrams are available. Refer to Chapter 7 "1.15 PLC
connection cable: HG9Z-XC213" on page 678 about the connection diagram of HG9Z-XC213.

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type

- In case of HG2F/3F/4Fa connection cable is available. (part number: HG9Z-3C155).
- The connection diagram 5 is not same as HG9Z-3C155. But both diagrams are available. Refer to Chapter 7 "1.7 PLC
connection cable: HG9Z-3C155" on page 673 about the connection diagram of HG9Z-3C155.

134

External Device Setup Manual

3 Omron2222
D-sub, 37P connector plug type

Connection to a PLC

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual135Chapter 2

3.3.6

136

Connection Diagram 6: PLC (RS232C) I/F to MICRO/I

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector socket type

Terminal

External Device Setup Manual

3 Omron2222
D-sub, 9P connector socket type

- In case of HG1F a connection cable is available. (part number: HG9Z-XC213).
- The connection diagram 6 is not same as HG9Z-XC213. But both diagrams are available. Refer to Chapter 7 "1.15 PLC
connection cable: HG9Z-XC213" on page 678 about the connection diagram of HG9Z-XC213.

Connection to a PLC

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type2

- In case of HG2F/3F/4Fa connection cable is available. (part number: HG9Z-3C155).
- The connection diagram 6 is not same as HG9Z-3C155. But both diagrams are available. Refer to Chapter 7 "1.7 PLC
connection cable: HG9Z-3C155" on page 673 about the connection diagram of HG9Z-3C155.

2
2

External Device Setup Manual137Chapter 2

D-sub, 9P connector socket type138

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

External Device Setup Manual

3 Omron

3.3.7

Connection Diagram 7: RS422 Communication Board to MICRO/I22
22
Connection to a PLC

2

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug type

We recommend that you switch on the termination resistor on the PLC Link Unit side for long-distance transmission.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Terminal- We recommend that you switch on the termination resistor on the PLC Link Unit side for long-distance transmission.
- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" onpage 4.

External Device Setup Manual

2
2

139

Chapter 2

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket type

Terminal- We recommend that you switch on the termination resistor on the PLC Link Unit side for long-distance transmission.
- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG1F, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control to NONE.

140

External Device Setup Manual

3 Omron2222Connection to a PLC

2

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type

We recommend that you switch on the termination resistor on the PLC Link Unit side for long-distance transmission.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

- We recommend that you switch on the termination resistor on the PLC Link Unit side for long-distance transmission.
- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

External Device Setup Manual

2
2
2

141

Chapter 2

3.3.8

Connection Diagram 8: RS422 Adaptor to MICRO/I

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

We recommend that you switch on the termination resistor on the PLC Link Unit side for long-distance transmission.

Screw terminal block

Terminal- We recommend that you switch on the termination resistor on the PLC Link Unit side for long-distance transmission.
- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" onpage 4.

142

External Device Setup Manual

3 Omron2222Connection to a PLC

2Screw terminal block

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

2
2
2
2

Screw terminal block

Terminal

2- We recommend that you switch on the termination resistor on the PLC Link Unit side for long-distance transmission.

2- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG1F, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control to NONE.

222

External Device Setup Manual143

Chapter 2

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

We recommend that you switch on the termination resistor on the PLC Link Unit side for long-distance transmission.

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

- We recommend that you switch on the termination resistor on the PLC Link Unit side for long-distance transmission.
- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

144

External Device Setup Manual

3 Omron

3.4

Environment Settings

3.4.1

PLC Link Unit Settings

Perform the settings using the rotary switches and DIP switches on the Link Unit.
Item

2

Setting

Interface

RS232C

Transmission Control Protocol

1:N

Command Level

RS485

Levels 1, 2 and 3 are valid

Baud Rate

Use the same

Transmission Codesettings as for the

7 or 8 bit ASCII

Stop Bits

MICRO/I.

1 or 2

2

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200

0 to 31(DEC)

ParityEven or Odd

CTS Switch

0V (always on)

Synchronization Switch

Internal

Termination Resistor----------*1 Set a decimal number for the Unit No.

- Refer to the Link Unit manual for details.

2
Connection to a PLC

Unit No.*1

2

2
2

Yes

2
2

- Select using Register Command or not in Project Settings - Host I/F Driver.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual145

Chapter 2

3.4.2

CPU Unit RS232C Link I/F Settings

Write the RS232C I/F setting item for the System Settings Area using a peripheral tool (such as Proconn).
System Settings Area
C20H/
28H/40H/60H

CQM1H
C200HS/
C200HE/
C200HG/
C200HX

DM0920DM6645

Item

SettingStandard/Individual Setting *1

Same setting as the MICRO/I

Mode

PLC Link Mode

DM0921DM6646

Communication parameters for when theprevious item is set to Individual.

Use the same settings as for the MICRO/I.

DM0922

DM6647

Transmission Delay

0 msec

RS/CS presence

None

Unit No.

Same setting as the MICRO/I

DM0923DM6648*1 Standard settings
Baud Rate: 9600 bps
Data Bits: 7 bits
Stop Bits: 2 bits
Parity: Even

Refer to the PLC manual for details.

For CQM 1 and C200HS, set the switch number 5 on the CPU Unit setting switch to OFF.

146

External Device Setup Manual

3 Omron

3.4.3

CPU Unit RS232C Link I/F Settings (SYSMAC-CS1 Series)

Write the RS232C I/F setting items for the System Settings Area using a peripheral tool (such as Proconn).
ChannelItem

Setting160

Optional/Initial Setting *1

Set to 1 for Optional Setting.

Serial Communication mode

Set to PLC Link.

Data Bits

Use the same settings as for the MICRO/I.

Stop Bits

2
2

Parity161

2Port Communication Speed

Use the same settings as for the MICRO/I.

In the case of No Protocol Mode

Do not set.

163

Unit No.

Set to the same as the MICRO/I PLC Link Station Number.

164

In the case of No Protocol Mode

Do not set.

*1 Initial settings
Baud Rate: 9600 bps
Data Bits: 7 bits
Stop Bits: 2 bits
Parity: Even

2
Connection to a PLC

162

2
2
2

Refer to the PLC manual for details.

2
For the SYSMAC-CS1 Series, set switch number 5 on the CPU Unit setting switch to OFF to enable you to make your own
communication settings.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual147

Chapter 2

3.4.4

C200H(Communication Board) Settings

Write the Communication Board setting items for the System Settings Area using a peripheral tool (such as Proconn).
System Settings Area
Port APort B

DM6555DM6550Item

SettingStandard Setting/Individual Setting *1

Same setting as the MICRO/I.

Mode

PLC Link Mode
Same setting as the MICRO/I.

DM6556DM6551

Communication parameters for when theprevious item is set to Individual.

DM6557DM6552

Transmission Delay

0 msec

DM6558DM6553

Unit No.

Same setting as the MICRO/I.

*1 Standard settings
Baud Rate: 9600bps
Data Bits: 7 bits
Stop Bits: 2 bits
Parity: Even

Set DIP switch SW1 to the 4 side (4 lines).

Set DIP switch SW2 to ON to turn the termination resistor setting ON. Refer to the Communication Board manual for
details.

148

External Device Setup Manual

3 Omron

3.4.5

SYSMAC-CS1 Series (Communication Board) Settings

Write the Communication Board setting items for the System Settings Area using a peripheral tool (such as Proconn).
System Settings Area
Port 1

Port 2

DM32000

DM32010

Item

Setting

Optional/Initial Setting *1(*1)

Set to 1 for Optional Setting.

Serial Communication mode

Set to PLC Link.

Data Bits

Use the same settings as for the MICRO/I.

Stop Bits2
2
2

ParityDM32011DM32002

DM32012

Port Communication Speed

Use the same settings as for the MICRO/I.

Transmission Delay setting

0 for default (0mses)

2

Delay time setting
DM32003

DM32013

CTS control

Set to 0 for no

Unit No.

Use the same settings as for the MICRO/I.

*1 Initial settings
Baud Rate: 9600bps
Data Bits:7bits
Stop Bits:2bits
Parity: Even222

- Set the DIP switch 4 line.
- Set the DIP switch to ON to turn the termination resistor setting ON.

3.4.6

2
Connection to a PLC

DM320012

CPU Direct Settings (CPM1/CPM1A/CPM2A)

Connect via CPM-CIF01 (RS232C)/CPM 1-CIF11 (RS422).
Item

2

Setting2

RS232CBaud Rate

9600 bps

Data Bits

7 bitsStop Bits

2 bitsParityEven

22

The communication settings are fixed. Refer to the PLC manual for details.

22External Device Setup Manual

149

Chapter 2

3.4.7

SYSMAC-CS1/CJ Series (Ethernet Communication Unit) Settings

Write the Communication Board setting items for the System Settings Area using a peripheral tool (such as Proconn).
IP Address (MICRO/I)

Set the IP address of MICRO/I.
(Set this item in Communication Interface tab.)Subnet Mask

Set the subnet mask of MICRO/I.

Default Gateway

Set the default gateway of MICRO/I.

(Set this item in Communication Interface tab.)(Set this item in Communication Interface tab.)
IP Address(Etherent Communication Unit)

Set the IP address of Ethernet Communication Unit.

Port Number(Etherent Communication Unit)

Set the port number of Ethernet Communication Unit.

FINS Network Address(Ethernet Communication Unit)

Set the network address which is set in the Etherent Communication Unit.

FINS Node Address

Set the node address which is set in the Ethernet Communication Unit.

(Set this item in Host I/F Network tab.)(Set this item in Host I/F Network tab.)(Set this item in Host I/F Network tab.)(Ethernet Communication Unit)(Set this item in Host I/F Network tab.)

MICRO/I Port Number

Set the port number of MICRO/I.
(Set this item in Host I/F Network tab.)If you set "0", the port number of MICRO/I is set automatically.

HMI FINS Network Address

Set the network address of the MICRO/I.
(Set this item in Host I/F Driver tab.)

HMI FINS Node Address

Set the node address of the MICRO/I.
(Set this item in Host I/F Driver tab.)

The communication settings are fixed. Refer to the Ethernet Communication Unit manual for details.

150

External Device Setup Manual

3 Omron

3.5
3.5.1

Usable Devices
SYSMAC-C (when the PLC type setting is SYSMAC-C Series)

Bit Device
Device Name

Input/Output Internal Relay

Device Symbol
MICRO/I

PLC

R

CIO

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

0 - 99915,

R/W

*1

2

120000 - 614315
LRLR

0 - 19915

R/W*1

Holding Relay

HRHR

0 - 51115

R/W*1

Auxiliary MemoryARAR

0 - 95915

R*1

Timer (contact)

TIMC

TC

0 - 2047

R

Counter (contact)

CNTC

TC

0 - 4095

R

Relay

2
2
2

*1 The lower 2 digits represent the bit number. (0 - 15)

Word Device
Device Symbol

2Connection to a PLC

Link Relay

Device Name

2

Address Range

Read/WriteMICRO/I

PLC

Input/Output Internal Relay

WR

CIO

0 - 999, 1200 - 6143

R/W

Link Relay

WLR

LR

0 - 199

R/W

Holding Relay

WHR

HR

0 - 511

R/W

Auxiliary Memory Relay

WAR

AR

0 - 959

R

Timer (current value)

TIMN

TC

0 - 2047

R

Counter (current value)

CNTN

TC

0 - 4095

R

Data MemoryDMDM

0 - 9999

R/W

Address
GradualImportant points to note regarding setting performing Bit Write operations.
With a Bit Write operation, the word data is first read from the PLC, and a logic operation (AND or OR) is performed on
the relevant bit before writing it to the PLC to ensure that the values of other bits in the same channel are preserved. However, be certain that the PLC does not modify the data in the channel during the time that the MICRO/I is writing the data.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual151

Chapter 2

3.5.2

SYSMAC-CS1 Series (when the PLC type setting is SYSMAC-CS1 Series)

Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Core I/O

CIO

CIO

0 - 614315

R/W

*1

Work AreaWRWR

0 - 51115

R/W*1

Holding Bit

HRHR

0 - 51115

R/W*1

Auxiliary Bit

ARAR

0 - 95915

R*1

Timer (Contact)

TIMC

TIMC

0 - 4095

R

Counter (Contact)

CNTC

CNTC

0 - 4095

R

Task Area

TK

TK

0 - 31R*1 The lower 2 digits represent the bit number. (0 - 15)

152

External Device Setup Manual

3 Omron

Word Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteMICRO/I

PLC

Core I/O

WCIO

CIO

0 - 6143

R/W

Work Area

WWR

WR

0 - 511

R/W

Holding Bit

WHR

HR

0 - 511

R/W

Auxiliary Bit

WAR

AR

0 - 959

R

Timer (Present value)

TIMN

TIM

0 - 4095

R

Counter (Present value)

CNTN

CNT

0 - 4095

R

DM

DM

0 - 32767

R/W

EM0

EM0

0 - 32767

R/W

Expansion Data Memory (Bank 1)

EM1

EM1

0 - 32767

R/W

Expansion Data Memory (Bank 2)

EM2

EM2

0 - 32767

R/W

Expansion Data Memory (Bank 3)

EM3

EM3

0 - 32767

R/W

Expansion Data Memory (Bank 4)

EM4

EM4

0 - 32767

R/W

Expansion Data Memory (Bank 5)

EM5

EM5

0 - 32767

R/W

Expansion Data Memory (Bank 6)

EM6

EM6

0 - 32767

R/W

Expansion Data Memory (Bank 7)

EM7

EM7

0 - 32767

R/W

Expansion Data Memory (Bank 8)

EM8

EM8

0 – 32767

R/W

Expansion Data Memory (Bank 9)

EM9

EM9

0 - 32767

R/W

Expansion Data Memory (Bank A)

EMA

EMA

0 - 32767

R/W

Expansion Data Memory (Bank B)

EMB

EMB

0 - 32767

R/W

Expansion Data Memory (Bank C)

EMC

EMC

0 - 32767

R/W

Task Area (Status)

TKS

TKS

0 - 31R

Index RegisterIRIR

0 - 15

R

Data RegisterDRDR

0 - 15R2
2
22
Connection to a PLC

Data Memory
Expansion Data Memory (Bank 0)

Address
Gradual

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

- The Task Flag (bit) is 1 (ON) when the cycle execution task is in the executable state, and 0 (OFF when it is in the unexcited or standby states.

2- The Task Flag (Status) indicates the following states.
0: Never started
1: In the stopped state after starting once
2: Starting2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual153

Chapter 2

3.5.3

SYSMAC-CS1/CJ1 Ethernet (When the PLC type setting is SYSMAC-CS1/CJ1 Ethernet)

Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Core I/O

CIO

CIO

0 - 614315

R/W

*1

Work AreaWRWR

0 - 51115

R/W*1

Holding Bit

HRHR

0 - 51115

R/W*1

Auxiliary Bit

ARAR

0 - 95915

R*1

Timer (Contact)

TIMC

TIMC

0 - 4095

R

Counter (Contact)

CNTC

CNTC

0 - 4095

R

Task Area

TK

TK

0 - 31R*1 The lower 2 digits represent the bit number. (0 - 15)154

External Device Setup Manual

3 Omron

Word Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteMICRO/I

PLC

Core I/O

WCIO

CIO

0 - 6143

R/W

Work Area

WWR

WR

0 - 511

R/W

Holding Bit

WHR

HR

0 - 511

R/W

Auxiliary Bit

WAR

AR

0 - 959

R

Timer (Present value)

TIMN

TIM

0 - 4095

R/W

Counter (Present value)

CNTN

CNT

0 - 4095

R/W

DM

DM

0 - 32767

R/W

EM0

EM0

0 - 32767

R/W

Expansion Data Memory (Bank 1)

EM1

EM1

0 - 32767

R/W

Expansion Data Memory (Bank 2)

EM2

EM2

0 - 32767

R/W

Expansion Data Memory (Bank 3)

EM3

EM3

0 - 32767

R/W

Expansion Data Memory (Bank 4)

EM4

EM4

0 - 32767

R/W

Expansion Data Memory (Bank 5)

EM5

EM5

0 - 32767

R/W

Expansion Data Memory (Bank 6)

EM6

EM6

0 - 32767

R/W

Expansion Data Memory (Bank 7)

EM7

EM7

0 - 32767

R/W

Expansion Data Memory (Bank 8)

EM8

EM8

0 – 32767

R/W

Expansion Data Memory (Bank 9)

EM9

EM9

0 - 32767

R/W

Expansion Data Memory (Bank A)

EMA

EMA

0 - 32767

R/W

Expansion Data Memory (Bank B)

EMB

EMB

0 - 32767

R/W

Expansion Data Memory (Bank C)

EMC

EMC

0 - 32767

R/W

Expansion Data Memory (Bank D)

EMD

EMD

0 - 32767

R/W

Expansion Data Memory (Bank E)

EME

EME

0 - 32767

R/W

Expansion Data Memory (Bank F)

EMF

EMF

0 - 32767

R/W

Expansion Data Memory (Bank 10)

EM10

EM10

0 - 32767

R/W

Expansion Data Memory (Bank 11)

EM11

EM11

0 - 32767

R/W

Expansion Data Memory (Bank 12)

EM12

EM12

0 - 32767

R/W

Expansion Data Memory (Bank 13)

EM13

EM13

0 - 32767

R/W

Expansion Data Memory (Bank 14)

EM14

EM14

0 - 32767

R/W

Expansion Data Memory (Bank 15)

EM15

EM15

0 – 32767

R/W

Expansion Data Memory (Bank 16)

EM16

EM16

0 - 32767

R/W

Expansion Data Memory (Bank 17)

EM17

EM17

0 - 32767

R/W

Expansion Data Memory (Bank 18)

EM18

EM18

0 - 32767

R/W

Task Area (Status)

TKS

TKS

0 - 31R

Index RegisterIRIR

0 - 151

R/W

Data RegisterDRDR

0 - 15R/W

External Device Setup Manual2222Connection to a PLC

Data Memory
Expansion Data Memory (Bank 0)

Address
Gradual

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

155

Chapter 2- The Task Flag (bit) is 1 (ON) when the cycle execution task is in the executable state, and 0 (OFF when it is in the unexcited or standby states.
- The Task Flag (Status) indicates the following states.
0: Never started
1: In the stopped state after starting once
2: Starting- In SYSMAC-CS1/CJ Ethernet Host I/F Driver, Index Register is defined as a 32bit device and all 32bits are available.
This register is originally 32bit device in Omron PLC, but only lower 16bits are available in SYSMAC-CS1 Series Host I/
F Driver. This is different from SYSMAC-CS1 Series Host I/F Driver.

156

External Device Setup Manual

4 Allen-Bradley

4

Allen-Bradley

4.1

Connection Table

4.1.1

Compatible PLCs

System (CPU unit)

2

Link unit

WindO/I-NV2 Settings
Interface

Flow
Control2

Product Series

Host I/F Driver

HG2G-5F, HG2G HG1F/
HG3G/4G -S/-5S 2F/ 2S/
3F/ 4F

Touch

2

PLC-5
All PLC-5*1 models
that can be connected
to 1770-KF2

X

RS232C
Hardware PLC-5
Connection Diagram 2(refer to P166)

1770-KF2*1

X

X

---

Connection to a PLC

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 3(refer to P168)
All PLC-5*1 models

Not required(connects to CPU unit)

2
2

RS232C
Connection Diagram2(refer to P166)

2

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 4(refer to P171)2

SLC 500
SLC5/03*1,
SLC5/04,
SLC5/05

Not required(connects to CPU unit)

RS232C
Hardware Micro
Connection Diagram 1
Logix/(refer to P164)
SLC500
Full
Duplex)

SLC500(Half
Duplex)

X

X

X

---

2
2

Micro-Logix
MicroLogix1000,
MicroLogix1200*1

Not required(connects to CPU unit)

MicroLogix1100*1

Not required(connects to CPU unit)

MicroLogix1500*1

RS232C
Hardware Micro
Connection Diagram 5
Logix/(refer to P174)
SLC500Full
RS232C
Duplex)Connection Diagram 8(refer to P180)

Not required
RS232C(connects to Mini Din
Connection Diagram 5connector on CPU unit) (refer to P174)

X

X

X

---

2
-

Not required
RS232C(connects to D-sub
Connection Diagram 6
connector on CPU unit) (refer to P176)*1 This PLC was used to test & verify communications.

If your existing project is using "SLC500" with Ver.2.30 or earlier, "SLC500 (Half Duplex)" will appear to the Protocol setting with Ver.2.40 or later. SLC 500 (Half Duplex) driver is merged into the MicroLogix1200 (Full Duplex) driver.
WindO/I-NV2 software still provides the SLC 500 (Half Duplex) driver for the existing projects, but it's recommended touse the MicroLogix1200 (Full Duplex) driver if you create a new project.
Some address format between MicroLogix 1200 (Full Duplex) and SLC 500 (Half Duplex) are slight different.

External Device Setup Manual

2

2
2
2
2

157

Chapter 2

Selecting DirectLogic Logix DF1 (Full Duplex) or DirectLogic (Ethernet) for the Host I/F Driver allows the user to use the 1: N
Communication function.
1: N Communication function (Refer to Chapter 6 "1: N Communication (Multi-drop)"on page 653)
System (CPU unit)

Link unit

WindO/I-NV2 Settings
Interface

Flow Control

Product Series
Host I/F
Driver

HG2G-5F, HG2G HG1F/ Touch
HG3G/4G -S/-5S 2F/ 2S/
3F/ 4F

ControlLogix*1
ControlLogix 5550*1,
ControlLogix 5555*1

None
Not required
RS232C(connects to CPU unit)*1 Connection Diagram 7*1(refer to P178)

Logix DF1
(Full Duplex)

X

X

X

---

CompactLogix
1768 CompactLogix, Not required
1769 CompactLogix*1 (connects to CPU unit)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 7(refer to P178)

None

Logix DF1
(Full Duplex)

X

X

X

---

RS232C
Connection Diagram 7(refer to P178)

None

Logix DF1
(Full Duplex)

X

X

X

---

FlexLogix
1794-L33,
1794-L34

Not required(connects to CPU unit)*1 This PLC was used to test & verify communications.

158

External Device Setup Manual

4 Allen-Bradley

System (CPU unit)

Link unit

WindO/I-NV2 Settings

Product Series

Interface Host I/F Driver HG2G-5F, HG2G HG1F/ Touch
HG3G/4G -S/-5S 2F/ 2S/
3F/ 4F
ControlLogix
ControlLogix5550,
ControlLogix5555*1

1756-ENBT,
1756-EN2T

2

Ethernet

Ethernet/IP

X

X

X

---

Ethernet

Ethernet/IP

X

X

X

---

2

Ethernet

Ethernet/IP

X

X

X

---

2

Ethernet

Ethernet/IP

X

X

X

---

2

CompactLogix
1769 CompactLogix*1 Not required(connects to CPU unit)
PLC-5
1785-ENET*1

PLC-5ENot required(connects to CPU unit)

2

SLC 500*1*1

SLC5/05

Not required(connects to CPU unit)

SLC5/03, SLC5/04,
SLC5/05*1

1761-NET-ENI*1

Connection to a PLC

PLC-5*12
2

MicroLogix
Ethernet

MicroLogix1000,
MicroLogix1100*1 ,MicroLogix1200*1,
MicroLogix1500*1

1761-NET-ENI

MicroLogix1100*1

Not required(connects to Built-in Ethernet port on CPU unit)*1*2*1

Ethernet/IP

X

X

X

---

2
2

ControlLogix
Ethernet

Ethernet/IP(Native Tag)

X

---

---

---

2

Ethernet

Ethernet/IP(Native Tag)

X

---

---

---

2

*1 This PLC was used to test & verify communications.
*2 To connect the Ethernet port on MicroLogix1100, check the firmware version. MICRO/I supports version 4 or later. (The latest firmware is on the
Allen-Bradley web site.)2

ControlLogix5550,
ControlLogix5555*1

1756-ENBT,
1756-EN2T

CompactLogix
1769 CompactLogix*1 Not required(connects to CPU unit)222External Device Setup Manual

159

Chapter 2

4.2

System Configuration

This is the system configuration for the connection of Allen-Bradley PLCs to MICRO/I.

4.2.1

SLC 500 (connected to the CPU Channel 0 serial port)
SLC 500

MICRO/I
RS232C
Connection Diagram 1 (refer to P164)

SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04

4.2.2

PLC-5 (Interface Module)
PLC-5

MICRO/I
1770-KF2
RS232C
Connection Diagram 2(refer to P166)

All PLC-5 models that canconnect to the 1770-KF2

MICRO/I
MICRO/I

RS485
Connection Diagram 3(refer to P168)

160

External Device Setup Manual

4 Allen-Bradley

4.2.3

PLC-5 (CPU Direct)
PLC-5

MICRO/I
RS232C
Connection Diagram 2 (refer to P166)

2
2

RS485
Connection Diagram 3 (refer to P168)

2

All PLC-5 models
MICRO/I

2
Connection to a PLC

2
2Connect to the CPU Channel 0 serial port.

4.2.4

2

MicroLogix 1000/1100/1200/1500 (Mini Din connector on CPU Unit)
MICRO/I
RS232C
Connection Diagram 5 (refer to P174)222

MicroLogix1000
MicroLogix1200

2

MicroLogix1500
MICRO/I
RS232C
Connection Diagram 8 (refer to P180)222

MicroLogix1100

2

External Device Setup Manual161

Chapter 2

4.2.5

MicroLogix 1500 (D-sub 9 Pin connector on CPU Unit)
MICRO/I
RS232C
Connection Diagram 6 (refer to P176)

MicroLogix1500

4.2.6

Ethernet/IP (MicroLogix, PLC-5, SLC 500, ControlLogix, CompactLogix)
MICRO/I

ControlLogix + 1756-ENBT
CompactLogix 1769

PLC-5E
PLC-5 + 1785-ENET

SLC5/03 + 1761-NET-ENI
SLC5/04 + 1761-NET-ENI
SLC5/05 + 1761-NET-ENI
SLC5/05

Connect to maximum of 16 different PLCs

- Use a crossover cable to connect the MICRO/I and PLC directly.
- When using a hub (Ethernet switch), use a cable that can be used with the hub.

162

External Device Setup Manual

MicroLogix + 1761-NET-ENI
MicroLogix 1100
Built-in Ethernet port

4 Allen-Bradley

4.2.7

Control Logix/CompactLogix/FlexLogix (CPU Unit)
MICRO/I
RS232C
Connection Diagram 7 (refer to P178)

2
2

ControlLogix
CompactLogix

2

FlexLogix

4.2.8

2

Ethernet/IP (Native Tag) ControlLogix/CompactLogix/ (CPU Unit)

Connection to a PLC

MICRO/I
Ethernet

2
2

ControlLogix

2

CompactLogix- Use a crossover cable to connect the MICRO/I and PLC directly.
- When using a hub (Ethernet switch), use a cable that can be used with the hub.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual163

Chapter 2

4.3

Connection Diagram

The connector types given in the Connection Diagrams are for the unit and not the cable. For details regarding wiring andtermination resistors, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

4.3.1

164

Connection Diagram 1: SLC 500 (RS232C) to MICRO/I

D-sub, 9P connector plug type (unit side)

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector plug type (unit side)

Terminal

External Device Setup Manual

4 Allen-Bradley222
2
D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

D-sub, 9P connector plug type (unit side)

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector plug type (unit side)

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2
D-sub, 9P connector plug type (unit side)

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

External Device Setup Manual165

Chapter 2

4.3.2

166

Connection Diagram 2: Interface Module (RS232C) to MICRO/I and PLC-5 (RS232C) to
MICRO/I

D-sub, 25P connector socket type (unit side)

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type (unit side)

Terminal

External Device Setup Manual

4 Allen-Bradley222
2
D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

D-sub, 25P connector socket type (unit side)

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 25P connector socket type (unit side)

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 25P connector socket type (unit side)

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

External Device Setup Manual

167

Chapter 2

4.3.3

Connection Diagram 3: Interface Module (RS422) to MICRO/I

D-sub, 25P connector socket type (unit side)

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type (unit side)

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor,
use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page
4.

168

External Device Setup Manual

4 Allen-Bradley2222Connection to a PLC

2

D-sub, 25P connector socket type (unit side)

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 25P connector socket type (unit side)

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual169

Chapter 2

D-sub, 25P connector socket type (unit side)

D-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type (unit side)

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

170

External Device Setup Manual

4 Allen-Bradley

4.3.4

Connection Diagram 4: PLC-5 (RS422) to MICRO/I22
2
2
D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Connection to a PLC

D-sub, 25P connector socket type (unit side)

2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 25P connector socket type (unit side)

Terminal

2
There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor,
use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page
4.

2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual171

Chapter 2

D-sub, 25P connector socket type (unit side)

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type (unit side)

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

172

External Device Setup Manual

4 Allen-Bradley2222Connection to a PLC

2

D-sub, 25P connector socket type (unit side)

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 25P connector socket type (unit side)

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual173

Chapter 2

4.3.5

174

Connection Diagram 5: MicroLogix 1000/1200/1500(Mini Din connector) to MICRO/I

Mini Din 8P socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug type

Mini Din 8P socket type

Terminal

Mini Din 8P socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket type

External Device Setup Manual

4 Allen-Bradley222
2
D-sub, 25P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

Mini Din 8P socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2

Mini Din 8P socket typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual

175Chapter 2

4.3.6

176

Connection Diagram 6: MicroLogix 1500(D-sub 9 Pin connector) to MICRO/I

D-sub 9 Pin connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub 9 Pin connector plug type

Terminal

D-sub 9 Pin connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector socket type

External Device Setup Manual

4 Allen-Bradley222
2
D-sub, 25P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

D-sub 9 Pin connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub 9 Pin connector plug typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual177Chapter 2

4.3.7

178

Connection Diagram 7: ControlLogix/CompactLogix/FlexLogix - MICRO/I

D-sub 9 Pin connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub 9 Pin connector plug type

Terminal

D-sub 9 Pin connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector socket type

External Device Setup Manual

4 Allen-Bradley222
2
D-sub, 25P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

D-sub 9 Pin connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub 9 Pin connector plug typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual179

Chapter 2

4.3.8

180

Connection Diagram 8: MicroLogix 1100(Mini Din connector) to MICRO/I

Mini Din 8P socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug type

Mini Din 8P socket type

Terminal

Mini Din 8P socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket type

External Device Setup Manual

4 Allen-Bradley222
2
D-sub, 25P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

Mini Din 8P socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2

Mini Din 8P socket typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual181

Chapter 2

4.4

Environment Settings

Allowed communication settings for MicroLogix, SLC 500, PLC-5, ControlLogix and CompactLogix are as follows.

4.4.1

MicroLogix, SLC 500 (Full Duplex)

Item

Setting*1 *2

Baud Rate (bps)
Data Bits*21200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200
8 (fixed)

ParityNone or Even

Stop Bits *1 *2

1

Flow Control

Hardware or None

Serial Interface

RS232C

Driver*1

DF1 Full-Duplex *3

Control Line *1

No Handshaking *3

Error Detection *1

CRC *3

Embedded Response *1

Auto Detect

Duplicate Packet Detect *1

EnableNode Address *1 *2 *4

0 to 254 (decimal)*1 *2*1 Select using RSLogix software (set Chan0 to System of Controller-Channel Configuration).
*2 The setting for this item must match the setting on the MICRO/I Series unit.
*3 Be certain to select as indicated.
*4 Be certain to select as indicated.Select the MICRO/I Node Address using the Node Address (MICRO/I) under Project Settings in WindO/INV2 software.

182

External Device Setup Manual

4 Allen-Bradley

4.4.2

SLC 500 (Half Duplex)

Item

Setting

Interface
Baud Rate (bps)RS232C*1*2

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200
8 (fixed)

Parity *1 *2

None or Even

Stop Bits*1 *2

1

Driver *1

DF1 Half-Duplex Slave *3

Duplicate Detect *1

Disabled*3

Error Detect *1

BCC *3Control Line *1

No handshaking*3

Node Address *1 *2*4

0 to 254 (decimal)*1 Set using RSLogix500 (set Chan0 to System of Controller-Channel Configuration).
*2 The setting for this item must match the setting on the MICRO/I Series unit.
*3 Be certain to set as indicated.

*4Set the MICRO/I Node Address using the Node Address (MICRO/I) setting in Configuration-System Setup-Project-Host I/
F Driver of WindO/I-NV2.

222Connection to a PLC

Data Bits *2

2

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual183

Chapter 2

4.4.3

PLC-5

Item

Setting
RS232C, RS485 4-wire*1 *2

Interface*3*4

Baud Rate (bps)
Data Bits*3 *41200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200
8 (fixed)

Parity *3 *4None or Even

Stop Bits*3 *4

1 (fixed)

Communication Protocol *3

Half duplex *5

Channel 0 Protocol *3

DF1 Slave *5

Duplicate Detect *3

OFF *5

Error Detect *3

BCC *5Control Line *3

No handshaking*5

Network Link *3

Data highway plus

PLC-5 Processor Station Address*4 *6

00 to 77 (Octal)

1770-KF2 Node Number*1 *4 *7

00 to 77 (Octal)*1 When using the 1770-KF2 Module, select this setting using the 1770-KF2 Module DIP switch.
*2 In the case of a direct connection to the PLC-5 Processor Module, select this setting using the PLC-5 Processor Module DIP switch.
*3 When using the 1770-KF2 Module, select this setting using the DIP switch on 1770-KF2 Module. In case of a direct connection to the PLC-5 Processor Module, select using the 6200 Programming Software (Channel 0 configuration).
*4 The setting for this item must match the setting on the MICRO/I Series unit.
*5 Be certain to select as indicated.
*6 This setting is required regardless of whether 1770-KF2 Module is used or not. When using the 1770-KF2 Module, select this setting using the DIP
switch on PLC-5 Processor, and in the case of a direct connection to the PLC-5 Processor Module, select using the 6200 Programming Software(Channel 0 configuration).
*7 This selection is only necessary if you are using the Interface Module.

Setting the Station Address using WindO/I-NV2.
- When using the 1770-KF2 Module, select “Use 1770-KF2” checkbox in the WindO/I-NV2 Configuration - System
Setup - Project - Host I/F Driver, and set “Station Address (1770-KF2)” and “Station Address (PLC5)”.
- In case of direct connection to PLC5 Processor Module, do not select the “Use 1770-KF2” checkbox. Instead select “Station Address (1770-KF2)”.
These numbers are to be set using octal for the PLC-5 and 1770-KF2, but hexadecimal for the WindO/I-NV2.

184

External Device Setup Manual

4 Allen-Bradley

4.4.4

Ethernet/IP (ControlLogix, CompactLogix, PLC-5, SLC 500, MicroLogix)

Communication Interface Setting (Ethernet)
Item

Setting

Interface

Ethernet

IP Address

Set the IP address of MICRO/I.

Subnet Mask

Set the subnet mask of MICRO/I.

Default Gateway

Set the default gateway of MICRO/I.

Host I/F Network Setting
Set some network information of PLCs. It can be set to maximum of 16.
Setting

Station No.

The number to select PLC when set device address.

IP Address

Set the IP address of communicated PLC.

Port Number

Set the port number of communicated PLC.

Product

Set the product of communicated PLC.
(For ControlLogix or CompactLogix, select «Logix».)

Slot Number

4.4.5

Set the CPU slot number of communicated PLC.

ControlLogix, CompactLogix, FlexLogix

Item

Setting

Baud Rate (bps) *1

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200

Data Bits*1

8 (fixed)

Parity *1

None or Even

Stop Bits*1

1

Flow Control

None

Serial Interface

RS232C

ProtocolDF1 Point to Point *2

Control LineNo Handshaking *2

Error Detection

BCC or CRC

Embedded Response

Auto Detect

Duplicate Packet Detect

EnableStation Address*1 *3

0 to 254 (decimal)*1 The setting for this item must match the setting on the MICRO/I Series unit.
*2 Be certain to select as indicated.
*3 Select the MICRO/I Node Address using the Station Address (MICRO/I) under Configuration - System Setup - Project - Host I/F Driver in
WindO/I-NV2.

External Device Setup Manual222Connection to a PLC

Item

2

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

185

Chapter 2

4.4.6

Ethernet/IP (Logix Native Tag) (ControlLogix, CompactLogix)

Communication Interface Setting
Item

Setting

Interface

Ethernet

IP Address

Set the IP address of MICRO/I.

Subnet Mask

Set the subnet mask of MICRO/I.

Default Gateway

Set the default gateway of MICRO/I.

HostI/F Network Setting
Set some network information of PLCs. It can be set to maximum of 16.

186

Item

Setting

Station No.

The number to select PLC when set device address.

IP Address

Set the IP address of communicated PLC.

Port Number

Set the port number of communicated PLC.

Slot Number

Set the CPU slot number of communicated PLC.

Tag File

Set the tag database file.

External Device Setup Manual

4 Allen-Bradley

4.5

Usable Devices

The types of compatible devices and their ranges are shown below. Device address selection for the MicroLogix1200, SLC 500 and
PLC-5 CPU’s are is done using File No., Element No., Bit No. etc., with an appropriate delimiter. But the WindO/I-NV2 address
selection is done without the delimiter. The MICRO/I address specification syntax (address specification rules) is explained below.
Follow the syntax below when performing address selections using WindO/I-NV2 software.

2

MICRO/I support the following device types and range.
WindO/I-NV2 supports the device address format as same as MicroLogix, SLC 500, PLC-5 programming software along with thestandard device address format of WindO/I-NV2.

• Standard device address format of WindO/I-NV2
File Number, Element and Bit Number are separated by some delimiters in device address format of Allen-Bradley’s software.
However, standard device address format of WindO/I-NV2 does not contain delimiters.
It is remove some delimiters from Allen-Bradley’s device address format.

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
GradualConnection to a PLC

22This device address format is same as the device address format of Allen-Bradley’s software.
(Some part of the format is deferent. Refer to the following.)

2

MicroLogix, SLC 500 (Full Duplex)

Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol22• Allen-Bradley device address format

4.5.1

2

2

MICRO/I

PLC

OutputOO

0 - 1625515

R

10*1

Input

I

I

0 - 1625515

R

10*1

BinaryB

B

300000 - 325515,

R/W

10*2

2
2

900000 - 25525515
Timer Enable Bit

TEN

T(EN)

4000 - 4255, 9000 - 255255

R

10*3

Timer Timing Bit

TTT

T(TT)

4000 - 4255, 9000 - 255255

R

*3

10

Timer Done Bit

TDN

T(DN)

4000 - 4255, 9000 - 255255

R

10*3

Counter Up Enable Bit

CCU

C(CU)

5000 - 5255, 9000 - 255255

R

*3

10

Counter Down Enable Bit

CCD

C(CD)

5000 - 5255, 9000 - 255255

R

10*3

Counter Done Bit

CDN

C(DN)

5000 - 5255, 9000 - 255255

R

10*3

Counter Overflow Bit

COV

C(OV)

5000 - 5255, 9000 - 255255

R

10*3

Counter Underflow Bit

CUN

C(UN)

5000 - 5255, 9000 - 255255

R

10*3

Counter Update Accumulator

CUA

C(UA)

5000 - 5255, 9000 - 255255

R

10*3

Control Enable Bit

REN

R(EN)

6000 - 6255, 9000 - 255255

R

10*3

Control Queue Bit

REU

R(EU)

6000 - 6255, 9000 - 255255

R

10*3

Control Asynchronous Bit
Done Bit

RDN

R(DN)

6000 - 6255, 9000 - 255255

R

10*3

Control Synchronous Done Bit

REM

R(EM)

6000 - 6255, 9000 - 255255

R

10*3

Control Error Bit

RER

E(ER)

6000 - 6255, 9000 - 255255

R

10*3

External Device Setup Manual

2
2
2
2
2

187

Chapter 2

Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Control Unload Bit

RUL

R(UL)

6000 - 6255, 9000 - 255255

R

10*3

Control Running Bit

RIN

R(IN)

6000 - 6255, 9000 - 255255

R

10*3

Control Found Bit

RFD

R(FD)

6000 - 6255, 9000 - 255255

R

10*3

*1 Address selection rule is as follows.

*2 Address selection rule is as follows.

188

External Device Setup Manual

4 Allen-Bradley*3 Address selection rule is as follows.

2222Connection to a PLC

2

A communication error will occur if you specify a file or element that is not allocated to the MicroLogix1200, SLC 500
data table map.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual

189

Chapter 2

Word Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

OutputWO

O

0 - 16255

R

10*1

Input

WI

I

0 - 16255

R

10*1

StatusS

S

2000 - 2065

R

10*2

Bit

WB

B

3000 - 3255,

R/W

10*2

R/W

10*2

R/W

10*2

R/W

10*2

R/W

10*2

R/W

10*2

R/W

10*2

R/W

10*2

R/W

10*3

9000 - 255255
Timer (Preset Value)

TP

T(P)

4000 - 4255,
9000 - 255255

Timer (Accumulated Value)

TA

T(A)

4000 - 4255,

Counter (Preset Value)

CP

C(P)

5000 - 5255,

Counter (Accumulated Value)

CA

C(A)

5000 - 5255,

9000 - 255255
9000 - 255255
9000 - 255255
Control

RLEN

R(LEN)(Number of characters specified
to be sent or received)
Control

6000 - 6255,
9000 - 255255

RPOS

R(POS)(Number of characters actuallysent or received)

6000 - 6255,
9000 - 255255

IntegerN

N

Float Point

F

F

7000 - 7255,
9000 - 255255
80000 - 82551,
90000 - 2552551

190

Long Word

L

L

90000 - 2552551

R/W

10*3

ASCII

A

A

9000 - 255255

R/W

10*2

String LEN

STL

ST

9000 - 255255

R

10*2

String DATA

ST

ST

900000 - 25525540

R/W

10*4

External Device Setup Manual

4 Allen-Bradley*1 Address selection rule is as follows.

2222Connection to a PLC*2 Address selection rule is as follows.

2
2
2
2
2

*3 Address selection rule is as follows.
WindO/I-NV2 uses 32 bit device as the divided 2 word device.
Therefore, the last one digit shows that the device is upper word or lower word.

2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual

191

Chapter 2*4 Address selection rule is as follows.

ST 255 255 40
2 digits DATA number
3 digits Element number
3 digits File number

MicroLogix1200 Address ---ST 123:255.DATA[40]WindO/I-NV2 Address ---ST 12325540

ST 255:255/40
2 digits DATA number
3 digits Element number
3 digits File number- WO, WI, WB is same devices as O, I, B. They are used as word devices.

- Floating Point (F) and Long Word (L) are 32-bit devices. When you write to these devices, please be sure to write a highword and low word simultaneously. If you write only high word or only low word, 0 will be written into the other word.
- String devices are only compatible with HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G.
- String LEN stores the number of characters written when a string is written from the String DATA start address(DATA[0]) of each element.
If the address to write is not from the start, the value of String LEN is not updated.
- When writing a string from a character input, the NULL terminating character is written at the end of the string.
The NULL is automatically set by the HMI. Be aware that this is not only for Allen-Bradley driver. This is the specification of Character Input.
- A communication error will occur if you specify a file or element that is not allocated to the MicroLogis1200, SLC 500
data table map.

192

External Device Setup Manual

4 Allen-Bradley

4.5.2

SLC 500 (Half Duplex)

Bit Device
Device Name

Timer (done)

Device Symbol
MICRO/I

PLC

TDN

T

Address Range*1

4000 - 4255,

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

R

10

R

10

R

10

R

10

R

10

R

10

R

10

R

10

R

10

2

10000 - 255255
Timer (timing)

TT

T

4000 - 4255,
10000 - 255255

ENT

Counter (done)

CDN

C

Counter (up enable)

CU

C

4000 - 4255,
10000 - 255255
5000 - 5255,
10000 - 255255
5000 - 5255,
10000 - 255255

CounterCDC(down enable)
Counter (overflow)

5000 - 5255,
10000 - 255255

OVC

5000 - 5255,
10000 - 255255

Counter (underflow)

UN

C

5000 - 5255,
10000 - 255255

Counter (high-speed counter
update)UA

C

5000 - 5255,
10000 - 255255

2
2
Connection to a PLC

Timer (enable)

2

2
2
2
2
2

*1 Address selection rule is as follows.

2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual193

Chapter 2

Word Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Input

WI

I

0 - 301R

10 *1

OutputWO

O

0 - 301

R

10 *1

Bit

WB

B

3000 - 3255,

R/W

10 *2

R

10 *2

R

10 *2

R/W

10 *2

R/W

10*2

R/W

10 *2

R/W

10 *2

10000 - 255255
Timer

TA

T

CA

C

TP

T

(accumulated value)Counter

10000 - 255255(accumulated value)
Timer (preset value)

4000 - 4255,
5000 - 5255,
10000 - 255255
4000 - 4255,
10000 - 255255

CounterCP

C(preset value)

5000 - 5255,
10000 - 255255

Integer*3

N

N

ASCII

A

A

7000 - 7255,
10000 - 255255
10000 - 255255*1 Address selection rule is as follows.

194

External Device Setup Manual

4 Allen-Bradley*2 Address selection rule is as follows.

2
2
2
2

The input and output addresses are made up of the slot number and the word number.
- The address makeup is as follows:
Bottom digit: Word number
2nd and 3rd digits from the bottom: Slot number- If the module in the slot has 16 or fewer points, the word number is 0, and if it is a 32-point module, the word number is 0
for the lower word(bit 0 to bit 15) and 1 for the upper word (bit 16 to bit 31).
- In the case of a rack-type controller, the slot number is attributed as is, and in the case of a package-type controller, it is asfollows.
Package-type controller: 0
Left slot of the expansion rack: 1
Right slot of the expansion rack: 2
Example:Address specification with SLC 500: I: 1.0
Address specification with WindO/I-NV2: 1 0

Connection to a PLC*3 Allocate the System Area above the file number 7 integer file. It will not operate with file number 10 and above. You must construct an area above
the SLC 500 data table file that corresponds to the System Area Address set by WindO/I-NV2.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

- You cannot directly write to inputs and outputs.
- A communication error will occur if you specify a file or element that is not allocated to the SLC 500 data table map.

222External Device Setup Manual

195

Chapter 2

4.5.3

PLC-5 (Half Duplex)

Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Input

I

I

0 - 27717*1

R/W

8

OutputOO

0 - 27717*1

R/W

8

Bit

B

B

300000 - 9999915*2

R

10

Timer (complete)

TDN

T

3000 - 99999*3

R

10

Timer (timing)

TT

T

3000 - 99999*3

R

10

Timer (enable)

EN

T

3000 - 99999*3

R

10

Counter (complete)

CDN

C

3000 - 99999*3

R

10

Counter (up enable)

CU

C

3000 - 99999*3

R

10

Counter (down enable)

CD

C

3000 - 99999*3

R

10

Counter (overflow)

OV

C

3000 - 99999*3

R

10

Counter (underflow)

UN

C

3000 - 99999*3R

10*1 Address selection rule is as follows.

196

External Device Setup Manual

4 Allen-Bradley*2 Address selection rule is as follows.

2222Connection to a PLC

With the PLC-5, addresses can be specified with word and bit units, or with bit units only (i.e. there are two ways), while with WindO/I-NV2 you mustspecify addresses using word and bit units.
*3 Address selection rule is as follows.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual197

Chapter 2

Word Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Input

WI

I

0 - 277*1

R

8

OutputWO

O

0 - 277*1

R/W

8

Bit

WB

B

3000 - 99999 *2

R/W

10

Timer (current value)

TA

T

3000 - 99999 *2

R

10Counter (current value)

CA

C

3000 - 99999 *2

R

10Timer (preset value)

TP

T

3000 - 99999 *2

R/W

10

Counter (preset value)

CP

C

3000 - 99999 *2

R/W

10

IntegerN

N

3000 - 99999*2 *3

R/W

10

BCD

D

D

3000 - 99999 *2

R/W

10

ASCII

A

A

3000 - 99999 *2

R/W

10

*1 Address selection rule is as follows.

*2 Address selection rule is as follows.

*3 System Area should assigned using a file number between 1 and 9 only. It will not work with file number 10 or above. You must construct an area in
the PLC-5 data table file that corresponds to the System Area Address selected by WindO/I-NV2.

198

External Device Setup Manual

4 Allen-Bradley

4.5.4

Ethernet/IP

If you select Ethernet/IP as Host I/F Driver, the driver contains some PLCs devices.
Therefore, the following devices name may be not same as devices name for each PLC.
Refer to the following cross reference table about detail.

2

Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual2
2

PLC

SLC/MicroLogix Input

SI

I

0 - 1625515

R

10*1

SLC/MicroLogix Output

SOO

0 - 1625515

R

10

*1

PLC-5 Input

PI

I

0 - 27717

R

10 *2

PLC-5 Output

POO

0 - 27717

R/W

10 *2

BinaryB

B

0 - 99999915

R/W

10 *3

Timer Enable bit

TEN

TEN

0 - 999999

R

10*4

Timer Timing Bit

TTT

TTT

0 - 999999

R

10 *4

Timer Done Bit

TDN

TDN

0 - 999999

R

10 *4

Counter Up Enable Bit

CCU

CCU

0 - 999999

R

10 *4

Counter Down Enable Bit

CCD

CCD

0 - 999999

R

10 *4

Counter Done Bit

CDN

CDN

0 - 999999

R

10 *4

Counter Overflow Bit

COV

COV

0 - 999999

R

10 *4

Counter Underflow Bit

CUN

CUN

0 - 999999

R

10 *4

Counter Update Accumulator

CUA

CUA

0 - 999999

R

10 *4

Control Enable Bit

REN

REN

0 - 999999

R

10 *4

Control Queue Bit

REU

REU

0 - 999999

R

10 *4

Control Aynchronous Done Bit

RDN

RDN

0 - 999999

R

10 *4

Control Synchronous Done BIt

REM

REM

0 - 999999

R

10 *4

Control Error Bit

RER

RER

0 - 999999

R

10 *4

Control Unload Bit

RUL

RUL

0 - 999999

R

10 *4

Control Running Bit

RIN

RIN

0 - 999999

R

10 *4

Control Found Bit

RFD

RFD

0 - 999999

R

10 *4

2
Connection to a PLC

MICRO/I

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual

199

Chapter 2*1 Address selection rule is as follows.

*2 Address selection rule is as follows.

200

External Device Setup Manual

4 Allen-Bradley*3 Address selection rule is as follows.

2222Connection to a PLC

22*4 Address selection rule is as follows.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual201

Chapter 2

Word Device
Device Name

202

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

SLC/MicroLogix Input (Word)

SWI

I

0 - 16255

R

10*1

SLC/MicroLogix Output (Word)

SWOO

0 - 16255

R

10 *1

PLC-5 Input (Word)

PWI

I

0 - 277

R

10 *2

PLC-5 Output (Word)

PWO

O

0 - 277

R/W

10 *2

StatusS

S

2000 - 2026

R

10*3

Timer (Preset Value)TPTP

0 - 999999

R/W

10 *3

Timer (Accumulated Value)TATA

0 - 999999

R/W

10 *3

Counter (Preset Value)CPCP

0 - 999999

R/W

10 *3

Counter (Accumulated Value)CACA

0 - 999999

R/W

10 *3

Control LEN

RLEN

RLEN

0 - 999999

R/W

10*3

Control POS

RPOS

RPOS

0 - 999999

R/W

10*3

Bit (Word)

WB

WB

0 - 999999

R/W

10 *3

IntegerNN

0 - 999999

R/W

10 *3

Float/REAL

F

F

0 - 9999991

R/W

10*4

Long/DINT

L

L

0 - 9999991

R/W

10 *4

Ascii

A

A

0 - 999999

R/W

10 *3

BCD

BCD

BCD

0 - 999999

R/W

10*3

SINT

SINT

SINT

0 - 999999

R/W

10 *3

String LEN

STL

ST

0 - 999999

R

10 *3

String DATA

ST

ST

0 - 99999940

R/W

10 *5

External Device Setup Manual

4 Allen-Bradley*1 Address selection rule is as follows.

2222Connection to a PLC

2*2 Address selection rule is as follows.

2
2
2
2
2

*3 Address selection rule is as follows.

2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual203

Chapter 2*4 Address selection rule is as follows.
WindO/I-NV2 uses 32 bit device as the divided 2 word device.
Therefore, the last one digit shows that the device is upper word or lower word

*5 Address selection rule is as follows.

ST 255 255 40
2 digits DATA number
3 digits Element number
3 digits File number

MicroLogix1200 Address ---ST 123:255.DATA[40]WindO/I-NV2 Address ---ST 12325540

ST 255:255/40
2 digits DATA number
3 digits Element number
3 digits File number

WO, WI, WB is same devices as O, I, B. They are used as word devices.

204

External Device Setup Manual

4 Allen-Bradley- Floating Point (F) and Long Word (L) are 32-bit devices. When you write to these devices, please be sure to write a highword and low word simultaneously. If you write only high word or only low word, 0 will be written into the other word.
- String devices are only compatible with HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G.

2- String LEN stores the number of characters written when a string is written from the String DATA start address(DATA[0]) of each element.
If the address to write is not from the start, the value of String LEN is not updated.

2- When writing a string from a character input, the NULL terminating character is written at the end of the string.
- A communication error will occur if you specify a file or element that is not allocated to the MicroLogis1200, SLC 500
data table map.

2

Bit Device
Device Name

DeviceSymbol2Connection to a PLC• Cross reference table of devices name2

MicroLogix/SLC500

PLC-5

ControlLogix
CompcatLog
ix

SLC/MicroLogix Input

SI

Input (Bit)--

SLC/MicroLogix Output

SO

Output (Bit)--

PLC-5 Input

PI-

Input (Bit)-

PLC-5 Output

PO-

Output (Bit)-

BinaryB

BinaryBinary-Timer Enable bit

TEN

Timer Enable bit

Timer Enable bit-

Timer Timing Bit

TTTTimer Timing Bit

Timer Timing Bit-

Timer Done Bit

TDNTimer Done Bit

Timer Done Bit-

Counter Up Enable Bit

CCUCounter Up Enable Bit

Counter Up Enable Bit-

Counter Down Enable Bit

CCDCounter Down Enable Bit

Counter Down Enable Bit-

Counter Done Bit

CDN

Counter Done Bit

Counter Done Bit

Counter Overflow Bit

COVCounter Overflow Bit

Counter Overflow Bit-

Counter Underflow Bit

CUN

Counter Underflow Bit

Counter Underflow Bit-

Counter Update Accumulator

CUA

Counter Update Accumulator--

Control Enable Bit

RENControl Enable Bit--

Control Queue Bit

REUControl Queue Bit--

Control Aynchronous Done
Bit

RDN

Control Aynchronous Done
Bit

-

-

Control Synchronous Done
BIt

REM

Control Synchronous Done
BIt

-

-

Control Error Bit

RERControl Error Bit--

Control Unload Bit

RULControl Unload Bit--

Control Running Bit

RIN

Control Running Bit--

Control Found Bit

RFDControl Found Bit--External Device Setup Manual

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

205

Chapter 2

Word Device

206

Device Name

DeviceSymbolMicroLogix/SLC500

PLC-5

ControlLogix
CompactLog
ix

SLC/MicroLogix Input (Word)
SLC/MicroLogix Output(Word)

SWI

Input (Word)

-

-

SWO

Output (Word)--

PLC-5 Input (Word)

PWI-

Input (Word)-

PLC-5 Output (Word)

PWO-

Output (Word)-

StatusS

StatusStatus-Timer (Preset Value)TP

Timer (Preset Value)

Timer (Preset Value)-

Timer (Accumulated Value)TA

Timer (Accumulated Value)

Timer (Accumulated Value)-Counter (Preset Value)

CP

Counter (Preset Value)Counter (Preset Value)-Counter (Accumulated Value)

CA

Counter (Accumulated
Value)Counter (Accumulated
Value)-

Control LEN

RLEN

Control LEN--

Control POS

RPOSControl POS--

Bit (Word)

WB

Bit (Word)

Bit (Word)-

IntegerN

Integer

Integer

INT

Float/REAL

F

Float

-

REAL

Long/DINT

L

Long

-

DINT

Ascii

A

Ascii

Ascii

-

BCD

BCD

-

BCD

-

SINT

SINT

-

-

SINT

StringST

String--External Device Setup Manual

4 Allen-Bradley

4.5.5

Logix DF1 (Full Duplex)

Word Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

INT

INT

INT

0 - 999999

R/W

10 *1

REAL

REAL

REAL

0 - 9999991

R/W

10*2

DINT

DINT

DINT

0 - 9999991

R/W

10*2

SINT

SINT

SINT

0 - 999999

R/W

10 *1

*1 Address selection rule is as follows.

2222Connection to a PLC

2
2
2
2
2

*2 Address selection rule is as follows.
WindO/I-NV2 uses 32 bit device as the divided 2 word device.
Therefore, the last one digit shows that the device is upper word or lower word.

2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual207

Chapter 2- Floating Point (F) and Long Word (L) are 32-bit devices. When you write to these devices, please be sure to write a highword and low word simultaneously. If you write only high word or only low word, 0 will be written into the other word.
- A communication error will occur if you specify a file or element that is not allocated to the MicroLogis1200, SLC 500
data table map.

208

External Device Setup Manual

4 Allen-Bradley

4.6

The way to set device address when use ControlLogix, CompactLogix series

In ControlLogix and CompactLogix series, device is set with tag name. However, you have to set with a Symbol and Address format
that is the same as MicroLogix, SLC 500 and PLC-5 because WindO/I-NV2 can not operate a tag name directly.
You have to attach each tag name to a device symbol and device address at that time.

2

This is called mapping.

4.6.1

2

The way of mapping

The following work is done in RS Logix 5000 software.
1. Define some tags to communicate with MICRO/I in “Controller Tags”
2. Select “Logic” and “Map PLC/SLC Messages…” on main menu in RS Logix 5000 software.
3. Attach File Number to each tag name in “PLC3,5/SLC Mapping” dialog box.

4.6.2

2

The way to select device address in WindO/I-NV2

The process to select device address
Data Type

Tag_A

INT

Array

2

[10]

Tag_B

SINT

[10]

Tag_C

DINT

[10]

Tag_D

REAL

[10]

*1

2
2

*1 Must define SINT type’s tag with couple of byte.

Do mapping tag to File Number.
Tag name

Data Type

Tag_A

INT

Tag_B

SINT

Tag_C
Tag_D

2
2

Define some tags in RSLogix 5000 software.
Tag name

Connection to a PLC

When select device address in WindO/I-NV2, set tag type to device symbol and set array number to File Number.

4.6.3

2

Array

File Number
-

1

[10]

-

2

DINT

[10]

-

3

REAL

[10]

-

4

Set device address in WindO/I-NV2 software.

2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual209

Chapter 2

4.6.4

Setting Example for WindO/I-NV2

Refer to the following about setting an example for WindO/I-NV2 software.
(PLC station number is 0 in the example.)*The setting example uses Allen-Bradley device address format.
Tag name

Data Tyde

Array

File Number

Tag_A

INT

-

1

Tag_B

SINT

[10]

-

2

Tag_C

DINT

[10]

-

3

Tag_D

REAL

[10]

-

4

Example1: Set an array number 0 in Tag_A.
0: INT 1:0
Example2: Set an array number 5 in Tag_B.
0: SINT 2:5
Example3: Set a lower word on array number 3 in Tag_C.
0: DINT 3:3_0
Example4: Set an upper word on array number 9 in Tag_D.
0: REAL 4:10_1
Note:
Need to set upper word or lower word in WindO/I-NV2 software when use 32 bit device.
Add “_0” after array number when use lower word.
Add “_1” after array number when use upper word.

210

External Device Setup Manual

4 Allen-Bradley

4.7

The way to set device address when use Ethernet/IP (Logix Native Tag)

When using Ethernet/IP (Logix Native Tag) as a communication driver, the device address is set using tags.
In the case of WindO/I-NV2, you can set tag names by importing a tag database file (L5K file and CSV file) created using an Allen
Bradley RSLogix 5000.

4.7.1

2

Supported data type

Ethernet/IP(Logix Native Tag) supports these data types: Also supports arrays with elements of up to three-dimensions and userdefined structure .

• BOOL*1• INT• DINT• SINT• REAL• TIMER• COUNTER• CONTROL• STRING222
Connection to a PLC

22
2*1 Does not support BOOL type arrays.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual211

Chapter 2

4.7.2

Setting prosess

Adjust the settings below in WindO/I-NV2.
1. Select “Ethernet/IP(Logix Native Tag)” under the Protocol setting in the Select Host I/F Driver dialog box.

2. In the Host I/F Network tab in the Project Settings dialog box, set the IP address, port number, slot number,and tag file to match the communicated PLC.
Use an L5K file or CSV file exported from RSLogix 5000.

- Change the port number as necessary.
- To create tag data base file (L5K), open a project as per RSLogix 5000, then select Save As on the File menu, and select"RS Logix 5000 Import/Export File(*.L5K)" as the Save as type.

212

External Device Setup Manual

4 Allen-Bradley

4.7.3

Setting Tags

Tags can be set in the following ways.

• Using the keyboard, type the tag name directly into the text box where the device address is set.
• Click the […] button on the right of the text box where the device address is set, and then select a tag from the tag list2

in the Device Address Settings dialog box.

2
Refer to online help for more details about the Device Address Settings dialog box.

4.7.4

2

Editing Tags

Tags imported using the WindO/I-NV2 can be edited using Tag Editor.
Tag Editor can add and edit tags.

2
Connection to a PLC

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Refer to online help for more details about the Tag Editor.

2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual213

Chapter 2

4.7.5

Cautions When Using Indirect Read and Indirect Write

MICRO/I is capable of specifying a device address offset for certain parts.
When using Logix Native Tag, the offset is specified according to the following rules.

• Offsets cannot be specified for tags with no arrays.
• The array number for tags with arrays changes according to the offset value.
Example:When a device address of [0,0,0] is specified for a INT type tag created with an array element of [2,3,4], if the offset value is 1, use data of [0,0,1]. When the offset value is 5, use data of [0,1,1].
Script[LDR 200] = OFFSET(tag[0,0,0],[LDR 0]);Operation description
When the value of LDR0 is 1, the value of tag[0,0,1], the device 1 words from tag[0,0,0], is read and stored in
LDR200.
tag[0,0,0]

0000

LDR0 0001

tag[0,0,1]

1234

LDR0 0005

tag[0,1,1]

1234

＋1
LDR2001234
Read

LDR200

1234

Read

＋5

• The offset value will change to match the array numbers in the structure if TIMER, COUNTER, CONTROL or userdefined structure data type array is created.
Example:When a device address of [0,0,0].EN is specified for a TIMER type tag created with an array element of [2,3,4], if
the offset value is 1, use data of [0,0,1].EN. When the offset value is 5, use data of [0,1,1].EN.
Script[LM 200] = OFFSET(tag[0,0,0].EN,[LDR 0]);Operation description
When the value of LDR0 is 1, the value of tag[0,0,1].EN, the device 1 words from tag[0,0,0].EN, is read andstored in LDR200.
tag[0,0,0].EN

0000

LDR0 0001

tag[0,0,1].EN

1

LDR0 0005

tag[0,1,1].EN

1

＋1
LM200

1
Read

LM200

1234

Read

＋5

• When a user-defined structure is created with an array, if members of the structure also have arrays, change the offset value according to the array of the member.

214

External Device Setup Manual

4 Allen-Bradley• With the MICRO/I, reference device values are specified in units of 16-bit devices. Therefore, to specify a value for

DINT, REAL, TIMER (a 32-bit device), or PRE and ACC elements in the CONTROL structure, it is necessary to double the reference device value in the PLC before specifying it.
Example 1:

If 1 is specified as the reference device value for DINT[0], the upper word for DINT[0] is used. To use DINT[1],specify a reference device value of 2.

2

Script[LM 200] = OFFSET(tag[0],[LDR 0]);Operation description
When the value of LDR0 is 2, the value of tag[1], the device 2 words from tag[0], is read and stored in LDR200.

2

tag[0]

0000

LDR0 0002＋2

LDR200

Example 2:

1234

Read

tag[1]

1234

Script[LM 200] = OFFSET(tag[0].PRE,[LDR 0]);Operation description
When the value of LDR0 is 2, the value of tag[1].PRE, the device 2 words from tag[0].PRE, is read and stored in
LDR200.
tag[0].PRE

0000

LDR0 0002＋2

1234

tag[1].PRE

2
Connection to a PLC

If 1 is specified as the reference device value for TIMER[0].PRE, the upper word for TIMER[0].PRE is used. To
use TIMER[1].PRE, specify a reference device value of 2.

LDR200

2

2
2
2

1234

Read

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual215

Chapter 2

4.7.6

Restrictions• Maximum number of characters for a tag name is 256 characters.
• Array elements can be up to 3 dimensions.
• The maximum array number is 65535.
• Up to 65535 tags can be used per Station No. in device settings.
• When tags that contain 32-bit data are specified in WindO/I-NV2, the lower 16 bits are selected. The upper 16 bits
cannot be specified directly.

• The external device cannot be monitored using the MICRO/I device monitor or MICRO/I-NV2.
• WindO/I-NV2 has been checked to work with RSLogix5000 version 13.
• O/I-Link cannot be used when using an Ethernet/IP(Logix Native Tag) connection.
• Does not support Predefined structures and Module-Defined structures except for the TIMER, COUNTER,CONTROL
structure.

• Does not support the Alias.
• If the tag database file format to import is CSV, user-defined structures cannot be imported.
• The STRING data structure DATA is SINT, but with the MICRO/I it is handled in 2 byte units.

The data type of DATA tag in STRING data structure is SINT, but MICRO/I handle device data as 2byte.(SINT data
type is 1 byte data)
When the tag database file (L5K, CSV) is imported and the file contains STRING data, or when a STRING type tag is
added with Tag Editor, even number arrays (DATA[0], DATA[2], DATA[4], ...) are displayed.

• The STRING data structure LEN stores the number of characters written when a string is written from the DATA start
address (D0).
If the address to write is not from the start, the value of String LEN is not updated.

• When writing a string from a character input, the NULL terminating character is written at the end of the string.

216

External Device Setup Manual

5 SIEMENS

5SIEMENS

5.1

Connection Table

5.1.1

Compatible PLCs

System (CPU unit)

2

Link Unit

Product Series

2

HG2G-5F, HG2G HG1F/ Touch
HG3G/4G -S/-5S 2F/ 2S/
3F/ 4F

2

WindO/I-NV2, WindO/I-NV3 Settings
Interface

Flow
Control

Host I/F DriverCommunication
Driver

S7-200
RS422/485 2-wire
None
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P219)

S7-200(PPI)

X

X

X

---

2
Connection to a PLC

CPU212, CPU214,
Not required(connects to CPU
CPU215, CPU216*1,
unit directly)
CPU221, CPU222,
CPU224, CPU224XP,
CPU226, CPU226XM*1

2

S7-300
RS232C
HardwareConnection Diagram 2(refer to P224)

S7-300 3964(R)/RK512

CPU 313*1, CPU 314,
CPU 315,
CPU 315-2DP*1
CPU 316, CPU 318

CP-340*1
CP-341*1

CPU 313-2PtP

Not required(connects to CPU
unit directly)

RS422/485 2-wire
None
Connection Diagram 4(refer to P228)

S7-MPI

CP-440,CP-441*1

RS232C
HardwareConnection Diagram 2(refer to P224)

S7-300 3964(R)/RK512

X

X

X

---

RS422/485 4-wire
None
Connection Diagram 3(refer to P226)

2
2
2

S7-400
CPU 412, CPU 414,
CPU 416,
CPU 416F-2*1,
CPU 417

X

X

X

---

2

RS422/485 4-wire
None
Connection Diagram 3(refer to P226)

2

S7-1200
CPU1211C
CPU1212C
CPU1214C

2

Not required
Ethernet(Connects to CPU unit)-

S7-1200(Ethernet)

X

X

---

X

2

*1 This PLC was used to test & verify communications.

222

External Device Setup Manual217

Chapter 2

5.2

System Configuration

This is the system configuration for the connection of SIEMENS PLCs to MICRO/I screens.

5.2.1

S7-200S7-200

MICRO/I
RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 1 (refer to P219)

Connects to Serial port of CPU unit.

5.2.2

S7-300/400(CP-340, CP-341)
CP-340/440
CP341/441

S7-300/400

MICRO/I
RS232C
Connection Diagram 2(refer to P224)

+

5.2.3

S7-300(MPI Interface)
S7-300

MICRO/I
RS485
Connection Diagram 4 (refer to P228)

5.2.4

Connection to the Ethernet port for S7-1200
MICRO/I
Touch

S7-1200
Ethernet

218

External Device Setup Manual

5 SIEMENS

5.3

5.3.1

Connection Diagram

The connector types given in the Connection Diagrams are for the unit and not the cable. For details regarding wiring, refer
to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2

Connection Diagram 1: S7-200 (RS485) to MICRO/I2
2
2
Connection to a PLC

2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P socket connector (plug type)D-sub, 9P connector plug type2
- It is also possible to connect multiple PLCs and multiple MICRO/Is on the same network.
- Please short-circuit the RDA and SDA of MICRO/I and connect to SIG-B of PLC.

2

- Please short-circuit the RDB and SDB of MICRO/I and connect to SIG-A of PLC.
- Refer to S7-200 manual for restrictions when using multi-drops.

2- When using multiple PLCs to communicate to multiple MICRO/Is, it will take extra time to establish communication
between PLCs and OIs.

2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual219

Chapter 2

D-sub, 9P socket connector (plug type)

Terminal- It is also possible to connect multiple PLCs and multiple MICRO/Is on the same network.
- Please short-circuit the RDA and SDA of MICRO/I and connect to SIG-B of PLC.
- Please short-circuit the RDB and SDB of MICRO/I and connect to SIG-A of PLC.
- Refer to S7-200 manual for restrictions when using multi-drops.
- When using multiple PLCs to communicate to multiple MICRO/Is, it will take extra time to establish communication
between PLCs and OIs.
- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" onpage 4.

D-sub, 9P socket connector (plug type)220

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

External Device Setup Manual

5 SIEMENS2222
Connection to a PLC

2

D-sub, 9P socket connector (plug type)

Terminal- It is also possible to connect multiple PLCs and multiple MICRO/Is on the same network.
- Please short-circuit the RDA and SDA of MICRO/I and connect to SIG-B of PLC.

22

- Please short-circuit the RDB and SDB of MICRO/I and connect to SIG-A of PLC.
- Refer to S7-200 manual for restrictions when using multi-drops.
- When using multiple PLCs to communicate to multiple MICRO/Is, it will take extra time to establish communication
between PLCs and OIs.
- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual221

Chapter 2

D-sub, 9P socket connector (plug type)D-sub, 25P connector socket type

- It is also possible to connect multiple PLCs and multiple MICRO/Is on the same network.
- Please short-circuit the RDA and SDA of MICRO/I and connect to SIG-B of PLC.
- Please short-circuit the RDB and SDB of MICRO/I and connect to SIG-A of PLC.
- Refer to S7-200 manual for restrictions when using multi-drops.
- When using multiple PLCs to communicate to multiple MICRO/Is, it will take extra time to establish communication
between PLCs and OIs.

222

External Device Setup Manual

5 SIEMENS2222
D-sub, 37P connector plug type

- It is also possible to connect multiple PLCs and multiple MICRO/Is on the same network.
- Please short-circuit the RDA and SDA of MICRO/I and connect to SIG-B of PLC.
- Please short-circuit the RDB and SDB of MICRO/I and connect to SIG-A of PLC.
- Refer to S7-200 manual for restrictions when using multi-drops.
- When using multiple PLCs to communicate to multiple MICRO/Is, it will take extra time to establish communication
between PLCs and OIs.
- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

Connection to a PLC

D-sub, 9P socket connector (plug type)

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual223

Chapter 2

5.3.2

224

Connection Diagram 2: S7-300/S7-400 + Communication Interface (RS232C) to MICRO/I

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector socket type

Terminal

External Device Setup Manual

5 SIEMENS2222
D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

External Device Setup Manual225

Chapter 2

5.3.3

Connection Diagram 3: S7-300/S7-400 + Communication Interface (RS422/485) to MICRO/I

Mini Din 8P socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug type

Mini Din 8P socket type

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor,
use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page
4.

Mini Din 8P socket type226

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

External Device Setup Manual

5 SIEMENS2
2
2Mini Din 8P socket type

Terminal

Connection to a PLC

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Mini Din 8P socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type22
2
2
Mini Din 8P socket typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type2

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

External Device Setup Manual227

Chapter 2

5.3.4

Connection Diagram 4: S7-300 MPI Interface (RS485) to MICRO/I

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector socket type

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor,
use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page
4.

228

External Device Setup Manual

5 SIEMENS

2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Terminal

2

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual229

Chapter 2

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

230

External Device Setup Manual

5 SIEMENS

5.4

Environment Settings

5.4.1

S7-200The communication port settings for S7-200 and MICRO/I host port are as follows.
Items
PLC Address2

Details
1 to 126(Dec) (0 to 7e (Hex))2

Set the value to same value as ADDRESS (PLC) in WindO/I-NV2.
1 to 126(Dec) (0 to 7e(Hex))
Set the value to same value as HSA in WindO/I-NV2.

Baud Rate (bps)9600 or 19200
Set the value to same value as Baud Rate in WindO/I-NV2.

HG Address

0 to 7e (Hex) (0 to 126(Dec))
Set the value as ADDRESS (HG) in WindO/I-NV2.

Data Bits

8 (fixed)
Set the value in WindO/I-NV2.

ParityEVEN (fixed)
Set the value in WindO/I-NV2.

Stop Bits

1 (fixed)
Set the value in WindO/I-NV2.

22Connection to a PLC

Highest Address (Highest Station
Address)2
2
2- Set the communication port that communicates with MICRO/I to PPI/Slave mode. Please make sure to set SMB30 or
SMB130 values to 0 in order to select proper communication port settings. Refer to the manual of S7-200 for details.

2- We checked the following problems in some versions of S7-200.
When S7-200 is set as the master and the address of S7-200 is the same as HSA, token path does not work correctly.
This problem can be solved by setting HSA as a larger value than Address actually used.
This problem does not occur when one MICRO/I is connected to one S7-200 PLC.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual231Chapter 2

5.4.2

S7-300/400 with Communication Module

The communication port settings for S7-300 and MICRO/I host port are as follows.
Items

Details

Interface
Baud Rate (bps)

Use the same settings as for the
MICRO/I.

RS232C
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400

Data Bits

8 (Fixed)

ParityEven, Odd or None

Stop Bits

1 or 2

BCC

Enable or Disable

Priority

Low- MICRO/I type performs communication based on 3964 (R) and RK512 protocol.
- CP340 is supporting only the 3964 and 3964R protocol. Therefore when using CP340, it is necessary to construct the program to realize RK512 protocol in PLC. This is programmed using the function blocks FB2 and FB3, in SIEMENS PLC.
- CP341 is supporting 3964 (R) and RK512 protocol, please choose RK512 by setup PLC.
- The program of CP340 refers to a sample program.
The sample program is recorded on CD-ROM after Wind O/I NV2 Ver2.50.
Please refer to the following folder.
(Wind O/I NV2 CD-ROM) /Sample/Host_if/SIEMENS/ Downloading from our Web site is possible.

5.4.3

S7- 300 with MPI Interface

The communication port settings for S7-300 and MICRO/I host port are as follows.
Items
Interface

Details
Use the same settings as for the MICRO/I.

19200 or 187500

Data Bits

8 (Fixed)

ParityEven (Fixed)

Stop Bits

1 (Fixed)

HG Node Address

It should not be duplicated to other node addresses

1 - 126 (The default value is 1)

PLC Node Address

Use the same settings as for the MICRO/I.

1 - 126 (The default value is 2)

Maximum MPI Address

232

RS422/485 2-wire

Baud Rate (bps)1 - 126 (The default value is 31)

External Device Setup Manual

5 SIEMENS

5.4.4

Connecting with the S7-1200 via Ethernet

1. MICRO/I settings - Project Settings dialog box
Item
Communication Interface tab

Host I/F Network tab

Setting
IP Address

Set the IP address of MICRO/I.

Subnet mask

Set the subnet mask of MICRO/I.

Default Gateway

Set the default gateway of MICRO/I.

IP Address

Set the IP address of PLC.

Port Number

Set the port number of PLC to communicate with MICRO/I.

22
2
2
Connection to a PLC

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual233

Chapter 2

2. PLC Settings
Item
Network parameter

Operation Setting

setting

notes

Network type

Ethernet*1

Starting I/O No.

0020

*2

Network No.

1*2

Total stations--

Group No.

0

*2

Station No.

1

*2

Mode

On line*1

Communication data code

Binary code

*1

Initial Timing

Always wait for OPEN

*1

Input format

Decimal*2

IP address

Set IP address of PLC*2

Send frame setting

Ethernet*1

Enable Write at RUN time

Check mark (enable)*1

TCP Existence confirmation setting

Use the Keep Alive*1

ProtocolTCP/IP*1

Open system

Impassive open

*1

Fixed buffer

Send

*1

Fixed buffer communication

Procedure exist*1

Pairing open

No pairs*1

Existence confirmation

No confirm*1

Local station Port No.

Set an arbitrary port number*2 *3

IP Address

Open Setting

Destination IP address--

Dest. Port No.

--*1 The setting of the above-mentioned is recommended.
*2 Set it according to the environment.
*3 MICRO/I is set by the decimal number though PLC is set by the hexadecimal number.

Refer to the Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User’s Manual or Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module
User’s Manual for detail.

234

External Device Setup Manual

5 SIEMENS

5.5
5.5.1

Usable Devices
S7-200

Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Variable memoryVV

0 - 102397

R/W

*1

Process-image-input-registerII

0 - 157

R*1

Process-image-output-registerQQ

0 - 157

R/W*1

Bit memoryMM

0 - 317

R/W*1

Special MemorySMSM

0 - 5497

R*1

Timer (Bit)TT

0 - 255

R

Dec

Counter (Bit)CC

0 - 255

R

Dec

Sequential control relay

SS

0 - 317

R/W

*1

2
2

2
Connection to a PLC*1 The 1st figure is written with the number of octal number, and the 2nd [or more] figure is written with the number of decimal.

2

2
2
2

The devices (V, I, Q, M, SM, S) which include a period in the address in S7-200 are written without a period in MICRO/I.
For example, V10.1 is written as V101 in MICRO/I.
AC (Accumulator registers), L (Local memory) of PLC Devices can not use in MICRO/I.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual235

Chapter 2

Word Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Variable memory

VW

VW

0 - 10238

R/W*1

Timer (Current Value)TWT

0 - 255

R/W

Dec

Counter (Current Value)

CWC

0 - 255

R/W

Dec

Process-image-input-registerIWIW

0 - 14R*1

Process-image-output-register

QW

QW

0 - 14

R/W*1

Bit memoryMWMW

0 - 30R/W*1Special Memory

SMW

SMW

0 - 548R*1

Analog input

AIW

AIW

0 - 62

R*1

Analog output

AQW

AQW

0 - 62

R/W*1

Sequential control relay

SWSW

0 - 30R/W*1High speed counterHCHC

0 - 51R*2*1 Only even number can be specified.
*2 The 1st figure is written with the number of binary number,and the 2nd [or more] figure is written with the number of decimal.

- The devices (V, I, Q, M, SM, S) which include a period in the address in S7-200 are written without a period in MICRO/I.
For example, V10.1 is written as V101 in MICRO/I.
AC (Accumulator registers), L (Local memory) of PLC Devices can not use in MICRO/I.
- The value of High speed counter which is a double word value is divided into two, and is treated as WORD device in
MICRO/I.
The higher word is written by adding 0 to the lowest digit of the address, the lower word is written by adding 1 to thelowest digit of the address.
For example, the lower word of HC1 is written as HC11 in MICRO/I.
If you read in a double word value, The lowest digit of the address write 0. For example, HC2 is written as HC20 in
MICRO/I.

236

External Device Setup Manual

5 SIEMENS

5.5.2

S7- 300/400 with Communication Module

When using CP-341/441, following devices can be read and written.
When using CP-340440, only a data block (DB) can be read and written.

2

Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Input (Bit)II

0 - 1277

R*1

Output (Bit)Q

Q

0 - 1277

R*1

Memory (Bit)MM

0 - 2557

R

*1

2
2

*1 The 1st figure is written in octal number format, and the 2nd [or more] figure is written in decimal number format.

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Input (Word)IWIW

0 - 126

R*1

Output (Word)

QW

QW

0 - 126

R*1

Bit Memory (Word)

MWMW

0 - 254R*1

Timer cellTT

0 - 127

R

Dec

Counter cellCC

0 - 63R

Dec

Data Block

DB

DB

1000 - 255510

R/W

*1*2

Connection to a PLC

Word Device
Device Name

2

2
2
2
2
2

*1 Only an even number can be specified.
*2 Please specify in the following ranges.

22- When a non activated data block is accessed in the PLC, a communication error will occur. Please be sure to activate relevant data blocks in the PLC.

2

- Endians differ in S7-300, and MICRO/I type. Please use neither bit specification of a WORD device, nor 32-bit WORD
(double WORD).

222

External Device Setup Manual237

Chapter 2

5.5.3

S7- 300 with MPI Interface

Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Input (Bit)II

0 - 10237

R*1

Output (Bit)Q

Q

0 - 10237

R/W*1

Memory (Bit)MM

0 - 163837

R/W

*1

*1 The 1st figure is written in octal number format, and the 2nd [or more] figure is written in decimal number format.

Word Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Input (Word)IWIW

0 - 1022

R*1

Output (Word)

QW

QW

0 - 1022

R/W*1

Bit Memory (Word)

MWMW

0 - 16382

R/W*1

Timer cellTT

0 - 2047

R

Dec

Counter cellCC

0 - 2047

R

Dec

Data Block

DB

DB

1000 - 255510

R/W

*1*2

*1 Only an even number can be specified.
*2 Please specify in the following ranges.

DB 255 510
3 Address 0 - 510
3 DB No. 1 - 255- When a non activated data block is accessed in the PLC, a communication error will occur. Please be sure to activate relevant data blocks in the PLC.
- Endians differ in S7-300, and MICRO/I type. Please use neither bit specification of a WORD device, nor 32-bit WORD
(double WORD).

238

External Device Setup Manual

5 SIEMENS

5.5.4

S7- 1200

Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Input (Bit)II

0 - 10237

R/W*1

Output (Bit)Q

Q

0 - 10237

R/W*1

Internal Relay (Bit)MM

0 - 40957

R/W

*1

2
2

*1 The 1st figure is written in octal number format, and the 2nd [or more] figure is written in decimal number format.

Word Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

2

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Input (Word)IWI

0 - 1022

R/W*1

Output (Word)

QW

Q

0 - 1022

R/W*1

Internal Relay (Word)MWM

0 - 4094

R/W*1

Data Block

DB

DB

10000 - 999998

R/W

*1*2

*1 Only an even number can be specified.
*2 The upper 2 digits are the DB number, the lower 4 digits are the address.

2
Connection to a PLC

Address Range

2
2
2
2

- When the data blocks are not configured on the PLC side , a communication error occurs. Always configure the data
blocks on the PLC.

2

- When create a new Data Block, "Standard" must be selected as "Block access".
- "Data Type" in Data Block must be "Word".

2- Only Global Data Block can be accessed.

2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual239

Chapter 2

6

Keyence

6.1

Connection Table

6.1.1

Compatible PLCs

System (CPU unit)

Link unit

WindO/I-NV2, WindO/I-NV3 Settings
Interface

Flow
Control

Host I/F DriverCommunication
DriverProduct Series
HG2G-5F, HG2G HG1F/ Touch
HG3G/4G -S/-5S 2F/ 2S/
3F/ 4F

KV-700,1000*1,3000,5000*1
KV-700*1,
KV-1000*1,
KV-3000

Not required(connects to CPU unit)

RS232C
Hardware/ KV-3000/5000
Connection Diagram 1 None
(refer to P244)

X

X

X

---

KV-700*1,
KV-1000*1,
KV-3000,
KV-5000*1,
KV-5500

KV-L20R*1,
KV-L20V,
KV-L21V

RS232C(PORT1)
Connection Diagram 2(refer to P246)

KV (Ethernet)

X

X

X

X

RS232C(PORT2)
Connection Diagram 3(refer to P248)
RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 4(refer to P250)
RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 5(refer to P253)
KV-LE20A,
KV-LE20V,
KV-LE21V

KV-5000*1,
KV-5500

Ethernet-

Not required(connects to Ethernet port)

Conventional KV
KV-10, 16, 20, 40
KV-80*1

Not required(connects to CPU unit)

RS232C
None
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P244)

KV/KZ

---

X

X

---

Not required(connects to CPU unit)

RS232C
None
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P244)

KV/KZ

---

X

X

---

Not required(connects to CPU unit)

RS232C
None
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P244)

KV-3000/5000

X

X

X

---

KV-N10L

RS232C
Connection Diagram 2(refer to P246)

KV-N11L

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 6(refer to P256)

Visual KV*2
KV-10*1
KV-16, 24, 40
KV NanoKV-N14
KV-N24
KV-N40
KV-N60*1 This PLC was used to test & verify communications.
*2 MICRO/I does not support all device addresses of the Visual KV series.

240

External Device Setup Manual

6 Keyence

6.2

System Configuration

This is the system configuration for the connection of Keyence PLCs to the MICRO/I.

6.2.1

Connection to the CPU unit modular connector for KV-700/1000/3000
KV-700/1000/3000

2
MICRO/I

2

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1 (refer to P244)

2
6.2.2

Connection to the D-sub, 9P connector plug type for KV-L20R/KV-L20V/KV-L21V(PORT1)

MICRO/I
RS232C
Connection Diagram 2 (refer to P246)

Connection to a PLC

KV-700/1000/3000/5000/5500+ KV-L20R/KV-L20V/KV-L21V

2
2
2
2

6.2.3

2

Connection to the terminal block for KV-L20R/KV-L20V/KV-L21V

KV-700/1000/3000/5000/5500+ KV-L20R/KV-L20V/KV-L21V

RS232C
Connection Diagram 3 (refer to P248)(PORT2)

MICRO/I2
2

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 4 (refer to P250)
RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 5 (refer to P253)

2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual241

Chapter 2

6.2.4

Connection to the Ethernet port for KV-LE20A/KV-LE20V/KV-LE21V

KV-700/1000/3000/5000/5500+ KV-LE20A/KV-LE20V/KV-LE21V

MICRO/I
Touch
Ethernet (TCP/IP)- Use a crossover cable to connect the MICRO/I and PLC directly.
- When using a hub (Ethernet switch), use a cable that can be used with the hub.

6.2.5

Connection to the Ethernet port for KV-5000/5500
KV-5000/5500

MICRO/I
Touch
Ethernet (TCP/IP)- Use a crossover cable to connect the MICRO/I and PLC directly.
- When using a hub (Ethernet switch), use a cable that can be used with the hub.

6.2.6

Connection to the CPU unit modular connector for Conventional KV series andVisual KV series

Conventional KV series KV-10,16, 24, 40
Visual KV series KV-10, 16, 20, 40, 80

MICRO/I
RS232C
Connection Diagram 1 (refer to P244)

242

External Device Setup Manual

6 Keyence

6.2.7

Connection to the CPU unit modular connector for KV Nano
KV NanoMICRO/I

2

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1 (refer to P244)

2
6.2.8

2

Connection to KV Nano + KV-N10L/KV-N11L

KV Nano + KV-N10L

MICRO/I

Connection to a PLC

RS232C
Connection Diagram 2 (refer to P246)

2
2
2

KV Nano + KV-N11L

MICRO/I
RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 6 (refer to P256)

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual243

Chapter 2

6.3

Connection Diagram

The connector types given in the Connection Diagrams are for the unit and not the cable. For details regarding wiring, refer
to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

6.3.1

244

Connection Diagram 1: KV-700/1000/3000, Conventional KV, Visual KV and KV Nano to
MICRO/I

Modular connector

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Modular connector

Terminal

External Device Setup Manual

6 Keyence222Modular connector

D-sub, 9P connector socket type2
Connection to a PLC

2
2
2
2
2

Modular connector

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2

Modular connector

D-sub, 37P connector plug type2

External Device Setup Manual245

Chapter 2

Connector Pin Layout for PLC side Modular jack

6.3.2

246

Connection Diagram 2: KV-700/1000/3000/5000/5500 + KV-L20R/KV-L20V/KV-L21V (PORT1)
to MICRO/IKV Nano + KV-N10L to MICRO/I

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector plug type

Terminal

External Device Setup Manual

6 Keyence2222D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

External Device Setup Manual247

Chapter 2

6.3.3

248

Connection Diagram 3: KV-700/1000/3000/5000/5500 + KV-L20R/KV-L20V/KV-L21V(PORT2-RS232C) to MICRO/I

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Screw terminal block

Terminal

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

External Device Setup Manual

6 Keyence2222D-sub, 25P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

Screw terminal block

2
2
2
2
2

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual249

Chapter 2

6.3.4

Connection Diagram 4: KV-700/1000/3000/5000/5500 + KV-L20R/KV-L20V/KV-L21V(PORT2 RS422/485 4-wire) to MICRO/I

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Screw terminal block

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor,
use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page4.

250

External Device Setup Manual

6 Keyence

2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

Screw terminal block

2
2
2
2
2

Screw terminal block

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual251Chapter 2

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

252

External Device Setup Manual

6 Keyence

6.3.5

Connection Diagram 5: KV-700/1000/3000/5000/5500 + KV-L20R/KV-L20V/KV-L21V(PORT2 RS485 2-wire) to MICRO/I22
2
2
D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Connection to a PLC

Screw terminal block

2
2
2
2
2

Screw terminal block

Terminal

2- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" onpage 4.

2- HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G Series uses only RDA and RDB when using RS422/485 2-wire, you don’t need to connect SDA or
SDB.
If connecting COM1 on the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G to the external device, do not insert terminating resistor to the external
device. If terminating resistor can not be removed, use COM2 on the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G instead of COM1.

2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual253

Chapter 2

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Screw terminal block

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

254

External Device Setup Manual

6 Keyence2222Connection to a PLC

2Screw terminal block

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual255

Chapter 2

6.3.6

Connection Diagram 6: KV Nano + KV-N11L to MICRO/I

2
1
4
3
5
Screw terminal block

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

2
1
4
3
5
Screw terminal block

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor,
use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page4.

256

External Device Setup Manual

6 Keyence

2
2
1
4
3
5

2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

Screw terminal block

2
2
2
2

2
1
4
3
5
Screw terminal block2
Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual257

Chapter 2

2
1
4
3
5

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

2
1
4
3
5

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

258

External Device Setup Manual

6 Keyence

6.4

Environment Settings

6.4.1

KV-700/1000, Conventional KV series, Visual KV series

Item

Setting

Interface

RS232C

Data Bits

8

Baud Rate (bps)

9600

ParityEven

Stop Bits

1- Communication parameters are fixed. Please select above-mentioned settings for proper communication.

the Host I/F Driver tab in the Project Settings dialog box.

22

KV-1000/3000

Item

2

2

- When performing communication with the CPU unit for KV-700, check the Connect CPU Unit (Enable)/ Link Unit (Disable) check box on

6.4.2

2

Connection to a PLC- Refer to the PLC manual for details.

2

Setting

Interface

RS232C

Data Bits

8

Baud Rate (bps)

9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200

ParityEven

Stop Bits

1- See the operation manual of PLC for more information.
- When setting the baud rate to less than 4800 bps, communications was executed at a baud rate of 9600 bps.

2
2
2
2
2

- When performing communication with he CPU unit for KV-1000/3000, check the Connect CPU Unit (Enable)/ Link Unit (Disable) checkbox on the Host I/F Driver tab in the Project Settings dialog box.

2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual259

Chapter 2

6.4.3

KV-700/1000/3000/5000/5500 + KV-L20R/KV-L20V/KV-L21V, KV Nano, KV Nano+KV-N10L/
KV-N11L

Item

Setting

Interface

RS232C, RS422/485 2-wire, RS422/485 4-wire

Baud Rate (bps)

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200

Data Bits

8

ParityEven

Stop Bits

1- See the operation manual of the PLC for more information.
- When performing communication with a Serial Communication Unit or the KV Nano, clear the Connect CPU Unit (Enable)/ Link Unit
(Disable) check box on the Host I/F Driver tab in the Project Settings dialog box.

- When communicating with the KV Nano, set the KV Nano port operation mode to KV mode (PLC link).

6.4.4

Environment settings for connection to the KV-5000/5500, KV-LE20A/KV-LE20V/KV-LE21V

1. MICRO/I settings
Item

Setting

IP Address

Set the IP address of MICRO/I.

Subnet mask

Set the subnet mask of MICRO/I.

Default Gateway

Set the default gateway of MICRO/I.

Item

Setting

IP Address

Set the IP address of PLC.

PORT

Set the port number of PLC to communicate with MICRO/I.

ProtocolTCP/IP, UDP/IP

2. PLC Settings
Item

Setting

IP Address

Set the IP address to PLC.

PORT

Set the arbitrary port number.

Refer to the PLC manual for details.

260

External Device Setup Manual

6 Keyence

6.5
6.5.1

Usable Devices
KV700/1000/3000/5000/5500/KV Nano(RS233C, RS422/485)

Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WritePLC

CPU Input Relay

X

X

0 - 999FR

CPU Output RelayYY

0 - 999F

R/W

Spec. Internal RelayM

M

0 - 15999

R/W

Exp. /Spec. Internal Relay

RR

0 - 99915

R/W

Link Relay

B

B

0 - 3FFF

R/W

Exp Int. Relay

MR

MR

0 - 99915

R/W

Latch RelayLRLR

0 - 99915

R/W

Control Relay

CRCR

0 - 3915

R/W

Work Relay

VB

VB

0 - 3FFF

R/W

Timer (Relay)TT

0 - 3999

R/W

Counter (Relay)CC

0 - 3999

R/W

High-speed counter comparator(Relay)

CTC

CTC

0-3

R/W

Only a reset action is possible for a High-speed counter comparator (Relay).

2222Connection to a PLC

MICRO/I

Address
Gradual

2
2
2
2
2
2

Please do not perform a set operation, as a communication error will occur.

2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual261

Chapter 2

Word Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteMICRO/I

PLC

Data MemoryDMDM

0 - 65534

R/W

Exp Data Memory E

EMEM

0 - 65534

R/W

Exp Data Memory FFMFM

0 - 32767

R/W

File register

ZF

ZF

0 - 131071

R/W

Link RegisterWW

0 - 3FFF

R/W

Temporary MemoryTMTM

0 - 511R/W

Timer (Preset)TCTC

0 - 39991

R/W*1

Timer (Current)TSTS

0 - 39991

R/W*1

Counter (Preset)CCCC

0 - 39991

R/W*1

Counter (Current)CSCS

0 - 39991

R/W*1

High-speed counter (Current)

CTH

CTH

0 - 11R/W*1High-speed counter comparator (Preset)

CTCS

CTCS

0 - 31R/W*1Digital TrimmerATAT

0 - 71R

Index RegisterZZ

1 - 12

R/W

Control MemoryCMCM

0 - 11998

R/W

Work Memory

VM

VM

0 - 59999

R/W*1 These devices are 32-bit devices.

262

Address Gradual

External Device Setup Manual

6 Keyence

6.5.2

KV3000/5000/5500 (Ethernet)

Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteMICRO/I

PLC

CPU Input Relay

X

X

0 - 999FR

CPU Output RelayYY

0 - 999F

R/W

Spec. Internal RelayM

M

0 - 15999

R/W

Exp. /Spec. Internal Relay

RR

0 - 99915

R/W

Link Relay

B

B

0 - 3FFF

R/W

Exp Int. Relay

MR

MR

0 - 99915

R/W

LR

LR

0 - 99915

R/W

Control Relay

CRCR

0 - 3915

R/W

Work Relay

VB

VB

0 - 3FFF

R/W

Timer (Relay)TT

0 - 3999

R/W

Counter (Relay)CC

0 - 3999

R/W

High-speed counter comparator (Relay)

CTC

CTC

0-3

R/W

Only a reset action is possible for a High-speed counter comparator (Relay).

Please do not perform a set operation, as a communication error will occur.

2222Connection to a PLC

Latch Relay

Address Gradual

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual263

Chapter 2

Word Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteMICRO/I

PLC

Data MemoryDMDM

0 - 65534

R/W

Exp Data Memory E

EMEM

0 - 65534

R/W

Exp Data Memory FFMFM

0 - 32767

R/W

File register

ZF

ZF

0 - 131071

R/W

Link RegisterWW

0 - 3FFF

R/W

Temporary MemoryTMTM

0 - 511R/W

Timer (Preset)TCTC

0 - 39991

R/W*1

Timer (Current)TSTS

0 - 39991

R/W*1

Counter (Preset)CCCC

0 - 39991

R/W*1

Counter (Current)CSCS

0 - 39991

R/W*1

High-speed counter (Current)

CTH

CTH

0 - 11R/W*1High-speed counter comparator (Preset)

CTCS

CTCS

0 - 31R/W*1Digital TrimmerATAT

0 - 71R

Index RegisterZZ

1 - 12

R/W

Control MemoryCMCM

0 - 11998

R/W

Work Memory

VM

VM

0 - 59999

R/W*1 These devices are 32-bit devices.

264

Address Gradual

External Device Setup Manual

6 Keyence

6.5.3

Conventional KV series and Visual KV series

Bit Device
Device Name

Internal Utility Relay

Device Symbol
MICRO/I

PLC

M-

Address Range

1000 - 1915,

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

R/W

10
10

2

3000 - 15915
Basic Input Relay

X-

0 - 215

R

Basic Output Relay

Y-

500 - 615

R/W

10

Extension Input Relay

SX-

100 - 415

R

10

Extension Output Relay

SY-

600 - 915

R/W

10

Timer (Contact)TT

0 - 249

R

10

C

C

0 - 249

R

10

Special Internal Relay

SM-

2000 - 2915

R/W

10

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
GradualWord Device
Device Symbol
MICRO/I

PLC

Data MemoryDDM

0 - 9999

R/W

10

Temporary MemoryTMTM

0 - 31R/W

10Timer (Current)TCT

0 - 249

R/W

10Counter (Current)CCC

0 - 249

R/W

10

Timer (Preset)TST

0 - 249

R/W

10Counter (Preset)CSC

0 - 249

R/W

10

2
2
Connection to a PLC

Counter (Contact)

Device Name

2

2
2
2
2
2
2

- Basic Input Relay (X) addresses 100 and higher, as well as Basic Output Relay (Y) addresses 600 and higher, are only
available when using the Conventional KV series KV-40/80 models.

2- MICRO/I does not support all device addresses of the Visual KV series.

2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual265Chapter 2

7

SHARP

7.1

Connection Table

7.1.1

Compatible PLCs

System(CPU unit)

Link unit

WindO/I-NV2 Settings
Interface

Product Series

Flow Control

Host I/F Driver HG2G-5F, HG2G HG1F/
HG3G/4G -S/-5S 2F/ 2S/
3F/ 4F

Hardware

JW

Touch

New Satellite JW
JW-10

Not required(connects to CPU unit)

RS422-MMI Port
Connection Diagram 6(refer to P282)
RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 7(refer to P285)

JW-21CU,
JW-22CU,
JW-31CUH/H1,
JW-32CUH/H1,
JW-33CUH/H1*1/
H2/H3

JW-21CM

JW-50CU/CUH,
JW-70CU/CUH,
JW-100CU/CUH

JW-10CM

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P272)

JW-22CU,
JW-70CU/CUH,
JW-100CU/CUH

Not required(connects to CPU unit)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 3(refer to P275)

JW-32CUH/H1,
JW-33CUH/H1*1/
H2/H3

RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 1(refer to P269)
RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P272)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 4(refer to P277)
RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 5(refer to P279)*1 This PLC was used to test & verify communications.

266

External Device Setup Manual

---

X

X

---

7 SHARP

7.2

System Configuration

This is the system configuration for the connection of SHARP PLCs to the MICRO/I.

7.2.1

JW20/30 Series (using link module)
JW-21CM

2
RS485 2-wireConnection Diagram 1(refer to P269)

MICRO/I

2
2

RS485 4-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P272)

2

JW-21CU, JW-22CU
JW-31CUH/H1

2

JW-33CUH/H1/H2/H3

7.2.2

Connection to a PLC

JW-32CUH/H1

JW50/70/100 Series (using link module)2

JW-10CM
RS485 4-wireConnection Diagram 2

MICRO/I(refer to P272)

2
2

JW-50CU/CUH

2

JW-70CU/CUH
JW-100CU/CUH

7.2.3

2

JW50/70/100 Series (using communication port)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 3 (refer to P275)

MICRO/I2
2

JW-22CU

2

JW-70CU/CUH
JW-100CU/CUH

2Connect to the communication port of CPU unit.

2

External Device Setup Manual267

Chapter 2

7.2.4

JW30 Series (using communication port)
MICRO/I
RS232C
Connection Diagram 4 (refer to P277)

JW-32CUH/H1
JW-33CUH/H1/H2/H3Connect to the communication port2 of CPU unit.

7.2.5

JW30 Series (using communication port)
MICRO/I
RS485
Connection Diagram 5 (refer to P279)

JW-32CUH/H1
JW-33CUH/H1/H2/H3Connect to the communication port1 or the communication port2 of CPU unit.

7.2.6

JW10 Series
RS422 MMI
Connection Diagram 6 (refer to P282)

RS485 2-wireConnection Diagram 7 (refer to P285)
JW-10

Connect to MMI port or communication port on CPU unit.

268

External Device Setup Manual

MICRO/I

7 SHARP

7.3

7.3.1

Connection Diagram

The connector types given in the Connection Diagrams are for the unit and not the cable. For details regarding wiring, refer
to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2

Connection Diagram 1: RS485 2-wire Link Unit to MICRO/I2
2
2
Connection to a PLC

2
2

Screw terminal block

Terminal

2- We recommend that you switch on the termination resistor on the PLC Link Unit side for long-distance transmission connection cable is available.

2- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2
2
2
2
2

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

External Device Setup Manual2269

Chapter 2

Screw terminal block

Terminal- We recommend that you switch on the termination resistor on the PLC Link Unit side for long-distance transmission connection cable is available.
- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG1F, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control to NONE.

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

We recommend that you switch on the termination resistor on the PLC Link Unit side for long-distance transmission connection cable is available.

270

External Device Setup Manual

7 SHARP2222

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

- We recommend that you switch on the termination resistor on the PLC Link Unit side for long-distance transmission
connection cable is available.
- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

Connection to a PLC

Screw terminal block

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual271

Chapter 2

7.3.2

Connection Diagram 2: RS485 4-wire Link Unit to MICRO/I

Screw terminal block

Terminal- We recommend that you switch on the termination resistor on the PLC Link Unit side for long-distance transmission connection cable is available.
- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

Screw terminal block272

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

External Device Setup Manual

7 SHARP

2
2
2
Screw terminal block

Terminal- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG1F, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control to NONE.

Connection to a PLC- We recommend that you switch on the termination resistor on the PLC Link Unit side for long-distance transmission connection cable is available.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

We recommend that you switch on the termination resistor on the PLC Link Unit side for long-distance transmission connection cable is available.

External Device Setup Manual

2
2

273

Chapter 2

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

- We recommend that you switch on the termination resistor on the PLC Link Unit side for long-distance transmission connection cable is available.
- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

274

External Device Setup Manual

7 SHARP

7.3.3

Connection Diagram 3: PLC (RS232C) Communication Port to MICRO/I22
22
Connection to a PLC

2

D-sub, 15P connector socket type

Terminal

2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 15P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual275

Chapter 2

276

D-sub, 15P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 15P connector socket typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

External Device Setup Manual

7 SHARP

7.3.4

Connection Diagram 4: PLC (RS232C) Communication Port to MICRO/I

2
2
2
2
Terminal

Connection to a PLC

D-sub, 15P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 15P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 15P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type

External Device Setup Manual277

Chapter 2

D-sub, 15P connector socket type278

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

External Device Setup Manual

7 SHARP

7.3.5

Connection Diagram 5: PLC (RS485) Communication Port to MICRO/I

2
2
2
2
Terminal

Connection to a PLC

D-sub, 25P connector socket type2

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG2G-S/-5S, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control to NONE
because the HG2G-S/-5S doesn’t have control lines.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket type22External Device Setup Manual279

Chapter 2

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG1F, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control to NONE.

D-sub, 25P connector socket type280

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

External Device Setup Manual

7 SHARP2222

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

Connection to a PLC

D-sub, 25P connector socket type2
2

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual281

Chapter 2

7.3.6

Connection Diagram 6: JW-10 MMI Port (RS422) to MICRO/I

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG2G-S/-5S, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control to NONE
because the HG2G-S/-5S doesn’t have control lines.

D-sub, 9P connector socket type282

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

External Device Setup Manual

7 SHARP22
2
2
Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

Connection to a PLC

D-sub, 9P connector socket type2
2
2

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG1F, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control to NONE.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type2

External Device Setup Manual283

Chapter 2

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

284

External Device Setup Manual

7 SHARP

7.3.7

Connection Diagram 7: JW-10 Communication Port (RS485) to MICRO/I

2
2
2
Terminal

Terminal

Connection to a PLC

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG2G-S/-5S, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control to NONE.

22
2- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2
2
2
2
2

Terminal

D-sub, 9P connector socket type222External Device Setup Manual285

Chapter 2

Terminal

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG1F, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control to NONE.

Terminal

286

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

External Device Setup Manual

7 SHARP2222
Connection to a PLC

2Terminal

D-sub, 37P connector plug type2

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual287

Chapter 2

7.4

Environment Settings

7.4.1

Using Computer Link Module

Item

Setting

Interface

RS485 2-wire (Set DIP switch SW3-2 to OFF)
RS485 4-wire (Set DIP switch SW3-2 to ON)

Communication Mode

Computer Link (Command mode) (Set DIP switch SW0 to”4”)

Station No.

01 to 17(oct) (Set DIP switch SW1 / SW2)

Data Bits

Set to the same setting as the
MICRO/I

7 (fixed)

Baud Rate [bps]1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200 (Set DIP switch SW4)

ParityEven or Odd (Set DIP switch SW3-4)

Stop Bits

2 (fixed)

7.4.2

Using Communication Port

Item

Setting

Interface

RS232C, RS422/485

Station No.
Data Bits
Baud Rate [bps]Set to the same setting as the
MICRO/I

001 to 037(oct) (Set System Memory #235/#237)
7 (fixed)
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200(Set the bit position D2D1D0 System Memory of #234/#236)

ParityEven, Odd or None (Set the bit position D4D3 of System Memory #234/#236)

Stop Bits

1 or 2 (Set the bit position D5 of System Memory #234/#236)- Set System Memory #234 for communication conditions of PLC (JW30 Communication port1: RS422), and set System
Memory #235 for Station No.
- Set System Memory #236 for communication conditions of PLC (JW20/70/100 Communication port, JW30
Communication port2: RS232C, RS422), and set System Memory #237 for Station No.
- Confirm the PLC manuals as the speed of Baud Rate may not use according to PLC.
- When connecting with the communication port of a CPU unit and making it communicate, after receiving a response from
PLC depending on the model of PLC, while MICRO/I transmit data, some which need waiting time are. In this time,please adjust Configuration - System Setup - Project - Host I/F Driver - transmission wait of WindO/I-NV2.
Confirm the manual. (chapter of a communication port) of PLC about whether a transmitting wait setup need to be
adjusted.
- Refer to “New Satellite JW manual “or “New Satellite JW Link Unit manual” for details.

288

External Device Setup Manual

7 SHARP

7.5

Usable Devices

The types of devices handles by the MICRO/I and their ranges are shown below.
Bit Device
WindO/I-NV2 Device
Name

R/W

WindO/I-NV2 address

PLC Device Name

Relay

R/W

R0 - R15777

Relay

Ext. Relay

R/W

ER20000 - ER75777

Timer (Contact)

R

T0 - T777

Ext. Timer (Contact)

R

ET1000 - ET1777

Counter (Contact)

R

C0 - C777

Ext. Counter (Contact)

R

EC1000 - EC1777

PLC address
00000 - 15777
20000 - 75777

Timer (Contact)

T0000 - T0777
T1000 - T1777

Counter (Contact)22
2C0000 - C0777
C1000 - C1777

2
Connection to a PLC

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual289

Chapter 2

Word Device
WindO/I-NV2 Device
Name

R/W

WindO/I-NV2 address

PLC Device Name

PLC address

Timer (Current Value)

R

Ext.Counter(Current Value)R

TC0 - TC777

Timer

0000 - 0777

ETC1000 - ETC1777(Current Value)

1000 - 1777

Counter (Current Value)R

CC0 - CC777

Counter

0000 - 0777

Ext.Counter (Current Value)R

ECC1000 - ECC1777(Current Value)

1000 - 1777

Register

Register (A)R/W

RA0 - RA1576

Ext.Register (A)R/W

ERA2000 - ERA7576

a0000 - a1576
a2000 - a7576

Register (B)R/W

RB0 - RB1776

b0000 - b1776

Ext.Register (B)

R/W

ERB2000 - ERB3776

b2000 - b3776

Register (09)R/W

R09_ 0 - R09_ 776

09000 - 09776

Register (19)R/W

R19_ 0 - R19_ 776

19000 - 19776

Register (29)R/W

R29_ 0 - R29_ 776

29000 - 29776

Register (39)R/W

R39_ 0 - R39_ 776

39000 - 39776

Register (49)R/W

R49_ 0 - R49_ 776

49000 - 49776

Register (59)R/W

R59_ 0 - R59_ 776

59000 - 59776

Register (69)R/W

R69_ 0 - R69_ 776

69000 - 69776

Register (79)R/W

R79_ 0 - R79_ 776

79000 - 79776

Register (89)R/W

R89_ 0 - R89_ 776

89000 - 89776

Register (99)R/W

R99_ 0 - R99_ 776

99000 - 99776

Register (E)R/W

RE0 - RE1776

E0000 - E1776

Ext.Register (E)

R/W

ERE2000 - ERE7776

E2000 - E7776

System Memory

R

S0 - S2176

System Memory#0000 - #2176

File Register (1)R/W

F1_ 0 - F1_ 37776

File Register1000000 - 037776

File Register (2)R/W

F2_ 0 - F2_ 177776

File Register2000000 - 177776

File Register (3)R/W

F3_ 0 - F3_ 177776

File Register3000000 - 177776- Set all devices using octal.
- Confirm the PLC manuals as device or device address may not use according to PLC.
- R/W specifies Read and Write device. R specify Read only device.
- Word device address below “Register (A)” increase +2. (The other device increase +1.)
- Device address of WindO/I NV2 does not display as the number of figure used PLC.
Example: if you set to “Register 19005” using WindO/I NV2, it set to not “R19_ 005” but “R19_5”.

290

External Device Setup Manual

8 Hitachi

8

Hitachi

8.1

Supported Programmable Logic Controllers

System (CPU unit)

Link unit

2

WindO/I-NV2 Settings
Interface

Product Series

Flow control Host I/F Driver HG2G-5F, HG2G HG1F/
HG3G/4G -S/-5S 2F/ 2S/
3F/ 4FTouch

S10mini
S10mini*1

Not required
RS422/485 4-wire
Hardware(built into the CPU unit) Connection Diagram 1(refer to P294)
RS232C
Connection Diagram 2(refer to P297)

LQE165

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 3(refer to P300)

LQE560

RS232C
Connection Diagram 2(refer to P297)

LQE565

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 3(refer to P300)

X

X

X

---

2
2
2
2

S10V*1
LQP510*1

Not required
RS232C
Hardware(built into the CPU unit) Connection Diagram 2(refer to P297)

S10mini

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 3(refer to P300)
LQE560*1

RS232C*1
Connection Diagram 2(refer to P297)

LQE565

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 3(refer to P300)

2Connection to a PLC

LQE160S10mini2*1 This PLC was used to test & verify communications.

X

X

X

---

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual291

Chapter 2

8.2

System Configuration

This is the system configuration for the connection of Hitachi PLC to the MICRO/I.

8.2.1

S10mini (LQP000) (connect to CPU unit RS232C port)
S10mini

MICRO/I
RS422/485
Connection Diagram 1 (refer to P294)

LQP0008.2.2

10mini Communication module
S10mini

MICRO/I
RS232C
Connection Diagram 2(refer to P297)

LQP000

LQE160
LQE560
MICRO/I
RS422
Connection Diagram 3(refer to P300)

LQE165
LQE565

8.2.3

S10V RS232C Port on CPU Unit
S10V

MICRO/I
RS232C
Connection Diagram 2 (refer to P297)

LQP510292

External Device Setup Manual

8 Hitachi

8.2.4

S10V RS422 Port on CPU Unit
S10V

MICRO/I2

RS422
Connection Diagram 3 (refer to P300)

22

LQP510

8.2.5

S10V Communication Module
S10V

MICRO/I

2
Connection to a PLC

2

RS232C
Connection Diagram 2(refer to P297)

2

LQP5102

LQE560
MICRO/I
RS422
Connection Diagram 3(refer to P300)

222

LQE56522
2
22

External Device Setup Manual293

Chapter 2

8.3

Connection Diagram

The connector types given in the Connection Diagrams are for the unit and not the cable. For details regarding wiring, refer
to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

8.3.1

Connection Diagram 1: S10mini (RS422/485) to MICRO/I

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector plug type

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor,
use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page
4.

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control
to NONE.

294

External Device Setup Manual

8 Hitachi

2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2
2

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG1F, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control to NONE.

22

External Device Setup Manual295

Chapter 2

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

296

External Device Setup Manual

8 Hitachi

8.3.2

Connection Diagram 2: S10mini (RS232C) to MICRO/I22
22
Connection to a PLC

2

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Terminal2222External Device Setup Manual297

Chapter 2

298

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type

External Device Setup Manual

8 Hitachi

2
2
2
2

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

Connection to a PLC

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual299

Chapter 2

8.3.3

Connection Diagram 3: S10V (RS422/485) to MICRO/I

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector plug type

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor,
use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page
4.

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control
to NONE.

300

External Device Setup Manual

8 Hitachi

2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Terminal

2

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG1F, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control to NONE.

222

External Device Setup Manual301

Chapter 2

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

302

External Device Setup Manual

8 Hitachi

8.4

Environment Settings

8.4.1

S10mini, S10V

Item

Setting

Interface

RS232C, RS422/485 4-wire

Baud Rate (bps)

19200

Data Bits

8

ParityOdd

Stop Bits

1

Communication parameters are not flexible. Refer to the PLC manual for details.

2222Connection to a PLC

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual303

Chapter 2

8.5

Usable Devices

Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol
MICRO/I

304

Address Range

Read/Write

PLC

Input Relay

X

X

0 - 7FF

R/W

Output RelayYY

0 - 7FF

R/W

Internal Relay

RR

0 - 7FF

R/W

Global Link

GG

0 - FFF

R/W

System RegisterSS

0 - BFFR

E Word

BEW

EW

400 - FFF

R/W

Event

E

E

0 - FF

R/W

Keep Relay

KK

0 - 1FF

R/W

On-Delay Timer (contact)TT

0 - 1FFR

One Shot Timer (contact)UU

0 - 7F

R

Up/Down Counter (contact)CC

0 - 3FR

External Device Setup Manual

Address
Gradual8 Hitachi

Word Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteMICRO/I

PLC

Input Relay

XW

X

0 - 7F0

R/W

Output Relay

YW

Y

0 - 7F0

R/W

Internal Relay

RW

R

0 - 7F0

R/W

Global Link

GW

G

0 - FF0

R/W

System RegisterSWS

0 - BF0R

E Word

EW

EW

400 - FF0

R/W

WE

E

0 - F0R/W

Keep Relay

KW

K

0 - 1F0

R/W

On-Delay Timer (contact)TWT

0 - 1F0R

One Shot Timer (contact)

UWU

0 - 70R

Up/Down Counter (contact)

CW

C

0 - 30R

On-Delay Timer (elapsed value)TCT

0 - 1FFR

On-Delay Timer (setup value)TST

0 - 1FFR/W

One Shot Timer (elapsed value)UCU

0 - 7FROne Shot Timer (setup value)USU

0 - 7F

R/W

Up/Down Counter (elapsed value)CCC

0 - 3F

R

Up/Down Counter (setup value)CSC

0 - 3F

R/W

Work RegisterFWFW

0 - BFF

R/W

Data Register*1

DW

DW

0 - FFF

R/W*1 When you use word device as bit device, the bit position reverses the order, as shown in the example.
Example: specified address read address
DW 0-0
DW 0-15
DW 0-1
DW 0-14::
DW 0-14
DW 0-1
DW 0-15
DW 0-02222Connection to a PLC

Event

Address
Gradual

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual305

Chapter 2

9

JTEKT (Toyoda)

9.1

Connection Table

9.1.1

Compatible PLCs

System(CPU unit)

Link Unit

WindO/I-NV2 Settings
Interface

Product Series

Flow Control

Host I/F Driver

HG2G-5F, HG2G HG1F/
HG3G/4G -S/-5S 2F/ 2S/
3F/ 4F

Touch

RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 1(refer to P307)

Hardware

TOYOPUC-PC3J

X

X

X

---

Hardware

TOYOPUC-PC3J

X

X

X

---

TOYOPUC-PC2J
Not required(connects to Built-in Link)

PC2J*1TOYOPUC-PC3J
PC3J*1PC3JD*1

Not required(connects to Built-in Link)

RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 1(refer to P307)

PC3JG*1

Not required(connects to Built-in Link)

RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P310)*1 This PLC was used to test & verify communications.

9.2

System Configuration

This is the system configuration for the connection of JTEKT (Toyoda) PLCs to the MICRO/I.

9.2.1

TOYOPUC-PC3J series (using the Built-in Link)
MICRO/I
RS422
Connection Diagram 1 (refer to P307)

PC3J, PC3JD
MICRO/I
RS422
Connection Diagram 2 (refer to P310)

PC3JG

306

External Device Setup Manual

9 JTEKT (Toyoda)

9.3

9.3.1

Connection Diagram

The connector types given in the Connection Diagrams are for the unit and not the cable. For details regarding wiring, refer
to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2

Connection Diagram 1: TOYOPUC-PC3J, PC3JD (Built-in Link) - MICRO/I2
2
2
Connection to a PLC

2
2

Screw Terminal

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2

Screw Terminal

Terminal

2
When you use the Terminal Block type of HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control
to NONE.

- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" onpage 4.

2
2
2- HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G Series uses only RDA and RDB when using RS422/485 2-wire, you don’t need to connect SDA or
SDB.
If connecting COM1 on the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G to the external device, do not insert terminating resistor to the external
device. If terminating resistor can not be removed, use COM2 on the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G instead of COM1.

External Device Setup Manual307

Chapter 2

Screw Terminal

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Screw Terminal

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG1F, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control to NONE.

308

External Device Setup Manual

9 JTEKT (Toyoda)2222Connection to a PLC

2Screw Terminal

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2

Screw Terminal

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual309

Chapter 2

9.3.2

Connection Diagram 2: TOYOPUC-PC3JG (Built-in Link) - MICRO/I

Screw Terminal

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Screw Terminal

Terminal

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control
to NONE.

- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" onpage 4.
- HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G Series uses only RDA and RDB when using RS422/485 2-wire, you don’t need to connect SDA or
SDB.
If connecting COM1 on the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G to the external device, do not insert terminating resistor to the external
device. If terminating resistor can not be removed, use COM2 on the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G instead of COM1.

310

External Device Setup Manual

9 JTEKT (Toyoda)

2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

Screw Terminal

2
2
2
2
2

Screw Terminal

Terminal

2

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG1F, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control to NONE.

222

External Device Setup Manual311

Chapter 2

Screw Terminal

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

Screw Terminal

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

312

External Device Setup Manual

9 JTEKT (Toyoda)

9.4

Environment Settings

9.4.1

TOYOPUC-PC3J Series

Item

Setting

Interface

RS422/485 2-wire

Station No.

0-37 (set with octal number) *1

Data Bits

7 or 8Communication Speed (bps)

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 or 57600

ParityEven (fix)Stop Bits

1 or 22
22
Connection to a PLC*1 Although a Station No. is the number of octal in PC3J, please set it up with the number of Hexadecimal by WindO/I-NV2.
For example, when set up with “37” in PC3J, please set up with “1F” in WindO/I-NV2.

22- Please set the communication conditions of PC3J in the built-in standard link parameters.
- When the built-in standard link parameters are not set, the link acts as the computer link for below settings.
Communication Speed: 19200bps
Data length: 8bit
Stop bit: 1bit
Parity: Even
Station No.: 0- Please refer to “JTEKT TOYOPUC PC3J CPU MODULE OPERATION MANUAL” for details.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual313

Chapter 2

9.5

Usable Devices

9.5.1

TOYOPUC-PC3J

Bit Device
Device Name

314

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Input Relay

X

X

0 - 7FF

R/W

Output RelayYY

0 - 7FF

R/W

Internal relay

MM

0 - 7FF

R/W*1

Keep-relay

KK

0 - 2FF

R/W*1

Link relayLL

0 - 7FF

R/W*1

Special relay

VV

0 - FF

R/W*1

Edge detectionPP

0 - 1FF

R/W*1

Timer contactTT

0 - 1FF

R*1

Counter contact

CC

0 - 1FF

R*1

Internal relay

P3M

M

0 - 7FF

R/W

Keep-relay

P3K

K

0 - 2FF

R/W

Link relay

P3LL

0 - 7FF

R/W

Special relay

P3VV

0 - FF

R/W

Edge detection

P3PP

0 - 1FF

R/W

Timer contact

P3TT

0 - 1FF

R

Counter contact

P3CC

0 - 1FF

R

Internal relay

P2M

M

0 - 7FF

R/W

Keep-relay

P2KK

0 - 2FF

R/W

Link relay

P2LL

0 - 7FF

R/W

Special relay

P2VV

0 - FF

R/W

Edge detection

P2PP

0 - 1FF

R/W

Timer contact

P2TT

0 - 1FF

R

Counter contact

P2CC

0 - 1FF

R

Internal relay

P1M

M

0 - 7FF

R/W

Keep-relay

P1KK

0 - 2FF

R/W

Link relay

P1LL

0 - 7FF

R/W

Special relay

P1VV

0 - FF

R/W

Edge detection

P1PP

0 - 1FF

R/W

Timer contact

P1TT

0 - 1FF

R

Counter contact

P1CC

0 - 1FFR

External Device Setup Manual

9 JTEKT (Toyoda)

Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteMICRO/I

PLC

Extended inputEXEX

0 - 7FF

R/W

Extended output

EY

EY

0 - 7FF

R/W

Extended Internal relay

EMEM

0 - 1FFF

R/W

Extended keep-relay

EK

EK

0 - FFF

R/W

Extended link relay

ELEL

0 - 1FFF

R/W

Extended special relay

EVEV

0 - FFF

R/W

Address
Gradual

2
2
2
2

EP

EP

0 - FFF

R/W

Extended timer contactETET

0 - 7FFR

Extended counter contact

ECEC

0 - 7FFR

Extended input

GX

GX

0 - FFFF

R/W*2

Extended output

GY

GY

0 - FFFF

R/W*2

Extended Internal relay

GMGM

0 - FFFF

R/W

*2

2

*1 Parameter-set program No. in “Link parameter” is an objective of command processing.When the built-in standard link parameters are not set,
Probram1 is an objective of command processing.
*2 These devices are available in the case of a PC3JG mode.

Input

2
2
2

Word Device
Device Name

Connection to a PLC

Extended edge detection

Device Symbol
MICRO/I

PLC

WX

X

Address Range

Read/Write0 - 7F

R/W

Address
Gradual2

OutputWYY

0 - 7F

R/W

Internal relay

WM

M

0 - 7F

R/W*1

Keep-relay

WKK

0 - 2F

R/W*1

Link relay

WLL

0 - 7F

R/W*1

Timer contact

WTT

0 - 1FR*1Counter contact

WCC

0 - 1FR*1

Present value registerNN

0 - 1FFR*1

Data registerDD

0 - 2FFF

R/W*1

Link registerRR

0 - 7FF

R/W*1

Special registerSS

0 - 3FF

R/W*1

File registerBB

0 - 1FFF

R/W

*1*2

Internal relay

P3WM

M

0 - 7F

R/W

Keep-relay

P3WK

K

0 - 2F

R/W

Link relay

P3WL

L

0 - 7F

R/W

Timer contact

P3WT

T

0 - 1FR

External Device Setup Manual

2

2
2
2
2
2

315

Chapter 2

Word Device
Device Name

316

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteR

MICRO/I

PLC

Counter contact

P3WC

C

0 - 1F

Present value register

P3NN

0 - 1FF

R

Data register

P3DD

0 - 2FFF

R/W

Link register

P3RR

0 - 7FF

R/W

Special registerP3SS

0 - 3FF

R/W

File registerP3B

B

0 - 1FFF

R/W

Internal relay

P2WM

M

0 - 7F

R/W

Keep-relay

P2WK

K

0 - 2F

R/W

Link relay

P2WL

L

0 - 7F

R/W

Timer contact

P2WT

T

0 - 1FR

Counter contact

P2WC

C

0 - 1FR

Present value register

P2NN

0 - 1FF

R

Data register

P2DD

0 - 2FFF

R/W

Link register

P2RR

0 - 7FF

R/W

Special registerP2SS

0 - 3FF

R/W

File registerP2BB

0 - 1FFF

R/W

Internal relay

P1WM

M

0 - 7F

R/W

Keep-relay

P1WK

K

0 - 2F

R/W

Link relay

P1WL

L

0 - 7F

R/W

Timer contact

P1WT

T

0 - 1FR

Counter contact

P1WC

C

0 - 1FR

Present value register

P1NN

0 - 1FF

R

Data register

P1DD

0 - 2FFF

R/W

Link register

P1RR

0 - 7FF

R/W

Special register

P1SS

0 - 3FF

R/W

File register

P1BB

0 - 1FFF

R/W

Address
Gradual

*2

*2

*2

Extended input

WEX

EX

0 - 7F

R/W

Extended output

WEY

EY

0 - 7F

R/W

Extended internal relay

WEM

EM

0 - 1FF

R/W

Extended keep-relay

WEK

EK

0 - FF

R/W

Extended link relay

WEL

EL

0 - 1FF

R/W

Extended timer contact

WET

ET

0 - 7FR*1

Extended counter contact

WEC

EC

0 - 7FR*1

Extended present value registerENEN

0 - 7FFR

Extended data registerUU

0 - 7FFF

R/W

External Device Setup Manual

9 JTEKT (Toyoda)

Word Device
Device Name

Extended special register

Device Symbol
MICRO/I

PLC

ES

ES

Address Range

Read/Write0 - 7FF

R/W

Address
Gradual2HH

0 - 7FF

R/W

WGX

GX

0 - FFF

R/W*3

Extended output

WGY

GY

0 - FFF

R/W*3

Extended internal relay

WGM

GM

0 - FFF

R/W*3

Extended Buffer register 0

EB0

EB

0 - 7FFF

R/W*3

Extended Buffer register 1

EB1

EB

8000 - FFFF

R/W

*3

Extended Buffer register 2

EB2

EB

10000 - 17FFF

R/W

*3

Extended Buffer register 3

EB3

EB

18000 - 1FFFF

R/W

*3

*1 Parameter-set program No. in “Link parameter” is an objective of command processing.When the built-in standard link parameters are not set,
Probram1 is an objective of command processing.
*2 When CPU operation mode is division mode, File register is not available.
*3 These devices are available in the case of a PC3JG mode.

222Connection to a PLC

Extended setup value register
Extended input222

Depending on the type of CPU operation mode of PC3J that you will be using, the there are limits to the areas that can beused within the device ranges given above. Refer to the PLC manual for details.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual317

Chapter 2

10 Toshiba Machine Works
10.1 Connection Table
10.1.1 Compatible PLCs
System (CPU unit)

Link Unit

WindO/I-NV2 Settings
Interface

Flow Control

Product Series
Host I/F Driver HG2G-5F, HG2G HG1F/ Touch
HG3G/4G -S/-5S 2F/ 2S/
3F/ 4F

TC200
TC3-13B1*1

Not required
RS232C
Hardware /None TC200(connects to CPU unit) Connection Diagram 1(refer to P320)

X

X

X

---

Not required
RS232C
Hardware /None TC200(connects to CPU unit) Connection Diagram 2(refer to P322)

X

X

X

---

TCminiTC03-01,
TC03-02*1

Not required
RS422/485 2-wire(connects to CPU unit) Connection Diagram 3(refer to P324)*1 This PLC was used to test & verify communications.

318

External Device Setup Manual

10 Toshiba Machine Works

10.2 System Configuration
This is the system configuration for the connection of Toshiba machine works PLCs to the MICRO/I.

10.2.1

TC200

2

TC-200

MICRO/I
RS232C
Connection Diagram 1 (refer to P320)

2
2

TC3-13B1

2

Connects to Serial port of CPU unit.

2

TCmini (connected to the RS232C Port)TC miniConnection to a PLC

10.2.2

MICRO/I
RS232C
Connection Diagram 2(refer to P322)

2
2

TC03-012

TC03-0210.2.3TCmini (connected to the RS-TCm485 Port)TC mini2
MICRO/I

RS485
Connection Diagram 3 (refer to P324)

2
2

TC03-01
TC03-022
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual319

Chapter 2

10.3 Connection Diagram

The connector types given in the Connection Diagrams are for the unit and not the cable. For details regarding wiring, refer
to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

10.3.1 Connection Diagram 1: TC200 (RS232C) - MICRO/I

320

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector plug type

Terminal

External Device Setup Manual

10 Toshiba Machine Works222
2
D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

External Device Setup Manual321

Chapter 2

10.3.2 Connection Diagram 2: TCmini (RS232C) - MICRO/I

322

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector plug type

Terminal

External Device Setup Manual

10 Toshiba Machine Works222
2
D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

External Device Setup Manual323

Chapter 2

10.3.3 Connection Diagram 3:TCmini (RS485) - MICRO/I

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Terminal

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control
to NONE.

- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" onpage 4.
- HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G Series uses only RDA and RDB when using RS422/485 2-wire, you don’t need to connect SDA or
SDB.
If connecting COM1 on the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G to the external device, do not insert terminating resistor to the external
device. If terminating resistor can not be removed, use COM2 on the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G instead of COM1.

324

External Device Setup Manual

10 Toshiba Machine Works2222Connection to a PLC

2

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2

Terminal

2
There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG1F, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control to NONE.

2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual325

Chapter 2

D-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

326

External Device Setup Manual

10 Toshiba Machine Works

10.4 Environment Settings
10.4.1

TC200

Items

Details

Interface

RS232CPC No.*1

00 - 63 (Set same as MICRO/I) (DEC)

Baud Rate (bps)9600

Data Bits

8

ParityNone

Stop Bits

2

2
2
2
2

*1 Set a decimal number for the PC No.

Connection to a PLC

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual327

Chapter 2

10.5 Usable Devices
Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol
MICRO/I

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

PLC

Input Relay

X

X

0 - F7F

R

Output Relay

YY

0 - F7F

R/W

Internal Relay

RR

0 - 77F

R/W

Latch Relay

LL

0 - 7F

R/W

Exp.Int.Relay1GG

0 - F7F

R/W

Exp.Int.Relay2H

H

0 - F7F

R/W

Spec. Aid RelayAA

0 - 16F

R/W

Timer (Relay)TT

0 - 37F

RCounter (Relay)CC

0 - 37F

R

Sift RegisterSS

0 - 7F

R/W

Edge Relay

EE

0 - 77F

R/W

Address Range

Read/WriteWord Device
Device Name

328

Device Symbol
MICRO/I

PLC

Input Relay

WX

X

0 -F7

R

Output Relay

WY

Y

0 - F7

R/W

Internal Relay

WRR

0 - 77R/W

Latch Relay

WL

L

0-7

R/W

Exp.Int.Relay1

WG

G

0 - F7

R/W

Exp.Int.Relay2WH

H

0 - F7

R/W

Spec. Aid RelayWAA

0 - 16

R/W

Tim/Cnt.(Current Value)PP

0 - 77FR

Tim/Cnt.(Preset Value)VV

0 - 77F

R/W

General Register1DD

0 - F7F

R/W

General Register2

BB

0 - F7F

R/W

Sift Register

WS

S

0-7

R/W

Edge Relay

WE

E

0 - 77

R/W

Timer Relay (Word)

WT

T

0 - T77

R

Counter Relay (Word)WCC

0 - 77R

External Device Setup Manual

Address
Gradual11 GE Fanuc Automation

11 GE Fanuc Automation
11.1 Connection Table
11.1.12Compatible PLCs

System (CPU unit)

Link Unit

WindO/I-NV2 Settings
Interface2

Product Series

Flow Control Host I/F HG2G-5F, HG2G HG1F/ Touch
Driver HG3G/4G -S/-5S 2F/ 2S/
3F/ 4F

2

Series90-30
IC693CMM311

RS232C
HardwareConnection Diagram 1(refer to P331)

CPU311, CPU313,
CPU323, CPU331*1,
CPU341, CPU350,
CPU351, CPU352,
CPU360, CPU363,
CPU364, CPU374

Not required(connects to CPU(Power Supply) unit directly)

Series 90(SNP-X)

X

X

X

---

2
Connection to a PLC

CPU331*1, CPU341,
CPU350, CPU351,
CPU352, CPU360,
CPU363, CPU364,
CPU374

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P333)

2

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 3(refer to P336)

2
2

VersaMax
Nano
Micro (14point)

Not required
RS232C
Hardware(connects to CPU unit directly) Connection Diagram 4(refer to P339)

Micro (23, 28*1point)

Series 90(SNP-X)

X

X

X

---

2

RS232C
Connection Diagram 4(refer to P339)

2

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 3(refer to P339)

2*1 This PLC was used to test & verify communications.

2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual329

Chapter 2

11.2 System Configuration
This is the system configuration for the connection of GE Fanuc PLCs to MICRO/I screens.

11.2.1 Series 90-30 (Using Communication Coprocessor Module (CMM))
IC683CMM311

MICRO/I
RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P331)

Series 90-30

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P333)

11.2.2 Series 90-30, VersaMax Micro (Using CPU Serial Port)
MICRO/I
RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 3 (refer to P336)

Series 90-30
VersaMax Micro (23, 28 point)

Connects to Serial port on Series 90-30 PLC Power Supply. Connects to Serial port 2 on VersaMax Micro PLC.

11.2.3 VersaMax Micro/Nano (Using Serial Port 1)
MICRO/I
RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 4 (refer to P339)

VersaMax Micro/ Nano

Connects to Serial port 1(RS232C) on VersaMax Micro/Nano PLC.

330

External Device Setup Manual

11 GE Fanuc Automation

11.3 Connection Diagram

The connector types given in the Connection Diagrams are for the unit and not for the cable. For details regarding wiring,refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

11.3.1Connection Diagram 1: Series 90-30 Communication Coprocessor Module (CMM) (RS232C)
to MICRO/I22
22
Connection to a PLC22
2

D-sub, 25P connector socket type (unit side)

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 25P connector socket type (unit side)

Terminal22External Device Setup Manual331

Chapter 2

332

D-sub, 25P connector socket type (unit side)

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type (unit side)

D-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type (unit side)

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

External Device Setup Manual

11 GE Fanuc Automation

11.3.2Connection Diagram 2: Series 90-30 Communication Coprocessor Module (CMM)(RS422/485) to MICRO/I22
22
Connection to a PLC

2

D-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

Terminal

2
There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor,
use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page4.

2
2

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control
to NONE.

External Device Setup Manual333Chapter 2

D-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG1F, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control to NONE.

334

External Device Setup Manual

11 GE Fanuc Automation

22
22Connection to a PLC

2

D-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual335

Chapter 2

11.3.3 Connection Diagram 3: PLC (RS485) to MICRO/I

D-sub, 15P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 15P connector socket type

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor,
use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page
4.

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control
to NONE.

336

External Device Setup Manual

11 GE Fanuc Automation

22
22Connection to a PLC

2

D-sub, 15P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 15P connector socket type

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2
2

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG1F, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control to NONE.

External Device Setup Manual2337

Chapter 2

D-sub, 15P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 15P connector socket typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

338

External Device Setup Manual

11 GE Fanuc Automation

11.3.4

Connection Diagram 4: PLC (RS232C) to MICRO/I22
2
2
D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Connection to a PLC

RJ-45, 8P modular connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2

RJ-45, 8P modular connector socket type

Terminal

2
2
2
2
2

RJ-45, 8P modular connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket type

External Device Setup Manual339

Chapter 2

340

RJ-45, 8P modular connector socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type

RJ-45, 8P modular connector socket typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

External Device Setup Manual

11 GE Fanuc Automation

11.4 Environment Settings
The communication port settings for GE Fanuc PLCs and MICRO/I host port are as follows

11.4.1

Series 90-30 Communication Coprocessor Module (CMM)

Item

2

Setting

Interface
Baud Rate [bps]Set to the same setting
as the MICRO/I

RS232CRS485 4-wire

2

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200
8 (fixed)

ParityOdd , Even or None

Stop Bits

1 or 2

Flow Control

None

Configuration ModeSNP Only

SNP EnableYes

SNP Mode

Slave

2
Hardware or None

2
Connection to a PLC

Data Bits2
2

Do not set SNP ID for the PLC. If you set it, MICRO/I will not communicate with PLC.

2

11.4.2

Series 90-30 CPU Module

Item

Setting

Interface
Baud Rate [bps]Data Bits

Set to the same setting
as the MICRO/I

RS485 4-wire
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200

2
2

8 (fixed)

ParityOdd , Even or None

Stop Bits

1 or 2

2
2

Do not set SNP ID for the PLC. If you set it, MICRO/I will not communicate with PLC.

2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual341

Chapter 2

11.4.3 VersaMax Micro/Nano
Item

Setting

Interface
Baud Rate [bps]Set to the same setting
as the MICRO/I

RS232C (Port 1), RS485 4-wire (Port 2)
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200

Data Bits

8 (fixed)

ParityOdd , Even or None

Stop Bits

1 or 2

Port Mode

SNP

Port Type

Slave- Do not set SNP ID for the PLC. If you set it, MICRO/I will not communicate with PLC.
- Refer to the manuals of Series90-30 or VersaMax Micro/Nano PLCs for details.

342

External Device Setup Manual

11 GE Fanuc Automation

11.5 Usable Devices
The types of devices supported by the MICRO/I and their ranges are shown below.
Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual2

MICRO/I

PLC

Discrete Inputs

I%I

1 - 12288

R

Dec

Discrete Outputs

Q%Q

1 - 12288

R/W

Dec

Internal Coils

M%M

1 - 12288

R/W

Dec

Temporary Coils

T%T

1 - 256

R/W

Dec

Discrete Globals

G%G

1 - 7680

R/W

Dec

System Status References S

S%S

1 - 128

R

Dec

System Status References SA

SA

%SA

1 - 128

R/W

Dec

System Status References SB

SB

%SB

1 - 128

R/W

Dec

System Status References SC

SC

%SC

1 - 128

R/W

Dec

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
GradualConnection to a PLC

2

Word Device
Device Name

Device Symbol
MICRO/I

2
2
2
2
2
2

PLC

Discrete Inputs

WI%I

1 - 12273

R

Dec

Discrete Outputs

WQ%Q

1 - 12273

R/W

Dec

Internal Coils

WM%M

1 - 12273

R/W

Dec

Temporary Coils

WT%T

1 - 241

R/W

Dec

Discrete Globals

WG%G

1 - 7665

R/W

Dec

System Status References S

WS%S

1 - 113R

Dec

System Status References SA

WSA

%SA

1 - 113

R/W

Dec

System Status References SB

WSB

%SB

1 - 113

R/W

Dec

System Status References SC

WSC

%SC

1 - 113

R/W

Dec

Register MemoryR%R

1 - 16384

R/W

Dec

Analog Inputs

AI

%AI

1 - 8192

R/W

Dec

Analog Outputs

AQ

%AQ

1 - 8192

R/W

Dec

The device ranges may differ depending on the PLC model. Please refer to PLC Manual for supported memory ranges of
the PLC you are using.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual343

Chapter 2

12 Panasonic Electric Works
12.1 Connection Table
12.1.1Compatible Protocols

System(CPU unit)

Link Unit

WindO/I-NV2 Settings
Interface

Product Series

Flow Control Host I/F
Driver

HG2G-5F, HG2G HG1F/
HG3G/4G -S/-5S 2F/ 2S/
3F/ 4FTouch

FP Series
FP0

Not required*1(Connects to CPU unit directly)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P348)

FP1*1

Not required(Connects to RS232C Port)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 2(refer to P350)

Not required(Connects to CPU unit directly)

RS232C (AFP8550)
Connection Diagram 3(refer to P352)

Not required*1(Connects to CPU unit directly)

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 4(refer to P355)

Not required*1(Connects to CPU unit directly)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P348)

Used Communication cassette
AFPG801*1

RS232C
Connection Diagram 5(refer to P358)

Used Communication cassette
AFPG802*1

RS232C
Connection Diagram 6(refer to P360)

Used Communication cassette
AFPG803*1

RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 7(refer to P362)

Not required*1(Connects to Tool Pot or Com Port)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 8(refer to P365)

FP*1

FP10,
FP10SH

AFP3462*1
FP2,
FP2SH

Hardware

MEWNETNot required(Connects to Com Port)
AFP2462*1 This PLC was used to test & verify communications.

344

External Device Setup Manual

X

X

X

---

12 Panasonic Electric Works

12.2 System Configuration
This is the system configuration for the connection of Panasonic Electric Works PLCs to the MICRO/I.
FP0

MICRO/I
RS232C
Connection Diagram 1 (refer to P348)

2
2
2

C16CT, C32CT

2MICRO/I
RS232C
Connection Diagram 1 (refer to P348)

Connection to a PLC

FP

2
2
2
2

C16CT, C32CT

FP1

MICRO/I
RS232C
Connection Diagram 2 (refer to P350)

2
2
2

C24C, C40C, C56C, C72C

FP1

2
AFP8550

MICRO/I
RS422
Connection Diagram 3(refer to P352)

2
2
2

C14, C16, C24, C40, C56, C72,
C24C, C40C, C56C, C72C

RS422
Connection Diagram 4 (refer to P355)

External Device Setup Manual345

Chapter 2FP

AFPG801

MICRO/I
RS232C
Connection Diagram 5(refer to P358)

C32T, C24R2, C32T2

FP

AFPG802

MICRO/I
RS232C
Connection Diagram 6(refer to P360)

C32T, C24R2, C32T2

FP

AFPG803

MICRO/I
RS485
Connection Diagram 7(refer to P362)

C32T, C24R2, C32T2

MICRO/I
RS232C
Connection Diagram 8 (refer to P365)

FP2, FP2SH
FP10, FP10SH

346

External Device Setup Manual

12 Panasonic Electric Works

MICRO/I
RS232C
Connection Diagram 8(refer to P365)

2
2

FP10, FP10SH
AFP3462

2
MICRO/I(refer to P365)

2
Connection to a PLC

RS232C
Connection Diagram 8

2
2

FP2, FP2SH
AFP2462

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual347

Chapter 2

12.3 Connection Diagram

The connector types given in the Connection Diagrams are for the unit and not for the cable. For details regarding wiring,refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

12.3.1 Connection Diagram 1: FP0, FP- MICRO/I

348

Mini Din 5P, socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug type

Mini Din 5P, socket type

Terminal

Mini Din 5P, socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket type

External Device Setup Manual

12 Panasonic Electric Works222
2
D-sub, 25P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

Mini Din 5P, socket type

2
2
2
2
2

Mini Din 5P, socket typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual349

Chapter 2

12.3.2 Connection Diagram 2: FP1 (RS232C Port) - MICRO/I

350

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector socket type

Terminal

External Device Setup Manual

12 Panasonic Electric Works222
2
D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2

Mini DIN 5P, socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 25P connector plug typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

External Device Setup Manual351

Chapter 2

12.3.3 Connection Diagram 3: FP1 (AFP8550) - MICRO/I

D-sub, 25P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector plug typeThis figure shows the connection diagram when using the cable (AFP8550) from Panasonic Electric Works.
In D sub connector of AFP8550, D sub connector of a plug type and MICRO/I main part is a socket type. (In case you create a cable,
as for the AFP8550 side, the socket type and MICRO/I side should use plug type D sub connector.)

D-sub, 25P connector plug type

TerminalThis figure shows the connection diagram when using the cable (AFP8550) from Panasonic Electric Works.
In D sub connector of AFP8550, D sub connector of a plug type and MICRO/I main part is a socket type. (In case you create a cable,
as for the AFP8550 side, the socket type and MICRO/I side should use plug type D sub connector.)

352

External Device Setup Manual

12 Panasonic Electric Works222
2
D-sub, 9P connector socket typeThis figure shows the connection diagram when using the cable (AFP8550) from Panasonic Electric Works.
In D sub connector of AFP8550, D sub connector of a plug type and MICRO/I main part is a socket type. (In case you create a cable,
as for the AFP8550 side, the socket type and MICRO/I side should use plug type D sub connector.)

Connection to a PLC

D-sub, 25P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 25P connector plug typeD-sub, 25P connector socket typeThis figure shows the connection diagram when using the cable (AFP8550) from Panasonic Electric Works.
In D sub connector of AFP8550, D sub connector of a plug type and MICRO/I main part is a socket type. (In case you create a cable,
as for the AFP8550 side, the socket type and MICRO/I side should use plug type D sub connector.)

2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual353

Chapter 2

D-sub, 25P connector plug typeD-sub, 37P connector plug typeThis figure shows the connection diagram when using the cable (AFP8550) from Panasonic Electric Works.
In D sub connector of AFP8550, D sub connector of a plug type and MICRO/I main part is a socket type. (In case you create a cable,
as for the AFP8550 side, the socket type and MICRO/I side should use plug type D sub connector.)

354

External Device Setup Manual

12 Panasonic Electric Works

12.3.4

Connection Diagram 4: FP1 - MICRO/I22
2
2
D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Connection to a PLC

Mini Din 8P socket type

2
2
2
2
2

Mini Din 8P socket type

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor,
use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page
4.

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control
to NONE.

2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual355

Chapter 2

Mini Din 8P socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket type

Mini Din 8P socket type

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG1F, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control to NONE.

356

External Device Setup Manual

12 Panasonic Electric Works2222Connection to a PLC

2Mini Din 8P socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2

Mini Din 8P socket typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual357

Chapter 2

12.3.5 Connection Diagram 5: FP- Communication cassette (AFPG801) - MICRO/I

358

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Screw terminal block

Terminal

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

External Device Setup Manual

12 Panasonic Electric Works222
2
D-sub, 25P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

Screw terminal block

2
2
2
2
2

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual359

Chapter 2

12.3.6 Connection Diagram 6: FP- Communication cassette (AFPG802) - MICRO/I

360

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Screw terminal block

Terminal

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

External Device Setup Manual

12 Panasonic Electric Works222
2
D-sub, 25P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

Screw terminal block

2
2
2
2
2

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual361

Chapter 2

12.3.7 Connection Diagram 7: FP- Communication cassette (AFPG803) - MICRO/I

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Screw terminal block

Terminal

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control
to NONE.

- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" onpage 4.
- HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G Series uses only RDA and RDB when using RS422/485 2-wire, you don’t need to connect SDA or
SDB.
If connecting COM1 on the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G to the external device, do not insert terminating resistor to the external
device. If terminating resistor can not be removed, use COM2 on the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G instead of COM1.

362

External Device Setup Manual

12 Panasonic Electric Works

2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

Screw terminal block

2
2
2
2
2

Screw terminal block

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2
2

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG1F, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control to NONE.

222

External Device Setup Manual363

Chapter 2

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

364

External Device Setup Manual

12 Panasonic Electric Works

12.3.8Connection Diagram 8: FP2, FP2SH, FP10, FP10SH - MICRO/I22
22
Connection to a PLC

2

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Terminal2222External Device Setup Manual365

Chapter 2

366

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

External Device Setup Manual

12 Panasonic Electric Works

12.4 Environment Settings
12.4.1FP0 and FP1 (tool port on CPU unit).

Items

Details

Interface

Use the same

RS232C, RS422 4-wireSlave Address

settings as for the MICRO/I.

01 - 99(DEC)*1

Baud Rate (bps)9600 or 19200

Data Bits

8

ParityOdd

Stop Bits

1

Flow Control

Hardware or None

12.4.2

Details

Interface

Use the same

RS232C

Slave Address

settings as for the MICRO/I.

01 - 99(DEC)

Baud Rate (bps)

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200

Data Bits

7 or 8

ParityNone, Even or Odd

Stop Bits

1 or 2

Flow Control

Hardware or None

12.4.3FP(Tool port on CPU unit or communication cassette)

Items

2
2
2

FP1 (RS232C port on CPU unit)

Items

2

Connection to a PLC*1 There are some models that don’t support Slave Address up to 99.

2

2
2
2
2
2

Details

Interface

Use the same

RS232C, RS485 2-wireSlave Address

settings as for the MICRO/I.

01 - 99 (DEC)

Baud Rate (bps)

2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200

Data Bits

7 or 8

ParityNone, Even or Odd

Stop Bits

1 or 2

Flow Control

Hardware or None

2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual367

Chapter 2

12.4.4 FP10 and FP10SH (tool port on CPU unit).
Items

Details

Interface

Use the same

RS232C

Slave Address

settings as for the MICRO/I.

1 - 32(DEC)

Baud Rate (bps)9600 or 19200

Data Bits

7 or 8

ParityOdd

Stop Bits

1

Flow Control

Hardware or None

12.4.5 FP2, FP2SH, FP10 and FP10SH (Communication port on CPU unit)
Items

Details

Interface

Use the same

RS232C

Slave Address

settings as for the MICRO/I.

1 - 32(DEC)

Baud Rate (bps)

2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200

Data Bits

7 or 8

ParityNone, Even or Odd

Stop Bits

1 or 2

Flow Control

Hardware or None

12.4.6 FP10 and FP10SH (Computer Communication Unit)
Items

Details

Interface

Use the same

RS232C

Slave Address

settings as for the MICRO/I.

1 - 32(DEC)

Baud Rate (bps)

2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200

Data Bits

7 or 8

ParityNone, Even or Odd

Stop Bits

1 or 2

Flow Control

Hardware or None

12.4.7 PLC FP2 and FP2SH (Computer Communication Unit)
Items

368

Details

Interface

Use the same

RS232C

Slave Address

settings as for the MICRO/I.

1 - 32(DEC)

Baud Rate (bps)4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200

Data Bits

7 or 8

ParityOdd

Stop Bits

1

Flow Control

Hardware or None

External Device Setup Manual

12 Panasonic Electric Works

12.5 Usable Devices
Types of devices supported by the MICRO/I and their ranges are shown below.
Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

PLC

Input

X

X

0 - 511F

R*1

OutputYY

0 - 511F

R/W*1Internal Relay

RR

0 - 886F

R/W*1

Special Internal relay

RE

R

9000 - 910F

R

*1

Link Relay

LL

0 - 639F

R/W

*1

Timer

T

T

0 - 3071

R

Dec

CounterCC

0 - 3071

R

Dec

Error alarm relay

EE

0 - 2047

R

Dec

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual0 - 00511

RDec*1 3 figures of higher ranks are expressed by decimal, and 1 figure of low ranks is expressed by hexadecimal.

Word Device
Device Name

Input

Device Symbol
MICRO/I

PLC

WX

WX

OutputWY

WY

0 - 00511

R/W

Dec

Internal Relay

WRWR

0 - 00886

R/W

Dec

Special Internal relay

WRE

WR

900 - 00910

R

Dec

Link Relay

WL

WL

0 - 00639

R/W

Dec

Timer, Counter (Elapsed value)EVEV

0 - 03071

R

Dec

Timer, Counter (Set value)SVSV

0 - 03071

R/W

Dec

Data registerDTDT

0 - 99999

R/W

Dec

Link data registerLDLD

0 - 08447

R/W

Dec

File registerFLFL

0 - 32764

R/W

Dec*1

*1 In FP2SH, the contents of a bank 0 are written.

The device ranges may differ depending on the PLC model. Please refer to PLC Manual for supported memory ranges of
the PLC.

2
2
2
Connection to a PLC

MICRO/I

2

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual369

Chapter 2

13 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
13.1 Connection Table
13.1.1 Compatible Protocols
System(CPU unit)

Link Unit

WindO/I-NV2, WindO/I-NV3 Settings
Interface

Product Series

Flow Control

Host I/F Driver HG2G-5F,
Communication HG3G/4G
Driver

HG2G HG1F/-S/-5S 2F/ 2S/
3F/ 4F

Touch

MP920-RTU

X

X

X

---

MP2000(Ethernet)

X

X

---

X

Machine Controller
MP920*1
MP930

Not required(connects to CPU unit)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P373)

Hardware

217IF

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P375)

None

RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 3(refer to P378)
MP2300*1

217IF-01

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P373)

Hardware

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 4(refer to P381)

None

RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 5(refer to P384)
MP2200MP2300218IF-01

MP2310MP2300S*1

Not required(Connects to CPU unit)

Ethernet

218IF-02-

218IF-01
218IF-02
MP2400

Not required(Connects to CPU unit)*1 This PLC was used to test & verify communications.

370

External Device Setup Manual

13 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION

13.2 System Configuration
This is the system configuration for the connection of YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION PLCs to the MICRO/I.

13.2.1

MP920, MP930 (connects to CPU Unit RS232C port)

2
MICRO/I

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1 (refer to P373)

22
2

MP920, MP930

MP920,MP930(217IF)
RS232C
Connection Diagram 1

MICRO/I

Connection to a PLC

13.2.222(refer to P373)

2

RS485
Connection Diagram 2(refer to P375)

2
RS422
Connection Diagram 3

2(refer to P378)

MP920, MP930

217IF

2
13.2.3MP2300 (217IF-01)
RS232C
Connection Diagram 1

MICRO/I2(refer to P373)

2

RS485
Connection Diagram 42(refer to P381)

2
RS422
Connection Diagram 5(refer to P384)

MP23002

217IF-01

External Device Setup Manual371

Chapter 2

13.2.4 MP2000 Series (Ethernet)
MICRO/I
Touch

Ethernet

Ethernet

MP2000 Series

372

218IF-01
218IF-02

External Device Setup Manual

13 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION

13.3 Connection Diagram

13.3.1

The connector types given in the Connection Diagrams are for the unit and not the cable. For details regarding wiring, refer
to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2

Connection Diagram 1: MP920, MP930, MP2300 to MICRO/I (RS232C)

2
2
2
Connection to a PLC22
2

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Terminal22External Device Setup Manual373

Chapter 2

374

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

External Device Setup Manual

13 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION

13.3.2Connection Diagram 2: MP920, MP930 (217IF) - MICRO/I (RS422)2222D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Connection to a PLC

MR-8M connector

2
2
2
2
2

MR-8M connector

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor,
use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page
4.

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control
to NONE.

2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual375

Chapter 2

MR-8M connector

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

MR-8M connector

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG1F, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control to NONE.

376

External Device Setup Manual

13 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION2222
Connection to a PLC

2

MR-8M connector

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2

MR-8M connector

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual377

Chapter 2

13.3.3 Connection Diagram 3: MP920, MP930 (217IF) - MICRO/I (RS485)

MR-8M connector

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

MR-8M connector

Terminal

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control
to NONE.

- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" onpage 4.
- HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G Series uses only RDA and RDB when using RS422/485 2-wire, you don’t need to connect SDA or
SDB.
If connecting COM1 on the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G to the external device, do not insert terminating resistor to the external
device. If terminating resistor can not be removed, use COM2 on the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G instead of COM1.

378

External Device Setup Manual

13 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION

2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

MR-8M connector

2
2
2
2
2
2

MR-8M connector

Terminal

2
There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG1F, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control to NONE.

2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual379

Chapter 2

MR-8M connector

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

MR-8M connector

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

380

External Device Setup Manual

13 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION

13.3.4

Connection Diagram 4: MP2300 (217IF-01) - MICRO/I (RS422)2222D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Connection to a PLC

MDR14P connector

2
2
2
2
2

MDR14P connector

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor,
use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page
4.

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control
to NONE.

2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual381

Chapter 2

MDR14P connector

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

MDR14P connector

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG1F, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control to NONE.

382

External Device Setup Manual

13 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION2222
Connection to a PLC

2

MDR14P connector

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2

MDR14P connector

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual383

Chapter 2

13.3.5 Connection Diagram 5: MP2300(217IF - 01) - MICRO/I (RS485)

MDR14P connector

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

MDR14P connector

Terminal

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control
to NONE.

- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" onpage 4.
- HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G Series uses only RDA and RDB when using RS422/485 2-wire, you don’t need to connect SDA or
SDB.
If connecting COM1 on the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G to the external device, do not insert terminating resistor to the external
device. If terminating resistor can not be removed, use COM2 on the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G instead of COM1.

384

External Device Setup Manual

13 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION2222
Connection to a PLC

2

MDR14P connector

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2

MDR14P connector

Terminal

2
There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG1F, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control to NONE.

2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual385

Chapter 2

MDR14P connector

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

MDR14P connector

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

386

External Device Setup Manual

13 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION

13.4 Environment Settings
13.4.1

MP920, MP930, MP2300

Items

Details

Interface

RS232C, RS422/485

ProtocolMEMOBUS RTU

Slave Address

1 - 63 (DEC)

Baud Rate (bps)9600 or 19200

Data Bits

8 (fixed)
None, Even or Odd

Stop Bits

1 or 2

Flow Control

Hardware- It is necessary to set up transmission form by the rudder program.
- Please set up the head register by the side of the PLC as follows. Moreover, please give offset of each register as 0.
Module detailed setup“Setup of a slave I/F register”“Head REG”
“reading of an Inputs Status”
IW0000“reading of an Inputs Registers”
IW0000“reading/writing” of a Coil
MW00000“reading/writing” of a Holding Registers
MW000002
2
2Connection to a PLC

Parity

2

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual387

Chapter 2

13.4.2 Connecting with the MP2000 series via Ethernet
1. MICRO/I settings
Item

Setting

IP Address (MICRO/I)

Set the IP address of MICRO/I in Communication Interface tab.

Subnet Mask

Set the subnet mask of MICRO/I in Communication Interface tab.

Default Gateway

Set the default gateway of MICRO/I in Communication Interface tab.

IP Address (PLC)

Set the IP address of PLC in Host I/F Network tab.

Port Number (PLC)

Set the port number of PLC in Host I/F Network tab.
The default is 10001.

MICRO/I Port Number

Set the port number of MICRO/I.
(Set this item in Host I/F Network tab.)If you set "0", the port number of MICRO/I is set automatically.

2. PLC Settings
Item

Setting

Transmission Parameters

Connection Parameters

IP Address

Set the IP address of PLC.

Subnet Mask

Set the subnet mask of PLC.

Default Gateway

Set the default gateway of PLC.

Local Port

Set the port number of PLC.

Node IP Address

Set the IP address of MICRO/I.*1

Node Port

Set the port number of MICRO/I. *2Connect TypeSet the TCP.

Protocol Type

Select "Extended MEMOBUS" protocol.

Code

Set the BIN.

*1 If the "Node IP Address" is set to "0.0.0.0", the connection is set in the "Unpassive Open mode". Any nodes in the network can access to the controller.
*2 To set the connection mode to "Unpassive Open mode", set 0 to "Node Port".

Please set up the head register by the side of the PLC as follows. Moreover, please give offset of each register as 0.
Module detailed setup“Setup of a slave I/F register”“Head REG”
“reading of an Inputs Status”
IW0000“reading of an Inputs Registers”
IW0000“reading/writing” of a Coil
MW00000“reading/writing” of a Holding Registers
MW00000

388

External Device Setup Manual

13 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION

13.5 Usable Devices
Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Coil

MB

MW

0 - 4095F

R/W*1

Inputs Status

IBIW

0 - FFFFF

R

Hexadecimal

2
2*1 Upper four digits: Register Number (decimal)
The lowest digit: Bit Number (hexadecimal)
Example:4095F 4095: Register Number, F: Bit Number2

Word Device
Device Name

2

Device Symbol

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Holding RegistersMWMW

0 - 65535

R/W

DecimalInputs Registers

IWIW

0 - FFFF

R

HexadecimalConnection to a PLC

Address Range

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual389

Chapter 2

14 KoyoSelecting DirectLogic 205/405 or DirectLogic (Ethernet) for the Host I/F Driver allows the user to use the 1: N Communication function.

• 1: N Communication function (Refer to Chapter 6 "1: N Communication (Multi-drop)" on page 653)
14.1 Connection Table
14.1.1 Compatible Protocols
System(CPU unit)

Link Unit

WindO/I-NV2, WindO/I-NV3 Settings
Interface

Flow Control

Host I/F DriverCommunication
DriverProduct Series
HG2G-5F, HG2G HG1F/ Touch
HG3G/4G -S/-5S 2F/ 2S/
3F/ 4F

DirectLogic 05
DL05

D0-ECOM
D0-ECOM100*1

Ethernet-

DirectLogic (Ethernet)

X

X

X

X

D0-ECOM
D0-ECOM100*1

Ethernet-

DirectLogic (Ethernet)

X

X

X

X

D2-ECOM
D2-ECOM-F
D2-ECOM100

Ethernet-

DirectLogic (Ethernet)

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

DirectLogic 06*1
DL06*1
DirectLogic 205
D2-240,
D2-250,
D2-250-1,
D2-260

RS232C
HardwareD2-240 (Port2)*1 Not required
D2-250 (Port1, 2), (connects to CPU unit) Connection Diagram 3(refer to P398)
D2-260 (Port1, 2)

DirectLogic 205/405

DirectLogic 405
D4-430,
D4-440*1

Not required
RS232C
Hardware(connects to CPU unit) Connection Diagram 1(refer to P393)

DirectLogic 205/405

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P395)
D4-440

D4-DCM

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P393)

D4-430
D4-440*1
D4-450

D4-DCM*1

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P393)

D4-ECOM,
D4-ECOM-F,
D4-ECOM100

Ethernet-

DirectLogic(Ethernet)*1 This PLC was used to test & verify communications.

390

External Device Setup Manual

14 Koyo

14.2 System Configuration
This is the system configuration for the connection of Koyo PLCs to the MICRO/I.

14.2.1

DirectLogic 405 (connects to CPU unit RS232C port)

2
MICRO/I
Touch

2

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1 (refer to P393)

2
D4-4402
DirectLogic 405 (connects to CPU unit RS422 port)
MICRO/I
Touch
RS422/485
Connection Diagram 2 (refer to P395)

Connection to a PLC

14.2.22
2
2

D4-4402
14.2.3

DirectLogic 405 (connects to DATA COMMUNICATIONS MODULE RS232C port)
MICRO/I
Touch

2

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P393)

2

D4-4402

D4-DCM

14.2.42

DirectLogic 205 (connects to CPU unit RS232C port)
MICRO/I
Touch
RS232C
Connection Diagram 3 (refer to P398)

22
2

DirectLogic 205

External Device Setup Manual391

Chapter 2

14.2.5 1: N Communication-DirectLogic 405(Connects to the general-purpose RS422 communication port on the CPU unit)
The 1: N communication can be established by using the following connection.
MICRO/I
Touch

RS422
Connection Diagram 2 (refer to P395)

...

PLC1

PLC2

PLC3

PLCn

14.2.6 DirectLogic Series (Ethernet)
MICRO/I
Touch
Ethernet

Direct LOGIC 05,
Direct LOGIC 06

D0-ECOM,
D0-ECOM100
MICRO/I
Touch
Ethernet

Direct LOGIC 205

D2-ECOM,
D2-ECOM-F,
D2-ECOM100
MICRO/I
Touch
Ethernet

Direct LOGIC 405

D4-ECOM,
D4-ECOM-F,
D4-ECOM100- Use a crossover cable to connect the MICRO/I and PLC directly.
- When using a hub (Ethernet switch), use a cable that can be used with the hub.

392

External Device Setup Manual

14 Koyo

14.3 Connection Diagram

For details regarding wiring and termination resistors, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page4.

14.3.1Connection Diagram 1: DirectLogic 405(connects to CPU unit RS232C port) to MICRO/I, Touch
D4-DCM (connects to DATA COMMUNICATIONS MODULE RS232C port) to MICRO/I, Touch22
2
2
Connection to a PLC22
2

D-sub, 25P socket connector (unit side)

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 25P socket connector (unit side)

Terminal222External Device Setup Manual393

Chapter 2

394

D-sub, 25P socket connector (unit side)

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P socket connector (unit side)

D-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P socket connector (unit side)

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

External Device Setup Manual

14 Koyo

14.3.2Connection Diagram 2: DirectLOFGIC 405 (connects to CPU unit RS422 port) to MICRO/I, Touch22
2
2
Connection to a PLC

2

D-sub, 25P socket connector (unit side)

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 25P socket connector (unit side)

Terminal

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control
to NONE.

2
2
2- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" onpage 4.

2- Touch has no pin number corresponding to TERM. When a termination resistor is necessary, insert one with suitable resistance value between pin 8 (RDA) and pin 9 (RDB).

External Device Setup Manual395

Chapter 2

D-sub, 25P socket connector (unit side)

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P socket connector (unit side)

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG1F, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control to NONE.

396

External Device Setup Manual

14 Koyo2222Connection to a PLC

2

D-sub, 25P socket connector (unit side)

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 25P socket connector (unit side)

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual397

Chapter 2

14.3.3398

Connection Diagram 3: Direct LOGIC 205 (connects to CPU unit RS232C port) to MICRO/I, Touch

6P modular connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug type6P modular connector socket type

Terminal

6P modular connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket type

External Device Setup Manual

14 Koyo2222D-sub, 25P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

6P modular connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2

6P modular connector socket typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual399

Chapter 2

14.4 Environment Settings
14.4.1 D4-440 CPU Unit Communication port
Items

Details

Interface

RS232C, RS422

Data representation

HEX mode

Slave Address

1 - 90(DEC).

Baud Rate (bps)9600 or 19200

Data Bits

8 (fixed)

ParityNone or Odd

Stop Bits

1 (fixed)

Flow Control

Hardware14.4.2 D4-DCM DATA COMMUNICATIONS MODULE
Items

Details

Interface

RS232C

Data representation

HEX mode

Slave Address

1 – 90(DEC)

Baud Rate (bps)9600 or 19200

Data Bits

8 (fixed)

ParityNone or Odd

Stop Bits

1 (fixed)

Flow Control

Hardware14.4.3 DirectLogic 205 CPU Unit Communication port

400

Items

Details

Interface

RS232C

Data representation

HEX mode

Slave Address

1 – 90(DEC)

Baud Rate (bps)9600

Data Bits

8 (fixed)

ParityNone or Odd

Stop Bits

1 (fixed)

Flow Control

HardwareExternal Device Setup Manual

14 Koyo

14.4.4

Ethernet Unit on DirectLogic

Set the following items on Configuration-System Setup-Project dialog box.
Item

Setting

IP Address (MICRO/I)

Set the IP adress of MICRO/I in Communication Interface tab.

Subnet Mask

Set the subnet mask of MICRO/I in Communication Interface tab.

Default Gateway

Set the default gateway of MICRO/I in Communication Interface tab.

IP Address (Ethernet Unit)

Set the IP adress of Ethernet unit in Host I/F Network tab.

Port Number (Ethernet Unit)

Set the port number of Ethernet unit in Host I/F Network tab.

2222Connection to a PLC

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual401Chapter 2

14.5 Usable Devices
14.5.1 DirectLogic 405
Bit Device
Device Name

402

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Input Points (Bit)X

X

0 - 1777R

8 (octal)

Output Points (Bit)YY

0 - 1777

R/W

8 (octal)

Control Relays (Bit)CC

0 - 3777

R/W

8 (octal)

Stages (Bit)SS

0 - 1777

R/W

8 (octal)

Timer Status (Bit)TST

0 - 377R

8 (octal)Counter Status (Bit)CSCT

0 - 377R

8 (octal)Remote In (Bit)GX

GX

0 - 3777

R/W

8 (octal)Remote Out (Bit)

GY

GY

0 - 3777

R/W

8 (octal)Special Relays (Bit)SPSP

0 - 777R

8 (octal)

External Device Setup Manual

14 Koyo

Word Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Input Points (Word)

XW

V

40400 - 40477

R

8 (octal)

Output Points (Word)

YW

V

40500 - 40577

R/W

8 (octal)

Control Relays (Word)

CW

V

40600 - 40777

R/W

8 (octal)

Stages (Word)

SW

V

41000 - 41077

R/W

8 (octal)Remote In (Word)

GXW

V

40000 - 40177

R/W

8 (octal)Remote Out (Word)

GYW

V

40200 - 40377

R/W

8 (octal)Special Relays (Word)

SPW

V

41200 - 41237

R

8 (octal)

Timer Values

TVV

0 - 377R/W

8 (octal)

CV

V

1000 - 1377

R/W

8 (octal)

Data Registers

DV

1400 - 7377

R/W

8 (octal)

System Parameters1

SR1

V

700 - 777R

8 (octal)

System Parameters2

SR2

V7400 - 7777

R

8 (octal)

Ext Registers

ER

V

10000 - 37777

R/W

8 (octal)222Connection to a PLC

Counter Values

2

2
2
2

- We confirm only D4-440 address range. Depending on the type of PLC that you will be using, the there are limits to theareas that can be used within the device ranges given above. Refer to the PLC manual for details.
- When selecting Bit Write, operation depends on the Configuration-System Setup-Project-Host I/F Driver whichhave an option to turn off all other bits in the byte or leave all other bits without change. Check or unchecked the checkbox for “Bit Write operation will write to a byte.” (Byte refers to 8 bits.)
Check: When executing Bit Write, all other bits in the byte are turned off.
Unchecked: When executing Bit Write, all other bits are not changed.
During Bit Write operation, the MICRO/I reads the byte data including the designated bit from the PLC, performs logicalAND or OR operation with the designated bit, and writes the result into the PLC, therefore all other bits in the byte are notchanged.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual403

Chapter 2

14.5.2 DirectLogic 205
Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Input Points (Bit)X

X

0 - 1777R

8 (octal)

Output Points (Bit)YY

0 - 1777

R/W

8 (octal)

Control Relays (Bit)CC

0 - 3777

R/W

8 (octal)

Stages (Bit)SS

0 - 1777

R/W

8 (octal)

Timer Status (Bit)TST

0 - 377R

8 (octal)Counter Status (Bit)CSCT

0 - 377R

8 (octal)Remote In (Bit)GX

GX

0 - 3777

R/W

8 (octal)Remote Out (Bit)

GY

GY

0 - 3777

R/W

8 (octal)Special Relays (Bit)SPSP

0 - 777R

8 (octal)

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
GradualWord Device
Device Name

Device Symbol
MICRO/I

PLC

Input Points (Word)

XW

V

40400 - 40477

R

8 (octal)

Output Points (Word)

YW

V

40500 - 40577

R/W

8 (octal)

Control Relays (Word)

CW

V

40600 - 40777

R/W

8 (octal)

Stages (Word)

SW

V

41000 - 41077

R/W

8 (octal)Remote In (Word)

GXW

V

40000 - 40177

R/W

8 (octal)Remote Out (Word)

GYW

V

40200 - 40377

R/W

8 (octal)Special Relays (Word)

SPW

V

41200 - 41237

R

8 (octal)

Timer Values

TVV

0 - 377R/W

8 (octal)Counter Values

CV

V

1000 - 1377

R/W

8 (octal)

Data Registers

DV

1400 - 7377

R/W

8 (octal)

System Parameters1

SR1

V

400 - 777R

8 (octal)

System Parameters2

SR2

V7400 - 7777

R

8 (octal)

Ext Registers

ER

V

10000 - 35777

R/W

8 (octal)- We confirm only DirectLogic 205 address range. Depending on the type of PLC that you will be using, the there are limits
to the areas that can be used within the device ranges given above. Refer to the PLC manual for details.
- When selecting Bit Write, operation depends on the Configuration-System Setup-Project-Host I/F Driver whichhave an option to turn off all other bits in the byte or leave all other bits without change. Check or unchecked the checkbox for “Bit Write operation will write to a byte.” (Byte refers to 8 bits.)
Check: When executing Bit Write, all other bits in the byte are turned off.
Unchecked: When executing Bit Write, all other bits are not changed.
During Bit Write operation, the MICRO/I reads the byte data including the designated bit from the PLC, performs logicalAND or OR operation with the designated bit, and writes the result into the PLC, therefore all other bits in the byte are notchanged.

404

External Device Setup Manual

14 Koyo

14.5.3

DirectLogic (Ethernet)

Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Input Points (Bit)X

X

0 - 1777

R

8

Output Points (Bit)YY

0 - 1777

R/W

8

Control Relays (Bit)CC

0 - 3777

R/W

8

Special Relays (Bit)SPSP

0 - 777R

8

Timers (Bit)TT

0 - 377

R

8

CT

CT

0 - 377R

8

Stages (Bit)SS

0 - 1777

R/W

8

Remote Input (Bit)GX

GX

0 - 3777

R/W

8

Remote Output (Bit)

GY

GY

0 - 3777

R/W

8

With a Bit Write operation, the word data is first read from the PLC, and a logic operation (AND or OR) is performed on
the relevant bit before writing it to the PLC to ensure that the values of other bits in the same channel are preserved.
However, be certain that the PLC does not modify the data in the channel during the time that the MICRO/I is writing thedata.
Word Device
Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Input Points (Word)

VX

V

40400 - 40477

R

8

Output Points (Word)

VY

V

40500 - 40577

R/W

8

Control Relays (Word)

VC

V

40600 - 40777

R/W

8

Special Relays (Word)

VSP

V

41200 - 41237

R

8

Timers (Word)

VT

V

41100 - 41117

R

8

Counters (Word)

VCTV

41140 - 41157

R

8Stages (Word)

VS

V

41000 - 41077

R/W

8

Timer Current Values

TAV

0 - 377R/W

8Counter Current Values

CTA

V

1000 - 1377

R/W

8

Data Words

VV

400 - 777
1200 - 7577
10000 - 35777

R/W

8

System parameters

VSYS

V

700 - 777
7400 - 7777
36000 - 37777

R

8

Remote Input (Word)

VGI

V

40000 - 40177

R/W

8

Remote Output (Word)

VGY

V40200 - 40377

R/W

8

External Device Setup Manual

2
2
2
2

Important points to note regarding setting performing Bit Write operations

Device Name

2

Connection to a PLC

Counters (Bit)

2

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

405

Chapter 2

15 FANUC
15.1 Connection Table
15.1.1 Compatible PLCs
System (CPU unit)

Link Unit

WindO/I-NV2 Settings
Interface

Flow
Control

Host I/F Driver

Product Series
HG2G-5F, HG2G HG1F/
HG3G/4G -S/-5S 2F/ 2S/
3F/ 4F

Touch

Power MatePower Mate-MODEL D*1

Not required RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 1(refer to P408)

Hardware Power Mate-MODEL D/Series 16i

X

X

X

---

Not required RS232C
Connection Diagram 2(refer to P413)

Hardware Power Mate-MODEL D/Series 16i

X

X

X

---

Series16i, 160i*1
18i, 180i,
30i, 31i*1, 32i*1 This PLC was used to test & verify communications.

406

External Device Setup Manual

15 FANUC

15.2 System Configuration
This is the system configuration for the connection of FANUC PLCs to the MICRO/I.

15.2.1

Power Mate-MODEL D

2
MICRO/I2

RS422
Connection Diagram 1 (refer to P408)

2
2Power Mate-MODEL D

15.2.2

2
2

Series 16i, 160i, 18i, 180i, 30i, 31i, 32i
MICRO/I
RS232C
Connection Diagram 2 (refer to P413)

Connection to a PLC

A touch-panel connection module (FANUC A20B-2902-0470) is needed for Power Mate-MODEL D.

2
2
2

Series 16i, 160i, 18i, 180i, 30i, 31i, 32i

2A touch-panel connection module is needed for Series 16i, 160i, 18i, 180i, 30i, 31i, 32i.
For details, please contact FANUC LTD.

2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual407

Chapter 2

15.3 Connection Diagram

For details regarding wiring and termination resistors, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page4.

15.3.1 Connection Diagram 1: Power Mate-MODEL D to MICRO/I

PCR-E20FS(HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD)408

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

External Device Setup Manual

15 FANUC2222Connection to a PLC

2

PCR-E20FS(HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD)

Terminal- Connect a terminus unit to JD15 by the side of PowerMate. Refer to the manual of PowerMate-MODEL D for the details
about a terminus unit.
- FG terminal of the main part of a motion controller should perform the 3rd-sort grounding.

222- Ground a shield by the cable clamp.
- When you use the Terminal Block type of HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control to NONE.

2
2

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor,
use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page
4.

2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual409

Chapter 2

PCR-E20FS (HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD)

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

PCR-E20FS (HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD)

Terminal- Connect a terminus unit to JD15 by the side of PowerMate. Refer to the manual of PowerMate-MODEL D for the details
about a terminus unit.
- FG terminal of the main part of a motion controller should perform the 3rd-sort grounding.
- Ground a shield by the cable clamp.
- When you use the Terminal Block type of HG1F, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control to NONE.

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

410

External Device Setup Manual

15 FANUC2222Connection to a PLC

2

PCR-E20FS(HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD)

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

- Connect a terminus unit to JD15 by the side of PowerMate. Refer to the manual of PowerMate-MODEL D for the details
about a terminus unit.
- FG terminal of the main part of a motion controller should perform the 3rd-sort grounding.

222- Ground a shield by the cable clamp.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual411

Chapter 2

PCR-E20FS(HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD)

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

- Connect a terminus unit to JD15 by the side of PowerMate. Refer to the manual of PowerMate-MODEL D for the details
about a terminus unit.
- FG terminal of the main part of a motion controller should perform the 3rd-sort grounding.
- Ground a shield by the cable clamp.

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

412

External Device Setup Manual

15 FANUC

15.3.2Connection Diagram 2: Series 16i, 160i, 18i, 180i, 30i, 31i, 32i to MICRO/I22
22
Connection to a PLC

2

PCR-E20FS(HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD)

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2

PCR-E20FS(HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD)

Terminal2222External Device Setup Manual413

Chapter 2

414

PCR-E20FS(HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD)

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

PCR-E20FS(HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD)

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

External Device Setup Manual

15 FANUC2222
D-sub, 37P connector plug type

Connection to a PLC

PCR-E20FS(HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD)

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual415

Chapter 2

15.4 Environment Settings
15.4.1 Power Mate-MODEL D
Items

Details

Interface

RS422 4-wireSlave Address

0 (Fixed)

Baud Rate (bps)19200 (Fixed)

Data Bits

8 (Fixed)

ParityEven (Fixed)

Stop Bits

1 (Fixed)

15.4.2 Series 16i, 160i, 18i, 180i, 30i, 31i, 32i
Items

416

Details

Interface

RS232C

Slave Address

0 (Fixed)

Baud Rate (bps)19200 (Fixed)

Data Bits

8 (Fixed)

ParityEven (Fixed)

Stop Bits

1 (Fixed)

External Device Setup Manual

15 FANUC

15.5 Usable Devices
15.5.1

Power Mate-MODEL D, Series 16i, 160i, 18i, 180i, 30i, 31i, 32i

Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Input Relay

X

X

0 - 99997

R/W*1

Output RelayYY

0 - 99997

R/W*1

Int. Relay

RR

0 - 99997

R/W*1

Keep Relay

KK

0 - 99997

R/W*1

Expansion Relay

EE

0 - 99997

R/W

*1

2
2
2
2
Connection to a PLC

2*1 Please specify following ranges.

22

Word Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual2
2

MICRO/I

PLC

Input Relay

XW

X

0 - 9998

R/W

Dec *1

Output Relay

YW

Y

0 - 9998

R/W

Dec*1

Int. Relay

RW

R

0 - 9998

R/W

Dec *1

Keep Relay

KW

K

0 - 9998

R/W

Dec*1

Timer

T

T

0 - 9998

R/W

Dec *1CounterCC

0 - 9998

R/W

Dec*1

Data Table

DD

0 - 9998

R/W

Dec *1

Expansion Relay

EW

E

0 - 9998

R/W

Dec*1

*1 Word device address increase +2.

The devices and the device ranges may vary based upon on the PLC model. Please refer to the PLC manual for details.

2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual417

Chapter 2

16 YOKOGAWA
16.1 Connection Table
16.1.1 Compatible PLCs
System (CPU unit)

Link Unit

WindO/I-NV2, WindO/I-NV3 Settings
Interface

Flow
ControProduct Series

Host I/F Driver HG2G-5F, HG2G HG1F/ Touch
Communication HG3G/4G -S/-5S 2F/ 2S/
Driver
3F/ 4F

FA-M3
FA-M3(F3SP05, F3SP20,
F3SP21*1, F3SP25,
F3SP30, F3SP35,
F3SP38,F3SP53,
F3SP58,F3FP36,
F3BP20, F3BP30)

F3LC11-1N*1

RS232C
HardwareConnection Diagram 1(refer to P421)

F3LC11-2N*1

RS422/485 4-wire
None
Connection Diagram 2(refer to P423)

FA-M3(F3SP05,F3SP21*1,
F3SP25, F3SP28,
F3SP35,F3SP38,
F3SP53, F3SP58)

Not required

RS232C
HardwareConnection Diagram 3(refer to P426)

FA-M3(F3SP05-0P,
F3SP08-0P
F3SP21-0N
F3SP22-0S
F3SP25-2N
F3SP28-3N/3S
F3SP35-5N
F3SP38-6N/-6S
F3SP53-4H/-4S
F3SP58-6H/-6S
F3SP59-7S
F3SP66-4S
F3SP67-6S
F3SP71-4N
F3SP76-7N)

F3LE01-5T/-0T,
Ethernet
F3LE11-0T, F3LE12-0T

FA-M3(F3SP66-4S
F3SP67-6S
F3SP71-4N
F3SP76-7N)

Not required

-

FA-M3

X

X

X

---

FA-M3(Ethernet)

X

X

X

X

*1 This PLC was used to test & verify communications.

418

External Device Setup Manual16 YOKOGAWA

16.2 System Configuration
This is the system configuration for the connection of YOKOGAWA PLCs to the MICRO/I.

16.2.1

FA-M3 (Serial)
FA-M3

2
F3LC11-1N

MICRO/I

2

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P421)

2
2

F3SP05, F3SP20,
F3LC11-2N

MICRO/I

F3SP30, F3SP35,
F3SP38, F3SP53,

RS485
Connection Diagram 2

F3SP58, F3FP36,

Connection to a PLC

F3SP21, F3SP25,

2
2(refer to P423)

F3BP20, F3BP30,

2
2

We recommend F3LC11-2N side to carry a “4-WIRE” setup of the terminus resistance (TERMINATOR) in long-distancetransmission.
FA-M3

YOKOGAWA cable

RS232C

KM10-0C

Connection Diagram 3(refer to P426)

MICRO/I22
2
2

F3SP05, F3SP21,
F3SP25, F3SP28,
F3SP35, F3SP38,

YOKOGAWA cable
KM11-2N*A

F3SP53, F3SP58,

It connects with the port for programming tools of a CPU unit.

22
2

It does not correspond to “CPU direct connection system” of F3SP20 and F3SP30.

External Device Setup Manual419

Chapter 2

16.2.2 FA-M3 (Ethernet)
FA-M3

MICRO/I
Touch
Ethernet

F3SP05-0P, F3SP08-0P
F3SP21-0N, F3SP22-0S

F3LE01-5T/-0T

F3SP25-2N, F3SP28-3N/3S

F3LE11-0T

F3SP35-5N, F3SP38-6N/-6S

F3LE12-0T

F3SP53-4H/-4S, F3SP58-6H/-6S
F3SP59-7S, F3SP66-4S
F3SP67-6S, F3SP71-4N
F3SP76-7N

FA-M3

MICRO/I
Touch
Ethernet

F3SP66-4S
F3SP67-6S
F3SP71-4N
F3SP76-7N

420

External Device Setup Manual16 YOKOGAWA

16.3 Connection Diagram

16.3.1

The connector types given in the Connection Diagrams are for the unit and not the cable. For details regarding wiring, refer
to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2

Connection Diagram 1: FA-M3 F3LC11-1N - MICRO/I2
2
2
Connection to a PLC22
2

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Terminal22External Device Setup Manual421

Chapter 2

422

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

External Device Setup Manual16 YOKOGAWA

16.3.2Connection Diagram 2: FA-M3 F3LC11-2N - MICRO/I22
2
2
D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Connection to a PLC

Screw terminal block

2
2
2
2
2

Screw terminal block

Terminal

2- In MICRO/I and PLC, the name of A pole and B pole is reverse.
- When you use the Terminal Block type of HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control to NONE.

2
2

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor,
use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page
4.

2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual423

Chapter 2

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Screw terminal block

Terminal- In MICRO/I and PLC, the name of A pole and B pole is reverse.
- When you use the Terminal Block type of HG1F, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control to NONE.

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

424

External Device Setup Manual16 YOKOGAWA

22
22
Connection to a PLC

2Screw terminal block

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

In MICRO/I and PLC, the name of A pole and B pole is reverse.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

In MICRO/I and PLC, the name of A pole and B pole is reverse.

222There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

External Device Setup Manual425

Chapter 2

16.3.3 Connection Diagram 3: FA-M3 - MICRO/I

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug typeThis figure shows the connection diagram when using the cable (KM10-0C) from YOKOGAWA.

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

TerminalThis figure shows the connection diagram when using the cable (KM10-0C) from YOKOGAWA.

426

External Device Setup Manual16 YOKOGAWA

222
D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

This figure shows the connection diagram when using the cable (KM10-0C) from YOKOGAWA.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket typeThis figure shows the connection diagram when using the cable (KM10-0C) from YOKOGAWA.

2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual427

Chapter 2

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 37P connector plug typeThis figure shows the connection diagram when using the cable (KM10-0C) from YOKOGAWA.

428

External Device Setup Manual16 YOKOGAWA

16.4 Environment Settings
16.4.1YOKOGAWA FA-M3 - Link Unit (F3LC11-1N, F3LC112N) to MICRO/I Setting

Items

Details

Interface

Use the same

CPU Number

settings as for the MICRO/I.

01(0x01 -4(0x04)

Station Number

01(DEC)Baud Rate (bps)9600 or 19200

Data Bits

7 or 8
Odd, Even or None

Stop Bits

1 or 2Sum check

EnableTerminus character specification

EnableProtection function

DisableYOKOGAWA FA-M3 CPU (Programming tool port) to MICRO/I Setting

Items

Details

Interface

Use the same

RS232C

Station Number

settings as for the MICRO/I.

01(DEC)(Fixed)

Baud Rate (bps)9600 or 19200

Data Bits

8 (Fixed)

ParityEven or None

Stop Bits

1 (Fixed)

Sum check

EnableTerminus character specification

Enable16.4.3

When connecting with the Yokogawa FA-M3 via Ethernet

Item

Setting

IP Address (MICRO/I)

Set the IP address of MICRO/I in Communication Interface tab.

Subnet Mask

Set the subnet mask of MICRO/I in Communication Interface tab.

Default Gateway

Set the default gateway of MICRO/I in Communication Interface tab.

IP Address (PLC)

Set the IP address of CPU Unit or Link Unit in Host I/F Network tab.

Port Number (PLC)

Set the IP address of CPU Unit or Link Unit in Host I/F Network tab.

CPU Number

Set the slot number of the CPU Unit to communicate with in Host I/F Network tab.

222Connection to a PLC

Parity16.4.22

RS232C, RS485 4-wire

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual429

Chapter 2

16.5 Usable Devices
16.5.1 FA-M3 (Serial)
Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Input Relay

X

X

201 - 71664

R*1

Output Relay

YY

201 - 71664

R/W

*1

Int. RelayII

1 - 65536

R/W

Dec

Comm. Relay

EE

1 - 4096

R/W

Dec

Link Relay

LL

1 - 78192

R/W*2

Spec. Relay

M

M

1 - 9984

R/W

Dec

Timer Relay

TU

T

1 - 3072

R

Dec

Counter Relay

CUC

1 - 3072R

Dec*1 Please specify in the following ranges.

*2 Please specify in the following ranges.

430

External Device Setup Manual16 YOKOGAWA

Word Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

PLC

Input Relay

XW

X

201 - 71649

R*1

Output Relay

YW

Y

201 - 71649

R/W

*1

Int. RelayIWI

1 - 65521

R/W

Dec

Comm. Relay

EW

E

1 - 4081

R/W

Dec

Link Relay

LW

L

1 - 78177

R/W*2

Spec. Relay

MWM

1 - 9969

R/W

Dec

Timer (Current Value)TPT

1 - 3072

R/W

Dec

Timer (Preset Value)TST

1 - 3072

R

Dec

Counter (Current Value)CPC

1 - 3072

R/W

Dec

Counter (Preset Value)CSC

1 - 3072

R

Dec

Data RegisterDD

1 - 65536

R/W

Dec

Comm. RegisterRR

1 - 4096

R/W

Dec

File RegisterBB

1 - 99999

R/W

Dec

Link RegisterWW

1 - 74096

R/W*3

Spec. RegisterZZ

1 - 1024

R/W

Dec*1 Please specify in the following ranges.

2222Connection to a PLC

MICRO/I

2
2
2
2
2
2

*2 Please specify in the following ranges.

222*3 Please specify in the following ranges.

22External Device Setup Manual431

Chapter 2

16.5.2 FA-M3 (Ethernet)
Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Input Relay (bit)X

X

00201 - 71664

R

Dec*1

Output Relay (bit)YY

00201 - 71664

R/W

Dec*1

Int. Relay (bit)I

I

00001 - 65536

R/W

Dec

Comm. Relay (bit)E

E0001 - 4096

R/W

Dec

Link Relay (bit)L

L

00001 - 78192

R/W

Dec*2

Timer Relay (bit)TU

T

0001 - 3072

R/W

Dec

Counter Relay (bit)CU

C

0001 - 3072

R/W

Dec

Spec. Relay (bit)M

M

0001 - 9984

R/W

Dec

*1 Please specify in the following ranges.

*2 Please specify in the following ranges.

432

External Device Setup Manual16 YOKOGAWA

Word Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

PLC

Input Relay (word)

XW

X00201 - 71649

R

Dec*1

Output Relay (word)

YW

Y

00201 - 71649

R/W

Dec*1

Int. Relay (word)

IW

I

00001 - 65521

R/W

Dec

Comm. Relay (word)

EW

E

0001 - 4081

R/W

Dec

Link Relay (word)

LW

L

00001 - 78177

R/W

Dec*2

Timer (Current Value)TPT

0001 - 3072

R

Dec

Counter (Current Value)CP

C

0001 - 3072

R

Dec

Timer (Preset Value)TS

T

0001 - 3072

R/W

Dec

Counter (Preset Value)CS

C

0001 - 3072

R/W

Dec

Data Register

D

D

00001 - 65535

R/W

Dec

Link Register

W

W

00001 - 78192

R/W

Dec*3

File Register

B

B

00001 - 262144

R/W

Dec

Spec. Relay

MW

M

0001 - 9969

R/W

Dec

Spec. Register

Z

Z

0001 - 1024

R/W

Dec

Comm. Register

R

R

0001 - 4096

R/W

Dec

Index Register

VV

001 - 256

R/W

Dec

Cache registerF

F

000001 - 524288

R/W

Dec

*1 Please specify in the following ranges.

2222Connection to a PLC

MICRO/I

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

*2 Please specify in the following ranges.

222*3 Please specify in the following ranges.

2

External Device Setup Manual433

Chapter 2

17 INVERTER
17.1 Connection Table
17.1.1 Compatible Mitsubishi Inverters
SystemWindO/I-NV2 Settings
Interface

Product Series

Flow Control

Host I/F Driver

None

FREQROL

HG2G-5F,
HG3G/4G

HG2G-S/-5S

HG1F/
2F/ 2S/
3F/ 4F

Touch

X

X

X

---

FREQROL
FREQROL-E500*1
FREQROL-S500*1

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 1(refer to P435)*1 This PLC was used to test & verify communications.

17.2 System Configuration
This is the system configuration for the connection of a Mitsubishi inverter with the MICRO/I.

17.2.1 Mitsubishi
MICRO/I
RS485
PU
Connector

Connection Diagram 1(refer to P435)

For details including the connection procedures, refer to the instruction manual provided with the Mitsubishi inverter.

434

External Device Setup Manual

17 INVERTER

17.3 Connection Diagram

The connector types given in the Connection Diagrams are for the unit and not the cable.

17.3.1Connection diagram 1: Mitsubishi inverter PU connector to MICRO/I22
22
Connection to a PLC

2
2

PU connector

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2

PU connector

Terminal

2
There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor,
use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page
4.

2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual435

Chapter 2

PU connector

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

PU connector

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

436

External Device Setup Manual

17 INVERTER22
2
2
Connection to a PLC

2

PU connector

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2

PU connector

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual437

Chapter 2

17.4 Environment Settings
The following shows the settings of the communication port for performing communications between the Mitsubishi inverter
FREQROL series and MICRO/I.

17.4.1 Environment settings for connecting the device to a Mitsubishi inverter
Items

Details

Interface

Use the same

RS485 4-wireInverter No.

settings as for the MICRO/I.

01 - 31

Baud Rate (bps)4800, 9600 or 19200

Data Bits

7 or 8Stop Bits

1/2

ParityOdd, Even or None

Ignore Write Error

Enable or Disable *1

Terminator

CR only

Communication check time interval

Set to a value other than “0”.

*1 When you check “Ignore Write Error.” MICRO/I don’t display “Host communication Error” even if the Inverter returns NAK Error response.

MICRO/I set the error code from the inverter to LSD 112.

438

External Device Setup Manual

17 INVERTER

17.5 Usable Devices
Word Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteMICRO/I

PLC

ParameterPP

0 - 999

R/W

Parameter 37

P37

P

0-1

R/W

Operation mode

OP

OP

0

R/W

Output frequency

OF

OF

0

R

OC

OC

0

R

OV

OV

0

R

Alarm description (1, 2)

E12

E12

0

R

Alarm description (3, 4)

E34

E34

0

R

Alarm description (5, 6)

E56

E56

0

R

Alarm description (7, 8)

E78

E78

0

R

Run command

RC

RC

0

R/W

2

*1*2

2

*3

2
2
Connection to a PLC

Output current
Output voltage

Address
Gradual2*4

Inverter status monitor

ISM

ISM

0

R

Set frequency read (RAM)

SFRR

SFRR

0

R

*3

Set frequency read (E2PROM)

SFRE

SFRE

0

R

*3

Set frequency write (RAM)

SFWR

SFWR

0

R/W

*3 *4

Set frequency write (E2PROM)

SFWE

SFWE

0

R/W

*3 *4

Inverter reset

IR

IR

0

R/W

*4

Alarm definition batch clear

EC

EC

0

R/W

*4

All parameter clear

PACL

PACL

0

R/W

*4

Link parameter expansion setting

LPES

LPES

0

R/W

*5

Second parameter changing

SPC

SPC

0

R/W

*1 Use this device for parameter 37.
*2 This device is handled as a 32-bit device by combining addresses 0 and 1.
*3 This Device is only available for 4 digits data.
*4 Only the write data becomes valid on this device. When used for display, the device always becomes “0”.
*5 The Link parameter expansion setting may be changed from the MICRO/I for reading and writing parameters.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

For details regarding parameters and write data, refer to the instruction manual provided with the Mitsubishi inverter.

2

External Device Setup Manual439

Chapter 2

18 FUJI
18.1 Connection Table
18.1.1 Compatible PLCs
System (CPUunit)

Link Unit

WindO/I-NV2, WindO/I-NV3 Settings
Interface

Product Series

FlowControl

Host I/F Driver HG2G-5F, HG2G HG1F/ Touch
Communication HG3G/4G -S/-5S 2F/ 2S/
Driver
3F/ 4F

None

FLEX-PC(CPU)

FLEX-PC
NB1, NB2, NB3, Not required
NJ-CPU-E4,(Connects to CPU unit)
NJ-CPU-A8*1,
NJ-CPU-B16,
NS
NB1,
NB2,
NB3

NB-RS1-AC/DC

RS232C
Connection Diagram 2(refer to P450)
RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 1(refer to P447)
RS232C
Connection Diagram 3(refer to P452)

None/
FLEX-PC
Hardware (LINK)

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 4(refer to P454)
NJ-CPU-E4,
NJ-CPU-A8*1,
NJ-CPU-B16

NJ-RS2*1,
NJ-RS4*1

RS232C
Connection Diagram 3(refer to P452)
RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 4(refer to P454)

NS

NS-RS1

RS232C
Connection Diagram 3(refer to P452)
RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 4(refer to P454)

440

External Device Setup Manual

X

X

X

---

18 FUJI

System (CPUunit)

Link Unit

WindO/I-NV2, WindO/I-NV3 Settings
Interface

Flow
Control

Product Series

Host I/F Driver HG2G-5F, HG2G HG1F/ Touch
Communication HG3G/4G -S/-5S 2F/ 2S/
Driver
3F/ 4F

MICREX-F
None

MICREX-F

X

X

X

2

---

F55

NV1L-RS2

RS232C
Connection Diagram 5(refer to P457)

F70

NC1L-RS2

RS232C
Connection Diagram 5(refer to P457)

2

NC1L-RS4

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 6(refer to P460)

2

F80H,
F120H,F120S,F140S,F150S

FFU120B

RS232C
Connection Diagram 5(refer to P457)

F30, F50, F50H,
F55, F60,
F70, F70S,
F80H*1, F81,
F120H, F120S,
F140S, F150S,
F250

FFK120A-C10*1

2

Connection to a PLC

2

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 6(refer to P460)

2

RS232C
Connection Diagram 5(refer to P457)

2

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 6(refer to P460)

2MICREX-SXNP1PH-08,
NP1PH-16,
NP1PS-32,
NP1PS-32R,
NP1PS-74R,
NP1PS-117R,
NP1PS-245R,
NP1PS-74D,
NP1PM-48R,
NP1PM-48E,
NP1PM-256E,
NP1PM-256H,
NP1PU-048E*1,
NP1PU-256E

Not required(Connect to CPU unit
loader connection connector)
FUJI NP4H-CB2+ NW0H-CNV

RS232C
None
Connection Diagram 7(refer toP463)

NP1L-RS1*1

RS232C
Connection Diagram 8(refer to
P465)

MICREX-SX

X

X

X

---

2
2

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 9(refer toP467)
NP1L-RS2

RS232C
Connection Diagram 8(refer toP465)

NP1L-RS4

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 9(refer to
P467)

2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual441

Chapter 2

System (CPUunit)

Link Unit

WindO/I-NV2, WindO/I-NV3 Settings
Interface

NP1PH-08,
NP1PH-16,
NP1PS-32,
NP1PS-32R,
NP1PS-74R,
NP1PS-117R,
NP1PS-245R,
NP1PS-74D,
NP1PM-48R,
NP1PM-256H

NP1L-ET1

NP1PM-48E,
NP1PM-256E,
NP1PU-048E*1,
NP1PU-256E

Not required(Connect to the
Ethernet Port)

Ethernet

Flow
Control-

Host I/F Driver HG2G-5F, HG2G HG1F/ Touch
Communication HG3G/4G -S/-5S 2F/ 2S/
Driver
3F/ 4F
MICREX-SX(Ethernet)

NP1L-ET1*1 This PLC was used to test & verify communications.

442

Product Series

External Device Setup Manual

X

X

X

X

18 FUJI

18.2 System Configuration
This is the system configuration for the connection of FUJI PLCs to the MICRO/I.

18.2.1FLEX-PC Series (Loader Port)
FREX-PC

2

RS485
Connection Diagram 1 (refer to P447)

MICRO/I

2
NN-XONV1

RS232C
Connection Diagram 22(refer to P450)

2
FLEX-PC Series (Interface Module)

2• NB Series
FREX-PC-NB

Connection to a PLC

18.2.2

NB-RS1-AC/DC

RS232C
Connection Diagram 3

MICRO/I2(refer to P452)

2

RS485
Connection Diagram 42(refer to P454)• NJ Series
FREX-PC-NJ

NJ-RS2

RS232C
Connection Diagram 3

MICRO/I2(refer to P452)

2
2
NJ-RS4

RS485
Connection Diagram 4

MICRO/I2(refer to P454)

2• NS Series
FREX-PC-NS

2
NB-RS1

RS232C
Connection Diagram 3(refer to P452)

MICRO/I2

RS485
Connection Diagram 4(refer to P454)

External Device Setup Manual443

Chapter 2

18.2.3 MICREX-F Series (Interface Card)• F55
MICREX-F F55

NV1L-RS2

RS232C
Connection Diagram 5

MICRO/I(refer to P457)• F70
NC1L-RS2

RS232C
Connection Diagram 5

MICRO/I(refer to P457)

MICREX-F F70

NC1L-RS4

RS485 4-wireConnection Diagram 6

MICRO/I(refer to P460)• F80H/F120H/F120S/F140S/F150S
MICREX-F

FFU-120B

MICRO/I
RS232C
Connection Diagram 5(refer to P457)

MICREX-F

FFU-120B

MICRO/I
RS485 4-wireConnection Diagram 6(refer to P460)

444

External Device Setup Manual

18 FUJI

18.2.4

MICREX-F Series (Interface Module)• F30/F50/F50H/F55/F60/F70/F70S/F80H/F81/F120H/F120S/F140S/F150S
MICREX-F F80H

FFK120A-C10MICRO/I
RS232C
Connection Diagram 5(refer to P457)

MICREX-F F80H

FFK120A-C10

2
2

MICRO/I
RS485 4-wireConnection Diagram 622(refer to P460)

Connection to a PLC

218.2.5

MICREX-SX Series (Connect to the CPU unit loader connection connector)

MICREX-SX

FUJI
NP4H-CB2 + NW0H-CNV

RS232C
Connection Diagram 7

MICRO/I(refer to P463)

22
2

18.2.6

MICREX-SX Series (Interface Module)

MICREX-SX

NP1L-RS1

MICRO/I
RS232C
Connection Diagram 82(refer to P465)

2

RS485 4-wireConnection Diagram 9 (refer to P467)
MICREX-SX

NP1L-RS2

2

MICRO/I
RS232C
Connection Diagram 822(refer to P465)

2
MICREX-SX

NP1L-RS4

MICRO/I
RS485 4-wireConnection Diagram 92(refer to P467)

External Device Setup Manual445

Chapter 2

18.2.7 MICREX-SX Series (Connect to the CPU unit Ethernet Port)• NP1PM-48E / NP1PM-256E / NP1PU-048E / NP1PU-256E
MICRO/I
Touch

MICREX-SX
Ethernet (TCP/IP)

18.2.8 MICREX-SX Series (Ethernet Module)
MICREX-SXMICRO/I
Touch

NP1L-ET1
Ethernet (TCP/IP)

446

External Device Setup Manual

18 FUJI

18.3 Connection Diagram

18.3.1

The connector types given in the Connection Diagrams are for the unit and not the cable. For details regarding wiring, refer
to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2

Connection Diagram 1: FLEX-PC series (Loader Port) - MICRO/I2
2
2
Connection to a PLC

2
2

Modular jack 8 Pin

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2

Modular jack 8 Pin

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor,
use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page
4.

2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual447

Chapter 2

Modular jack 8 Pin

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Modular jack 8 Pin

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

448

External Device Setup Manual

18 FUJI22
2
2
Connection to a PLC

2Modular jack 8 Pin

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2

Modular jack 8 Pin

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.
Connector Pin Layout for PLC side Modular jack

2
2
2
2

1

8

External Device Setup Manual449

Chapter 2

18.3.2 Connection Diagram 2: FLEX-PC series (Loader Port) + NN-CONV1 - MICRO/I

450

D-sub, 25P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 25P connector plug type

Terminal

D-sub, 25P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector socket type

External Device Setup Manual

18 FUJI222
2
D-sub, 25P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

D-sub, 25P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 25P connector plug typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual451

Chapter 2

18.3.3 Connection Diagram 3: FLEX-PC Series (Link Module RS232C Port) - MICRO/I

452

D-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type

Terminal

D-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket type

External Device Setup Manual

18 FUJI222
2
D-sub, 25P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual453

Chapter 2

18.3.4 Connection Diagram 4: FLEX-PC Series (Link Module RS485 Port) - MICRO/I

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Screw terminal block

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor,
use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page
4.

454

External Device Setup Manual

18 FUJI22
2
2
Connection to a PLC

2Screw terminal block

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

2
2
2
2

Screw terminal block

Terminal

2

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual455

Chapter 2

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

456

External Device Setup Manual

18 FUJI

18.3.5Connection Diagram 5: MICREX - F Series (RS232C Port) - MICRO/I22
22
Connection to a PLC

2

D-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

Terminal2222External Device Setup Manual457

Chapter 2

458

D-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type

External Device Setup Manual

18 FUJI22
2
2
Connection to a PLC

2

D-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual459

Chapter 2

18.3.6 Connection Diagram 6: MICREX-F Series (RS485 Port) - MICRO/I

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Screw terminal block

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor,
use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page
4.

460

External Device Setup Manual

18 FUJI22
2
2
Connection to a PLC

2Screw terminal block

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

2
2
2
2

Screw terminal block

Terminal

2

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual461

Chapter 2

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

462

External Device Setup Manual

18 FUJI

18.3.7

Connection Diagram 7: MICREX-SX series (Loader connection connector)

22
2
2
D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Connection to a PLC

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Terminal22222
D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket type

External Device Setup Manual463

Chapter 2

464

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

External Device Setup Manual

18 FUJI

18.3.8Connection Diagram 8: MICREX-SX series (RS232C Port)22
2
2
D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Connection to a PLC

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Terminal

2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket type

External Device Setup Manual465

Chapter 2

466

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

External Device Setup Manual

18 FUJI

18.3.9Connection Diagram 9: MICREX-SX series (RS485 Port)22
2
2
D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Connection to a PLC

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor,
use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page
4.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual467

Chapter 2

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug type

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

468

External Device Setup Manual

18 FUJI22
2
2
Connection to a PLC

2

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual469

Chapter 2

18.4 Environment Settings
Allowed communication settings for FLEX-PC, MICREX-F and MICREX-SX are as follows.

18.4.1 FLEX-PC (CPU)
FUJI FLEX-PC (CPU) to MICRO/I settings
Items

Details

Interface

RS232C, RS485 4-wire

Baud Rate (bps)

Use the same

Data Bits

settings as for the MICRO/I.

19200
8

Stop Bits

1

ParityOdd

Flow Control

None18.4.2 FLEX-PC (Link)
FUJI FLEX-PC (Link Module) to MICRO/I settings
Items

Details

Interface
Operation Modes

RS232CBaud Rate (bps)

Use the same

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200

Data Bits

settings as for the MICRO/I.

7 or 8Stop Bits

1 or 2

ParityNone, Odd or Even

Flow Control

None or Hardware

Station Number-*1 Set up the mode switch of Interface Module as below.
RS232C: Mode switch is No.1.
RS485:Mode switch is No.3.

Refer to the FLEX-PC user’s manual for the details of communication setting.

470

RS485 4-wireCommand-setting-type start-stop synchronization non sequenced
format*1

External Device Setup Manual0-99(DEC)

18 FUJI• FLEX-PC Communication Setting
When you would like to set up the communication setting with the initialization file, refer to the following setup.
Set up item of 4, 5, 6, and 7 as well as MICRO/I settings.

No
.

Item

0

1

Transmission type

Nonsequenced
format2

Mode

3

Received Message No.

4

Baud Rate

5

Data bit size

7

8

6

Parity bit

None

Odd

7

Stop bit size

1

8

DCE/DTE mode

DTE

9

CTS/RTS control

ConstantlyON

10

DSR/DTR control

11

Transmission conditions

2

2400

4800

Even
2

9600

19200

2
Connection to a PLC

16Start code17

End code

18

Start code 1,20

19

End code 1,2

0

20

BCC

24

7

2
2
2
2

Received data byte
size

Code

6

None

15

23

5

2

Constantly
ON

Code conversion

Position (range)

4

2

1200

14

Calculation formula

30Transmission code

222

Setting

13

21

1

JIS

2

Yes
0

2

STX
CR

2
2

Setting1
TEXT
EOR
Transmission
code

2
2

Timer

2

External Device Setup Manual471

Chapter 2

18.4.3 MICREX-F Interface Card/ Module
Items

Details

Interface
Operation Modes

RS232CBaud Rate (bps)

Use the same

1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200

Data Bits

settings as for the MICRO/I.

7/8*2

Stop Bits

1/2*2

ParityNone/Odd/Even*2

Flow Control

None/Hardware

Station Number

0*1 Set up the mode switch of Interface Card/Module as below.
RS232C:Mode switch is No.1.
RS485: Mode switch is No.3.
*2 Set Character configuration switch to the following.

Switch Number

Configuration

8

Clear method

By switch

7

Parity bit ON/OFF

Same as MICRO/I

6

Parity bit Odd/Even

Same as MICRO/I

5

Data bitSame as MICRO/I

4

Stop bitSame as MICRO/I

Refer to the MICREX-F user’s manual for the details of communication setting

472

RS485 4-wireCommand-setting-type start-stop synchronization non sequenced
format*1

External Device Setup Manual

0 – 99(DEC)18 FUJI

18.4.4

MICREX-SX series (connecting to the CPU unit loader connection connector or using the Interface Module.)

Items

Details

Interface

RS232C, RS485

Baud Rate (bps)

Use the same

38400

Data Bits

settings as for the MICRO/I.

8

Stop Bits

1

ParityEven

Flow Control

None- The communication settings are fixed.

RS232C: Mode switch is No.1.or No.3
RS485:Mode switch is No.2.or No.3.

18.4.5

MICREX-SX series (connecting to the Ethernet port or using the Ethernet module.)

1. MICRO/I settings
Item

Setting

IP Address (MICRO/I)

Set the IP address of MICRO/I in Communication Interface tab.

Subnet Mask

Set the subnet mask of MICRO/I in Communication Interface tab.

Default Gateway

Set the default gateway of MICRO/I in Communication Interface tab.

IP Address (PLC)

Set the IP address of PLC in Host I/F Network tab.

Port Number (PLC)

Set the port number of PLC in Host I/F Network tab.
The default is 507.

222Connection to a PLC- When you connect to the Interface Module,set the RS232C or RS485 operation mode as loader setting.
Set up the mode switch of Interface Module as below.

2

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2. PLC Settings
Item

Setting

IP Address

Set the IP address of PLC.

Subnet mask

Set the subnet mask of PLC .

Default Gateway

Set the default gateway of PLC.

2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual473

Chapter 2

18.5 Usable Devices
18.5.1 FREX-PC
Bit Device
Device Name

Int. Relay (bit)Device Symbol
MICRO/I

PLC

M

M

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual0 - 3FF

R/W

Hex

Input Relay (bit)XX

0 - 7FFR

Hex

Output Relay (bit)YY

0 - 7FF

R/W

Hex

Exp. Int. Relay (bit)EMM

400 - 1FFF

R/W

Hex

Latch Relay (bit)LL

0 - 3FF

R/W

Hex

Exp. Latch Relay (bit)ELL

400 - 1FFF

R/W

Hex

Step Relay (bit)SS

0 - 3FF

R/W

Hex

Spec. Relay (bit)SM

SM

8000 - 81FF

R/W

Hex

Timer (Relay)TT

0 - 3FF

R

Hex

Counter (Relay)CC

0 - 1FF

R

Hex

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
GradualWord Device
Device Name

474

Device Symbol
MICRO/I

PLC

Data RegisterDD

0 - 2FFF

R/W

Hex

Input Relay (word)

WXX

0 - 7FR

Hex

Output Relay (word)WYY

0 - 7F

R/W

Hex

Int. Relay (word)WM

M

0 - 3F

R/W

Hex

Exp. Int. Relay (word)

WEM

M

40 - 1FF

R/W

Hex

Latch Relay (word)WL

L

0 - 3F

R/W

Hex

Exp. Latch Relay (word)

WEL

L

40 - 1FF

R/W

Hex

Step Relay (word)WSS

0 - 3F

R/W

Hex

Spec. Relay (word)

WSM

M

800 - 81F

R/W

Hex

Timer (Current Value)TNT

0 - 3FF

R

Hex

Counter (Current Value)CNC

0 - 1FFR

Hex

Spec. RegisterSD

D

8000 - 837F

R/W

Hex

Link RegisterWW

0 - 3FFF

R/W

Hex

File RegisterRR

0 - 7FFF

R/W

Hex

External Device Setup Manual

18 FUJI

18.5.2

MICREX-F

Bit Device
Device Name

In.Output Relay (bit)Device Symbol
MICRO/I

PLC

B

B

Address Range

0 - 511F

Read/WriteAddress
GradualR/W

Hex

Int.Relay (bit)MM

0 - 511F

R/W

Hex

Keep Relay (bit)KK

0 - 63F

R/W

Hex

Edge Relay (bit)DD

0 - 63F

R/W

Hex

Spec.Relay (bit)FF

0 - 125F

R

Hex

Link Relay (bit)LL

0 - 511F

R/W

Hex

Ann.Relay (bit)AA

0 - 45F

R/W

Hex

2
2
2
2
Connection to a PLC

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual475

Chapter 2

Word Device
Device Name

Device Symbol
MICRO/I

476

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
GradualPLC

InOut Relay (word)

WB

WB

0 - 511R/W

Dec

Di.InOut Relay (word)

W24

W24

0 - 159

R/W

Dec

Int.Relay (word)

WM

WM

0 - 511

R/W

Dec

Keep Relay (word)

WK

WK

0 - 63

R/W

Dec

Edge Relay (word)WDWD

0 - 63

R/W

Dec

Link Relay (word)

WL

WL

0 - 511R/W

Dec

Spec.Relay (word)

WF

WF

0 - 125

R

Dec

Ann.Relay (word)WAWA

0 - 45R/W

Dec

FileMemo.0 (word)

W30

W30

0 - 4095

R/W

Dec

FileMemo.1 (word)

W31

W31

0 - 4095

R/W

Dec

FileMemo.2 (word)

W32

W32

0 - 4095

R/W

Dec

FileMemo.3 (word)

W33

W33

0 - 4095

R/W

Dec

FileMemo.4 (word)

W34

W34

0 - 4095

R/W

Dec

FileMemo.5 (word)

W35

W35

0 - 4095

R/W

Dec

FileMemo.6 (word)

W36

W36

0 - 4095

R/W

Dec

FileMemo.7 (word)

W37

W37

0 - 4095

R/W

Dec

DataMemo (16bit)

BD

WBD

0 - 4095

R/W

Dec

DataMemo (32bit)BDBD

0 - 4095

R/W

Dec

Timer0.01S(Curr.Value)TRTR

0 - 511R/W

Dec

Timer0.1S(Curr.Value)

W9W9

0 - 511R/W

Dec

Timer0.01S(Set.Value)TSTS

0 - 511R/W

Dec

Counter(Curr.Value)CRCR

0 - 255

R/W

Dec

Counter(Set.Value)CSCS

0 - 255

R/W

Dec

FileMemo.0(32bit)

W30

DW30

0 - 4095

R/W

Dec

FileMemo.1(32bit)

W31

DW31

0 - 4095

R/W

Dec

FileMemo.2(32bit)

W32

DW32

0 - 4095

R/W

Dec

FileMemo.3(32bit)

W33

DW33

0 - 4095

R/W

Dec

FileMemo.4(32bit)

W34

DW34

0 - 4095

R/W

Dec

FileMemo.5(32bit)

W35

DW35

0 - 4095

R/W

Dec

FileMemo.6(32bit)

W36

DW36

0 - 4095

R/W

Dec

FileMemo.7(32bit)

W37

DW37

0 - 4095

R/W

Dec

External Device Setup Manual

18 FUJI

18.5.3

MICREX-SX

Word Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Input memory*1

-

%IW

-

-

-

Output memory*1

-

%QW

-

-

-

Standard memory

MW1

%MW1

0 - 2490367

R/W

Dec

Retained memory

MW3

%MW3

0 - 425983

R/W

Dec

System memory

MW10

%MW10

0 - 511R/W

Dec*1 The virtual addresses for I/O memory differs according to the system configuration.
To read and write to the I/O memory area, handle this with indirect access through the standard memory in the MICREX-SX.

22
22
Connection to a PLC

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual477

Chapter 2

19 Toshiba
19.1 Connection Table
19.1.1 Compatible Protocols
System (CPU unit)

Link Unit

WindO/I-NV2 Settings

Product Series

Interface

Flow
ControHost I/F
Driver

HG2G-5F,
HG3G/4G

Not required(Connects to CPU unit)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 4(refer to P491)

None/
Hardware

PROSEC T

X

CU111

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 5(refer to P493)

Not required(Connects to CPU unit)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 4(refer to P491)

HG2G HG1F/-S/-5S 2F/ 2S/
3F/ 4F

Touch

PROSEC T
T1

T1S

T1-16,
T1-28,
T1-40

T1-40S

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 3(refer to P488)
CU111

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 5(refer to P493)

T2*1

PU224*1

Not required(Connects to CPU unit)

RS422/485 4-wire*1
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P483)

T2E*1

PU234E*1

Not required(Connects to CPU unit)

RS232C*1
Connection Diagram 2(refer to P486)

CM231E

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 5(refer to P493)

CM232E*1

RS232C*1
Connection Diagram 2(refer to P486)

Not required(Connects to CPU unit)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 2(refer to P486)

T2N

PU215N,PU235N,
PU245N

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 7(refer to P498)
RS232C
Connection Diagram 6(refer to P496)
T3,
T3H

478

PU315
PU325
PU325H
PU326H

Not required(Connects to CPU unit)

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 1(refer to P483)

External Device Setup Manual

X

X

---

19 Toshiba

System (CPU unit)

Link Unit

WindO/I-NV2 Settings
Interface

Flow
ControProduct Series
Host I/F
Driver

HG2G-5F,
HG3G/4G

HG2G HG1F/-S/-5S 2F/ 2S/
3F/ 4F

Touch

2

V
S2T,
S2E,
L1,
S2,
S3*1

Not required(Connects to CPU unit)

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 1(refer to P486)

None/
Hardware

PROSEC T

X

X

X

---

2
2
2

*1 This PLC was used to test & verify communications.

Connection to a PLC

PU672T
PU662T
PU612E
L1PU11H
L1PU12HS2PU82
S2PU72
S2PU32
S2PU22
S3PU65
S3PU55*1
S3PU45
S3PU21

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual479

Chapter 2

19.2 System Configuration
This is the system configuration for the connection of Toshiba PLCs to the MICRO/I.

19.2.1 PROSEC T Series T1
T1

MICRO/I
RS232C
Connection Diagram 4 (refer to P491)

CU111

MICRO/I
RS485
Connection Diagram 5(refer to P493)

19.2.2 PROSEC T Series T1S
T1S

MICRO/I
RS232C
Connection Diagram 4 (refer to P491)

MICRO/I
RS485
Connection Diagram 3 (refer to P488)

CU111

MICRO/I
RS485
Connection Diagram 5(refer to P488)

480

External Device Setup Manual

19 Toshiba

19.2.3

PROSEC T Series T2 (PU224)

T2(PU224)

MICRO/I
RS485
Connection Diagram 1 (refer to P483)

2
2
MICRO/I

19.2.4

2

PROSEC T Series T2E
T2E

MICRO/I

2
Connection to a PLC

RS232C
Connection Diagram 2 (refer to P486)

2

CM231E

RS485
Connection Diagram 5

MICRO/I(refer to P493)

2
2
2

CM232ERS232C
Connection Diagram 2(refer to P486)

MICRO/I

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual481

Chapter 2

19.2.5 PROSEC T Series T2N
T2N

MICRO/I
RS232C
Connection Diagram 2 (refer to P486)

MICRO/I
RS485
Connection Diagram 7 (refer to P498)

MICRO/I

RS232C
Connection Diagram 6 (refer to P496)

19.2.6 PROSEC T Series T3, T3H
T3, T3H

MICRO/I
RS485
Connection Diagram 1 (refer to P483)

19.2.7 Series S2T, S2E, L1, S2, S3
S2E, L1, S2, S3

MICRO/I
RS485
Connection Diagram 1 (refer to P483)

482

External Device Setup Manual

19 Toshiba

19.3 Connection Diagram

19.3.1

The connector types given in the Connection Diagrams are for the unit and not the cable. For details regarding wiring, refer
to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2

Connection Diagram 1: RS485 D-sub 15P - MICRO/I2
2
2
Connection to a PLC

2
2
2
2

D-sub, 15P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2
D-sub, 15P connector socket type

Terminal

2
There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor,
use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page
4.

External Device Setup Manual483

Chapter 2

D-sub, 15P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 15P connector socket type

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

484

External Device Setup Manual

19 Toshiba2222Connection to a PLC

2

D-sub, 15P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 15P connector socket typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual485

Chapter 2

19.3.2 Connection Diagram 2: RS232C D-sub 9P - MICRO/I

486

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector socket type

Terminal

External Device Setup Manual

19 Toshiba

2222
D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

External Device Setup Manual487

Chapter 2

19.3.3 Connection Diagram 3: T1S RS485 Terminal Block - MICRO/I

Terminal block

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Terminal block

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor,
use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page
4.

488

External Device Setup Manual

19 Toshiba

2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

Terminal block

2
2
2
2
2

Terminal block

Terminal

2

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual489

Chapter 2

Terminal block

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

Terminal block

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

490

External Device Setup Manual

19 Toshiba

19.3.4

Connection Diagram 4: T1,T1S RS232C Din connector 8P - MICRO/I22
2
2
D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Connection to a PLC

Din connector 8P socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2

Din connector 8P socket type

Terminal

2
2
2
2
2

Din connector 8P socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket type

External Device Setup Manual491

Chapter 2492

Din connector 8P socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type

Din connector 8P socket typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

External Device Setup Manual

19 Toshiba

19.3.5Connection Diagram 5: RS485 Terminal Block - MICRO/I22
2
2
D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Connection to a PLC

Terminal block

2
2
2
2
2

Terminal block

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor,
use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page
4.

2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual493

Chapter 2

Terminal block

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Terminal block

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

494

External Device Setup Manual

19 Toshiba2222Connection to a PLC

2Terminal block

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2

Terminal block

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual495

Chapter 2

19.3.6 Connection Diagram 6: T2N RS232C D-sub 15Pin connector(RS232C, RS485) - MICRO/I

496

D-sub, 15P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 15P connector socket type

Terminal

External Device Setup Manual

19 Toshiba

2222
D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

D-sub, 15P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 15P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 15P connector socket typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

External Device Setup Manual497

Chapter 2

19.3.7 Connection Diagram 7: T2N RS485 D-sub 15Pin connector(RS232C, RS485) - MICRO/I

D-sub, 15P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 15P connector socket type

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor,
use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page
4.

498

External Device Setup Manual

19 Toshiba2222Connection to a PLC

2

D-sub, 15P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 15P connector socket type

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual499

Chapter 2

D-sub, 15P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 15P connector socket typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

500

External Device Setup Manual

19 Toshiba

19.4 Environment Settings
Refer to the followings to configure the communication port between PLC (PROSEC T Series or V Series) and MICRO/I.
Attend to the limitation of the configuration. It depends on the CPU unit and Link unit.

19.4.1

Toshiba PROSEC T Series, V Series
Details

Interface

RS232C, RS485 2-wire, RS485 4-wireSlave Number

01- 32 (DEC)

Baud Rate [bps]1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200

Data Bits

7 or 8

ParityNone, Odd or Even

Stop Bits

1 or 2

Flow Control

None/Hardware

PLC Model

Check:PROSEC Series
Uncheck: EX100 Series

Refer to the PROSC T Series and V Series user’s manual for the details of communication setting.

222Connection to a PLC

Items

2

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual501

Chapter 2

19.5 Usable Devices
Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

Input deviceXX

0 - 8191F

R*1

Output deviceYY

0 - 8191F

R/W*1

Auxiliary deviceRR

0 - 4095F

R/W*1

Special deviceSS

0 - 511F

R/W*1Timer deviceTST.

0 - 999

R

DEC

Counter deviceCSC.

0 - 511R

DEC

Link deviceZZ

0 - 999F

R/W*1

Link relay

LL

0 - 255F

R/W*1

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual*1 Set the first digit to HEX and another digit to DEC.

Word Device
Device Name

Device Symbol
MICRO/I

502

PLC

Input register

XW

XW

0 - 8191

R

DEC

Output register

YW

YW

0 - 8191

R/W

DEC

Auxiliary register

RW

RW

0 - 4095

R/W

DEC

Special registerSWSW

0 - 511R/W

DECTimer registerTT

0 - 999

R

DEC

Counter registerCC

0 - 511R

DEC

Data registerDD

0 - 8191

R/W

DEC

Link registerWW

0 - 2047

R/W

DEC

Link relay register

LW

LW

0 - 255

R/W

DEC

File registerFF

0 - 32767

R/W

DEC

External Device Setup Manual

19 Toshiba

19.6 The mapping table of devices between PROSEC T Series and V Series
When you use V Series PLCs, refer to the following table and replace a device name from PROSEC T Series to V Series.
V Series (S controller)

T Series (Computer Link)

Variable name
System register
Data register

I/O variable

Device Name

SymbolDeviceS

Special device

S

RegisterSW

Special registerSW

DeviceD

Auxiliary device

R

Register

DW

Auxiliary register
Data register

RW
D

DeviceIX

Input device

X

QX

Output device

Y

IW

Input register

XW

QW

Output register

YW

Variable name

File register

F

RegisterUser register

Register- V Series (S controller) has some variables to keep compatibility with PROSEC T Series.
Computer Link protocol of V Series can communicate those variables with the symbol of T Series.

22
2
2
Connection to a PLC

Symbol222- Refer to the PROSC T Series and V Series user’s manual for the details of communication setting.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual503

Chapter 2

20 LS Industrial Systems
20.1 Connection Table
20.1.1 Compatible PLCs
System(CPU unit)

Link Unit

WindO/I-NV2 Settings
Interface

Flow
Control

Host I/F Driver

None

MASTER-K

Product Series
HG2G-5F,
HG3G/4G

HG2G-S/-5S

HG1F/
2F/ 2S/
3F/ 4F

Touch

X

X

X

---

MASTER-K
K10S1

Not required(Connects to CPU unit)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P507)

K80S,
K120S,
K200S,

Not required(Connects to CPU unit)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 2(refer to P509)

K80S*1

G7L-CUEB*1

RS232C
Connection Diagram 3(refer to P511)

G7L-CUEC

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 4(refer to P513)

G6L-CUEB

RS232C
Connection Diagram 3(refer to P511)

G6L-CUEC

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 4(refer to P513)

G4L-CUEA*1

RS232C
Connection Diagram 3(refer to P511)

K200S

K300S*1

RS422/485 4-wireConnection Diagram 4(refer to P513)*1 This PLC was used to test & verify communications.

504

External Device Setup Manual

20 LS Industrial Systems

20.2 System Configuration
This is the system configuration for the connection of LS Industrial Systems PLCs to the MICRO/I.

20.2.1

MASTER-K K10S1 (Loader Port)

2

MASTER-K
K10S1

MICRO/I

2

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1 (refer to P507)

2
20.2.2

MASTER-K K80S, K120S, K200S (Loader Port)

2

MASTER-K
MICRO/I

K200S

Connection to a PLC

K80S
K120S

2
2

RS232C
Connection Diagram 2 (refer to P509)

2

20.2.3

MASTER-K K80S (Interface Module)

MASTER-K K80S

G7L-CUEB

2
RS232C
Connection Diagram 3

MICRO/I2(refer to P511)

2
G7L-CUEC

RS485 4-wireConnection Diagram 4(refer to P513)

MICRO/I22222

External Device Setup Manual505

Chapter 2

20.2.4 MASTER-K K200S (Interface Module)
MASTER-K K200S

G6L-CUEB

RS232C
Connection Diagram 3

MICRO/I(refer to P511)

G6L-CUEC

RS485 4-wireConnection Diagram 4

MICRO/I(refer to P513)

20.2.5 MASTER-K K300S (Interface Module)
MASTER-K K300S

G4L-CUEA

RS232C
Connection Diagram 3(refer to P511)

RS485 4-wireConnection Diagram 4(refer to P513)

506

External Device Setup Manual

MICRO/I

20 LS Industrial Systems

20.3 Connection Diagram

20.3.1

The connector types given in the Connection Diagrams are for the unit and not the cable. For details regarding wiring, refer
to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2

Connection Diagram 1: MASTER-K K10S1 (Loader Port) - MICRO/I2
2
2
Connection to a PLC

2
2Mini Din 6Pin

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2

Mini Din 6Pin

Terminal2222Mini Din 6Pin

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

External Device Setup Manual507

Chapter 2508

Mini Din 6Pin

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

Mini Din 6Pin

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

External Device Setup Manual

20 LS Industrial Systems

20.3.2Connection Diagram 2: MASTER-K K80S, 120S, 200S (Loader Port) - MICRO/I22
22
Connection to a PLC

2

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Terminal2222External Device Setup Manual509

Chapter 2

510

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

External Device Setup Manual

20 LS Industrial Systems

20.3.3Connection Diagram 3: MASTER-K (Interface Module RS232C Port) - MICRO/I22
22
Connection to a PLC

2

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Terminal2222External Device Setup Manual511

Chapter 2

512

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 25P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

External Device Setup Manual

20 LS Industrial Systems

20.3.4

Connection Diagram 4: MASTER-K (Interface Module RS485 Port) - MICRO/I22
2
2
D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Connection to a PLC

Terminal Block

2
2
2
2
2

Terminal Block

Terminal

2
There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor,
use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page
4.

2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual513

Chapter 2

Terminal Block

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Terminal Block

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

514

External Device Setup Manual

20 LS Industrial Systems

2222Connection to a PLC

2Terminal Block

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2

Terminal Block

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual515

Chapter 2

20.4 Environment Settings
Refer to the followings to configure the communication port between PLC (PROSEC T Series or V Series) and MICRO/I.
Attend to the limitation of the configuration. It depends on the CPU unit and Link unit.

20.4.1 LG Industrial Systems MASTER-K K10S1, K80S, K120S, K200S (Loader Port)
Items

Details

Interface

RS232CBaud Rate [bps]38400

Data Bits

8

ParityNone

Stop Bits

1

Flow Control

None20.4.2 LG Industrial Systems MASTER-K K80S, K200S, K300S (Interface Module)
Items

Details

Interface

RS232C, RS485 4-wire

Baud Rate [bps]1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400

Data Bits

7 or 8

ParityNone, Odd or Even

Stop Bits

1 or 2

Flow Control

None or Hardware

Station No.

00 - 1F(HEX)

Refer to the MASTER-K Series user’s manual for details of communication settings.

516

External Device Setup Manual

20 LS Industrial Systems

20.5 Usable Devices
Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

I/O Relay (bit)PP

0 - 31F

R/W

HEX

Auxiliary Relay (bit)MM

0 - 191F

R/W

HEX

Keep Relay (bit)KK

0 - 31F

R/W

HEX

Link Relay (bit)LL

0 - 63F

R/W

HEX

F

F

0 - 63F

R

HEX

TS

T

0 - 255

R/W

DEC

Counter (Contact)CSC

0 - 255

R/W

DEC

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
GradualWord Device
Device Name

Device Symbol
MICRO/I

PLC

I/O Relay (word)

WPP

0 - 31

R/W

DEC

Auxiliary Relay (word)WM

M

0 - 191

R/W

DEC

Keep Relay (word)

WK

K

0 - 31

R/W

DEC

Link Relay (word)WL

L

0 - 63

R/W

DEC

Special Relay (word)WF

F

0 - 63R

DEC

Timer (Current Value)TT

0 - 255

R/W

DEC

Counter (Current Value)CC

0 - 255

R/W

DEC

Data RegisterDD

0 - 4999

R/W

DEC

2
2
2
Connection to a PLC

Special Relay (bit)Timer (Contact)

2

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual517

Chapter 2

21 VIGOR
21.1 Connection Table
21.1.1 Compatible PLCs
System(CPU unit)

Link Unit

WindO/I-NV2 Settings
Interface

Product Series

FlowControl

Host I/F Driver HG2G-5F,
HG3G/4G

HG2G HG1F/-S/-5S 2F/ 2S/
3F/ 4F

Touch

None

VB/VH

X

X

X

---

None

VB/VH

X

X

X

---

VB
V0,
VB1*1,VB2

Not required(Connects to CPU unit)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P520)

VB-485A

RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P522)

VB-CADPRS232C
Connection Diagram 3(refer to P525)
RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 4(refer to P527)

VB-232

RS232C
Connection Diagram 5(refer to P530)

VB-485

RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 6(refer to P532)

Not required(Connects to CPU unit)

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P520)

VB-485A

RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P522)

VB-CADPRS232C
Connection Diagram 3(refer to P525)

VH
VH

RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 4(refer to P527)
VB-232

RS232C
Connection Diagram 5(refer to P530)

VB-485

RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 6(refer to P532)*1 This PLC was used to test & verify communications.

518

External Device Setup Manual

21 VIGOR

21.2 System Configuration
This is the system configuration for the connection of VIGOR PLCs to the MICRO/I.

21.2.1

VB0, VB1, VB2, VH (Programming Tool Communication Port)

VB0, VB1, VB2, VH

2MICRO/I

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1 (refer to P520)

22

21.2.2

VB0, VB1, VB2, VH (VB-485A)
VB-485A

RS485
Connection Diagram 2

MICRO/I

Connection to a PLC

VB0, VB1, VB2, VH

22(refer to P522)2

21.2.3

VB0, VB1, VB2, VH (VB-CADP)

VB0, VB1, VB2, VH

2VB-CADPRS232C
Connection Diagram 3

MICRO/I2(refer to P525)

2
VB-CADPRS485 2-wireConnection Diagram 4

MICRO/I(refer to P527)

22

21.2.4

VB0, VB1, VB2, VH (VB-232)

VB0, VB1, VB2, VH

VB-232

RS232C
Connection Diagram 5

MICRO/I(refer to P530)222

21.2.5

VB0, VB1, VB2, VH (VB-485)

VB0, VB1, VB2, VH

2
VB-485

RS485
Connection Diagram 6

MICRO/I(refer to P532)

External Device Setup Manual519

Chapter 2

21.3 Connection Diagram

The connector types given in the Connection Diagrams are for the unit and not the cable. For details regarding wiring, refer
to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

21.3.1 Connection Diagram 1: VB0, VB1, VB2, VH (Programming Tool Communication Port)520

A type connector

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

A type connector

Terminal

A type connector

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

External Device Setup Manual

21 VIGOR22
2
2
D-sub, 25P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

A type connector

2
2
2
2
2

A type connector

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual521

Chapter 2

21.3.2 Connection Diagram 2: VB0, VB1, VB2, VH (VB-485A)

Screw down terminal block

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Screw down terminal block

Terminal

HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G Series uses only RDA and RDB when using RS422/485 2-wire, you don’t need to connect SDA or
SDB.
If connecting COM1 on the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G to the external device, do not insert terminating resistor to the external
device. If terminating resistor can not be removed, use COM2 on the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G instead of COM1.

522

External Device Setup Manual

21 VIGOR22
2
2
D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

Screw down terminal block

2
2
2
2
2

Screw down terminal block

Terminal

2
2
2
2
2
2
Screw down terminal block

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

External Device Setup Manual523

Chapter 2

Screw down terminal block524

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

External Device Setup Manual

21 VIGOR

21.3.3Connection Diagram 3: VB0, VB1, VB2, VH (VB-CADP) - RS232C

22
2
2
D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Connection to a PLC

Screw down terminal block

2
2
2
2

Screw down terminal block

Terminal

2
2
2
2
2
2

Screw down terminal block

D-sub, 9P connector socket type2

External Device Setup Manual525

Chapter 2

526

Screw down terminal block

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

Screw down terminal block

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

External Device Setup Manual

21 VIGOR

21.3.4

Connection Diagram 4: VB0, VB1, VB2, VH (VB-CADP) - RS485

2
2
2
Screw down terminal block

D-sub, 9P connector plug type2
Connection to a PLC

2
2
2
2

Screw down terminal block

Terminal

2- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" onpage 42- HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G Series uses only RDA and RDB when using RS422/485 2-wire, you don’t need to connect SDA or
SDB.
If connecting COM1 on the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G to the external device, do not insert terminating resistor to the external
device. If terminating resistor can not be removed, use COM2 on the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G instead of COM1.

2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual527

Chapter 2

Screw down terminal block

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Screw down terminal block

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

528

External Device Setup Manual

21 VIGOR22
2
2
Connection to a PLC

2Screw down terminal block

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2
2

Screw down terminal block

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual529

Chapter 2

21.3.5 Connection Diagram 5: VB0, VB1, VB2, VH (VB-232)

530

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector socket type

Terminal

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 9P connector socket type

External Device Setup Manual

21 VIGOR22
2
2
D-sub, 25P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

2
2
2
2
2

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual531

Chapter 2

21.3.6 Connection Diagram 6: VB0, VB1, VB2, VH (VB-485)

Screw down terminal block

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Screw down terminal block

Terminal- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" onpage 4- HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G Series uses only RDA and RDB when using RS422/485 2-wire, you don’t need to connect SDA or
SDB.
If connecting COM1 on the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G to the external device, do not insert terminating resistor to the external
device. If terminating resistor can not be removed, use COM2 on the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G instead of COM1.

532

External Device Setup Manual

21 VIGOR22
2
2
D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Connection to a PLC

Screw down terminal block

2
2
2
2
2

Screw down terminal block

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual533

Chapter 2

Screw down terminal block

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

Screw down terminal block

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

534

External Device Setup Manual

21 VIGOR

21.4 Environment Settings
The communication port settings for VB/VH series and MICRO/I host port are as follows.

21.4.1VB/VH Series (Communication Port for Programming Tool)

Items

2

Details

Interface
Data Bits

Use the same settings as
for the MICRO/I.

19200 (fixed)
7 (fixed)
Even

Stop Bits

1 (fixed)

Flow Control

None

Station Number

0 (fixed)

21.4.2

VB/VH Series (VB-485A, VB-232 or VB-485)

Items

Details

Interface

RS232C, RS485 4-wire

Baud Rate [bps]Data Bits

Use the same settings as
for the MICRO/I.

2
2
Connection to a PLC

Parity221200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400

2

7

ParityEven

Stop Bits

1

Flow Control

None

Station Number

0 - 255(DEC)

21.4.32

RS232CBaud Rate [bps]2
2

VB/VH Series (VB-CADP)

2

Items

Details

Port

CP2

CP3

Interface

RS232C, RS485

RS485

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400

19200

7

7

Baud Rate [bps]Data Bits

Use the same settings as
for the MICRO/I.

ParityEven

Even

Stop Bits

1

1

Flow Control

None

None

Station Number

0 - 255(DEC)

0 - 99(DEC)

2
2
2
2

Refer to the VB/VH Series user’s manual for details of communication settings.

2

External Device Setup Manual535

Chapter 2

21.5 Usable Devices
Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol
MICRO/I

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

PLC

Input Relay(Bit)X

X

0 - 777

R

OCT

Output Relay(Bit)YY

0 - 777

R/W

OCT

Auxiliary Relay(Bit)MM

0 - 5119

R/W

DEX

Step Relay

SS

0 - 999

R/W

DEX

Special Relay

SM

M

9000 - 9255

R/W

DEX

Timer ContactTT

0 - 255R

DEX

Timer CoilTC

T

0 - 255R

DEX

Counter Contact

CC

0 - 255R

DEX

Counter CoilCCC

0 - 255

R

DEX

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

0 - 769R

OCT

Word Device
Device Name

Input Relay(Word)

Device Symbol
MICRO/I

PLC

WX

X

Output Relay(Word)

WY

Y

0 - 760

R/W

OCT

Auxiliary Relay(Word)

WM

M

0 - 5104

R/W

DEX

Step Relay(Word)

WSS

0 - 992

R/W

DEX

Special Relay(Word)

WSM

M

9000 - 9240

R/W

DEX

Data RegistorTD

0 - 8191

R/W

DEX

Special Registor

SDD

9000 - 9255

R/W

DEX

Timer Current ValueTCV

T

0 - 255

R/W

DEX

16 Bit Counter

CCVC

0 - 199

R/W

DEX

DCCV

C

2000 - 2551

R/W

DEX

Current Value
32 Bit Counter
Current Value

Device Address 992 in Step Relay (Word) only contains 8bits because the maximum device address of Step Relay (Bit) is
999.

536

External Device Setup Manual

22 Emerson

22 Emerson
22.1 Connection Table
22.1.12Compatible PLCs

System(CPU unit)

Link Unit

WindO/I-NV2 Settings
Interface

Flow
Control2

Product Series

Host I/F Driver

HG2G-5F,
HG3G/4G

HG2G-S/-5S

HG1F/
2F/ 2S/
3F/ 4F

Touch

X

X

---

---

2

FloBoss
FloBoss107*1

Not required

ROC800*2

RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 1(refer to P538)

None

ROC Protocol

2
Connection to a PLC

2

RS232C
Connection Diagram2(refer to P539)*1 This PLC was used to test & verify communications.
*2 When enabling the check box to “Input TLP” on the Device Address Settings dialog box, allows expansion of these TLPs to support the ROC Plus
Protocol.

22

22.2 System Configuration

2

This is the system configuration for the connection of Emerson PLCs to the MICRO/I.

22.2.1

2

FloBoss
FloBoss

COM1

RS485
Connection Diagram 1 (refer to P538)

MICRO/I2
2

COM2

RS232C
Connection Diagram 2 (refer to P539)

2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual537

Chapter 2

22.3 Connection Diagram

The connector types given in the Connection Diagrams are for the unit and not the cable. For details regarding wiring, refer
to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

22.3.1 Connection Diagram 1: FloBoss (COM1, RS485)

538

Terminal

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Terminal

Terminal

External Device Setup Manual

22 Emerson

22.3.2Connection Diagram 2: FloBoss (COM2, RS232C)

2
2
TX
RX
RTS
GND

2
2
D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Connection to a PLC

Terminal

2
2
2

TX
RX
RTS
GND

2
2

Terminal

Terminal

2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual539

Chapter 2

22.4 Environment Settings
The communication port settings for FloBoss series and MICRO/I host port are as follows.

22.4.1 Connecting with FloBoss COM1 (RS485) or COM2 (RS232C)
Items

Details

Interface
Baud Rate [bps]Data Bits

540

RS232C, RS485
Use the same settings as for the
MICRO/I.

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200
7, 8

Stop Bits

1, 2

ParityNone, Even or Odd

Flow Control

None

HMI Group No.

Set the Group No. of MICRO/I.

HMI Unit No.

Set the Unit No. of MICRO/I.

Controller Group No.

Set the Group No. of FloBoss in Host I/F Network tab.

Controller Unit No.

Set the Unit No. of FloBoss in Host I/F Network tab.

External Device Setup Manual

22 Emerson

22.5 Usable Devices
When the Emerson ROC Protocol host I/F driver is selected, check the usable PLC devices in the Device Address Settings dialog
box.
Click [...] for the option to configure device addresses to display the Device Address Settings dialog box.
Example: To set a PLC device to the Bit Button.
1. Place the Bit Button on the screen and double click to edit it.
The Properties dialog box will be displayed.

2222Connection to a PLC

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual541

Chapter 2

2. Click [...] to the right of the Destination Device text box.
The Device Address Settings dialog box will be displayed.

542

External Device Setup Manual

22 Emerson

3. Under Target, select Host.

222
4. Cofigure the Emerson ROC Device Address.

2
Connection to a PLC

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual543

Chapter 2

5. Two methods to select the T (Type), L (Location), P (Parameter) for Emerson ROC device:• How to select the [Point Type], [Parameter] and [Location]:
1) The selected Device Address is displayed in the Destination Device.

544

External Device Setup Manual

22 Emerson- The following shows the way to set TLP Selection which is selected in Emerson ROC software.
Emerson ROC

WindO/I-NV2

Details

Point Type

Point Type

Select Point Type which you selected in Emerson ROC software from
Point Type box.

Logical Number

Location

Find number of Logical Number (which is shown in middle of TLP) which
you selected in Emerson ROC software and input it in Location box

Parameter

Paramete

Select Parameter which you selected in Emerson ROC software form Parameter box.

- Device for Emerson ROC is based on ROC Protocol Specifications Manual (Form Number A4199, Part Number
D301053X012, November 2011).

2222Connection to a PLC

2• How to enter the TLP manually:
1) Select the [Input TLP] check box in the Device Address Settings dialog.
The [Point Type], [Parameter], and [Location] settings are disabled and the [TLP], [Bit], and [Data Type] settingsare enabled.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual545

Chapter 22) Configure [TLP], [Bit], and [Data Type].
- In [TLP], enter the values in the order of Point Type, Location and Parameter, and separate each one with acomma.
- When Bit Device must be configured, select the Bit check box and enter a value.

3) Click the [OK] button.
The configured Device Address is displayed in the Destination Device text box.

The order of TLP in the Emerson ROC device address differs in the following ways:-

Device Address Settings dialog in example, shows.22,5,3 in TLP text box (Point Type,Location,Parameter)
Emerson ROC device address composed of the entered TLP, Bit, and Data Type information.
(e.g. 0:22.3[5]:UINT8 in Destination Device text box. The TLP order is 22,3,5 (Point Type,Parameter,Location).)546

External Device Setup Manual

23 Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems

23 Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems
23.1 Connection Table
23.1.12Compatible PLCs
Link Unit

2

WindO/I-NV2, WindO/I-NV3 Settings

Product Series

Interface

HG2G-S/-5S

HG1F/
2F/ 2S/
3F/ 4F

Touch

X

---

X

2

X

Connection to a PLC

System(CPU unit)

Flow
Control

Host I/F Driver, HG2G-5F,
Communication HG3G/4G
Driver2

H Series
CPU2-03H
CPU2-07H
CPU2-10H
CPU2-20H
CPU3-40H

LAN-ETH2

Ethernet-

EH (Ethernet)

X2

EH-150EH-CPU448
EH-CPU516
EH-CPU548
EH-CPU308A
EH-CPU316A
EH-CPU448A

EH-ETH2

Ethernet-

EH (Ethernet)

X

X

---

2
2

EHV
EHV-CPU16
EHV-CPU32
EHV-CPU64

2

Not required(connects to Ethernet port)

Ethernet-

EH (Ethernet)

X

X

---

X

2

EH-ETH2

EHV-CPU128*1
Web Controller
EH-WD10DR
EH-WA23DR
EH-WD23DR

Not required(connects to Ethernet port)

Ethernet-

EH (Ethernet)

X

X

---

X

2
2

MICRO-EH
EH-A20
EH-D20
EH-A40
EH-D40EH-A64
EH-D64

EH-OBETH

Ethernet-

EH (Ethernet)

X

X

---

X

2

MICRO-EHV
MVH-A40
MVH-D40
MVH-A64
MVH-D642

Not required(connects to Ethernet port)

Ethernet-

EH (Ethernet)

X

X

---

X

2
2

*1 This PLC was used to test & verify communications.

External Device Setup Manual547

Chapter 2

23.2 System Configuration
23.2.1 H/EH/EHV Series (Ethernet)
MICRO/I
Touch

EHV, MICRO-EHV
Ethernet

H Series
EH150
EHV
MICRO-EH++++

LAN-ETH2
EH-ETH2
EH-ETH2
EH-OBETH

MICRO/I
Touch
Ethernet

548

External Device Setup Manual

23 Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems

23.3 Environment Settings
23.3.1

H/EH/EHV Series: in case using Ethernet Port or Ethernet Unit setting

2
1. MICRO/I settings
Item

Setting

IP Address (MICRO/I)

Set the IP address of MICRO/I in Communication Interface tab.

Subnet Mask

Set the subnet mask of MICRO/I in Communication Interface tab.

Default Gateway

Set the default gateway of MICRO/I in Communication Interface tab.
Set the IP address of PLC in Host I/F Network tab.

Port Number (PLC)

Set the port number of PLC in Host I/F Network tab.
The default is 3004.

22

2. PLC Settings
Item

Setting

CPU Communication Setteings(IP Address)2

Connection to a PLC

IP Address (PLC)2IP Address

Set the IP address of PLC.

Subnet mask

Set the subnet mask of PLC .

Default Gateway

Set the default gateway of PLC.

Communication
speed / Method

AUTO
100M/ Full Duplex

2
2
2

100M/ Half Duplex
10M/ Full Duplex

2

10M/ Half Duplex
CPU Communication Setteings(Ethernet Communication
Setteings(Task Code))

Port Number

Setting Port Number.

ProtocolTCP/IPTime Out

Setting Toimeout time.

This Host I/F Driver does not support CPU Link and Remote communication.

2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual549

Chapter 2

23.4 Usable Devices
Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

External Input (Bit)X

X

0 - 5F95

R*1

External Output (Bit)YY

0 - 5F95

R/W*1Internal Output (Bit)RR

0 - FFF

R/W

Hex

Data Area M (Bit)MM

0 - 7FFFF

R/W

Hex

Timer Counter (Contact)

TCS

TC

0 - 2559

R

Dec

Counter Clear

CLCL

0 - 2559

R/W

Dec

Extension External Input (Bit)EXEX

0 - 5F7FF

R*2

Extension External Output (Bit)

EY

EY

0 - 5F7FF

R/W*2*1 Please specify following ranges.

㼄㻌㻡㻌㻲㻌㻥㻡
㻮㼕㼠㻌㻺㼡㼙㼎㼑㼞㻌㻔㻜㻜㻌㻙㻌㻥㻡㻕㻌㻰㼑㼏㻿㼘㼛㼠㻌㻺㼡㼙㼎㼑㼞㻌㻔㻜㻌㻙㻌㻲㻕㻌㻴㼑㼤㼁㼚㼕㼠㻌㻺㼡㼙㼎㼑㼞㻌㻔㻜㻌㻙㻌㻡㻕*2 Please specify following ranges.

㻱㼄㻌㻡㻌㻲㻌㻣㻲㻲㻮㼕㼠㻌㻺㼡㼙㼎㼑㼞㻌㻔㻜㻜㻜㻌㻙㻌㻣㻲㻲㻕㻌㻴㼑㼤㻿㼘㼛㼠㻌㻺㼡㼙㼎㼑㼞㻌㻔㻜㻌㻙㻌㻲㻕㻌㻴㼑㼤㼁㼚㼕㼠㻌㻺㼡㼙㼎㼑㼞㻌㻔㻜㻌㻙㻌㻡㻕

550

External Device Setup Manual

23 Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems

Word Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I

PLC

External Input (Word)

WX

WX

0 - 5F7

R*1

External Output (Word)

WY

WY

0 - 5F7R/W*1Internal Output (Word)WRWR

0 - FFFF

R/W

Hex

WM

WM

0 - 7FFF

R/W

Hex

Timer Counter (Current)TCTC

0 - 2559

R/W

Dec

Data Area WN

WN

WN

0 - 1FFFF

R/W

Hex

Extension External Input (Word)

WEX

WEX

0 - 5F7FR*2

Extension External Output(Word)

WEY

WEY

0 - 5F7F

R/W

*2

2
2
2
Connection to a PLC

Data Area WM (Word)2

2*1 Please specify following ranges.

㼃㼄㻌㻡㻌㻲㻌㻣
㼃㼛㼞㼐㻌㻺㼡㼙㼎㼑㼞㻌㻔㻜㻌㻙㻌㻣㻕㻌㻿㼘㼛㼠㻌㻺㼡㼙㼎㼑㼞㻌㻔㻜㻌㻙㻌㻲㻕㻌㻴㼑㼤㼁㼚㼕㼠㻌㻺㼡㼙㼎㼑㼞㻌㻔㻜㻌㻙㻌㻡㻕*2 Please specify following ranges.

22㼃㻱㼄㻌㻡㻌㻲㻌㻣㻲㼃㼛㼞㼐㻌㻺㼡㼙㼎㼑㼞㻌㻔㻜㻜㻌㻙㻌㻣㻲㻕㻌㻴㼑㼤㻿㼘㼛㼠㻌㻺㼡㼙㼎㼑㼞㻌㻔㻜㻌㻙㻌㻲㻕㻌㻴㼑㼤㼁㼚㼕㼠㻌㻺㼡㼙㼎㼑㼞㻌㻔㻜㻌㻙㻌㻡㻕

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

External Device Setup Manual551

Chapter 2552

External Device Setup ManualChapter 3 O/I Link Communication
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

553

Chapter 3

1

O/I Link Communication

1.1

OutlineO/I Link Communication is used for performing 1:N communication (where one PLC is connected to multiple MICRO/I and Touch
units). Construct a Master/Slave network (hereafter called an O/I Link) using the MICRO/I and Touch units, and perform PLC Link
Communication with the PLC using the Master MICRO/I or Touch (hereafter called Master). The Slave MICRO/I and Touch units(hereafter called Slaves) can read from and write to the PLC devices via the Master.
Up to one Master and 15 Slaves can be connected, and as is the case with PLC Link Communication, no special communication program is required in the PLC.
With just a simple setting change, screen data being used with PLC Link Communication can be used as is with a MICRO/I or Touch
setup as a Master or Slave.

HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G and Touch use different type of O/I link communication protocol than HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F.
HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G and Touch can not be connected with other HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F in O/I link communication.

1.2

Operation

With O/I Link Communication a MICRO/I and Touch can read data from and write data to external devices.

• Reading from the PLC
The Master MICRO/I or Touch unit reads data directly from the PLC devices set in the currently displayed screen, and Slave MICRO/I or Touch
units read data from the PLC devices set in the currently displayed screen via the Master. Display parts (such as Numerical Displays and Pilot
Lamps) in the MICRO/I or Touch are updated with the latest data at all times.

• Writing to the PLC
When data input parts (such as bit and word button parts) in the MICRO/I or Touch are operated, they directly write to the PLC, and if they are in a
Slave screen they write to the PLC via the Master.

O/I Link Communication

554

External Device Setup Manual

1 O/I Link Communication

1.3

Required Optional PartsA HG2G-S/-5S, HG1F/2F/3F/4F must be equipped with an HG9Z-2G1 O/I Link Unit in order to be able to perform O/I Link communication. Refer to the O/I Link Unit installation, WindO/I-NV2 User’s Manual or SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual for details regarding connection to the HG2G-S/-5S, HG1F/2F/3F/4F and wiring.

• HG9Z-2G1
1.4
1.4.1

O/I Link Wiring Diagram
Connect between HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G

Wiring Diagram

3
3
3
3
3
3
O/I Link Communication

3- HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G and Touch use different type of O/I link communication protocol than HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F.
HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G and Touch can not be connected with other HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F in O/I link communication.
- When connect COM1 of the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G and the SERIAL1 of the HG2G-S/-5S, set the terminating resistor OFF.

1.4.2

Connection between the Touch

Wiring Diagram

3
3
3
3
3
3

HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G and Touch use different type of O/I link communication protocol than HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F.
HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G and Touch can not be connected with other HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F in O/I link communication.

3
3

External Device Setup Manual555

Chapter 3

1.4.3

Connect between HG2G-S/-5S + O/I Link Unit

Wiring Diagram

HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G Series use different type of O/I link communication protocol than HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F. HG2GS/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G Series can not be connected with other HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F in O/I link communication.

556

External Device Setup Manual

1 O/I Link Communication

1.4.4

Connect between HG2G-S/-5S+O/I Link Unit (Master) and HG2G-S/-5S serial interface1(Slave)33333
Wiring Diagram

3
O/I Link Communication

3
3
3
3

- HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G Series use different type of O/I link communication protocol than HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F.
HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G Series can not be connected with other HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F in O/I link communication.
- The HG2G-S/-5S serial interface1 can only be operated as a slave.

3
3
3
3
3

External Device Setup Manual557

Chapter 3

1.4.5

Connect between HG1F/2F/3F/4F + O/I Link Unit

Wiring Diagram

HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G Series use different type of O/I link communication protocol than HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F. HG2GS/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G Series can not be connected with other HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F in O/I link communication.

558

External Device Setup Manual

1 O/I Link Communication

1.4.6

Connect between HG1F/2F/3F/4F+O/I Link Unit (Master) and HG1F/2F/3F/4F serial interface1(Slave)33333
Wiring Diagram

3
O/I Link Communication

3
3
3
3

- HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G Series use different type of O/I link communication protocol than HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F.
HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G Series can not be connected with other HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F in O/I link communication.
- The HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F serial interface1 can only be operated as a slave.

3
3
3
3
3

External Device Setup Manual559

Chapter 3

1.4.7

Connect between HG1F/2F/3F/4F+O/I Link Unit (Master) and HG2S serial interface1 (Slave)

Wiring Diagram

The HG2S can only be operated as a slave.

560

External Device Setup Manual2 O/I Link Communication Settings

2

O/I Link Communication Settings

To use the O/I Link Communication, you must set the necessary items in the O/I Link tab of the Configuration - System Setup Project dialog box. (Refer to the WindO/I-NV2 User’s Manual or SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual.)
Dialog Box Name
- Tab Name

Setting

Description

Project Settings O/I Link

O/I Link Station

Set the MICRO/I or Touch connected to the PLC as the master, and the other
MICRO/I or Touch as slaves (1 to 15). Make sure that the settings do not overlap.

Slave Station

MICRO/I or Touch that are connected to the master MICRO/I or Touch (i.e.
the one whose O/I Link Type is registered as Master) must be registered asslaves (1 to 15). Select the checkbox.

3
3
3
3

In addition, make the following settings for the PLC Link Communication.
Setting

MasterSlave 1 to 15

Project Settings Host I/F Driver orCommunication
DriverManufacturer

Use the same setting for all MICRO/I or Touch.

Host I/F Driver,
Communication
Driver
Set it according to the environment.

Setting not required.

Time Out
Retry Cycles

Project Settings Communication
Interface3
3

Connection TypeTransmission Wait

3

O/I Link Communication

Dialog Box Name
- Tab Name

Other

Match to the setting of the PLC that you
will use.

SERIAL 1/COM1

The use of Serial 1 depends on the following selected O/I type :.
HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G series:
Serial 1 maybe selected as the “O/I
Link Master” for O/I Link communication, or select “Host Communication” as the communication interface
for PLC communication.
HG2G-S/-5S, HG1F/2F/3F/4F series:
Select “Host Communication”.
Touch:
Select the External Device Communication.

3
3

Select “O/I Link Slave” as the interface
used for O/I Link communication.

3
3
3
3
3
3

External Device Setup Manual561

Chapter 3

Dialog Box Name
- Tab Name

Setting

MasterSlave 1 to 15

Project Settings Communication
Interface

SERIAL 2/COM2

The use of Serial 2 depends on the following selected O/I type :The use of Serial 2 depends on the following selected O/I type.

HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G series:

HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G series:

Serial 2 maybe selected as the “O/I
Link Master” for O/I Link communication, or select “Host Communication” as the communication interface
for PLC communication.

Select “O/I Link Slave” for O/I Link
communication.

HG2G-S/-5S, HG1F/2F/3F/4F series:

HG2G-S/-5S, HG1F/2F/3F/4F series:

Not Supported.
Touch:

O/I Link

Select the O/I Link Master as thecommunication interface for th O/I
Link communication and the External Device Communication as
the communication interface forExternal Device communication.

Select the O/I Link Slave as thecommunication interface for the O/I
Link Communication

Using the O/I Link adaptor depends on
the selected O/I type:

Using the O/I Link adaptor depends on
the selected O/I type:

HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G series:

HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G series:

Not available.
HG2G-S/-5S, HG1F/2F/3F/4F series:
Select “O/I Link Master”.

Touch:
Not Supported.
Project Settings System

Not available.
HG2G-S/-5S, HG1F/2F/3F/4F series:
Select “O/I Link Slave” as the interface used for O/I Link communication.
Touch:
Not Supported.

Baud Rate

Match to the setting of O/I Link slave.

Match to the setting of O/I Link master.

Start Time

Set it according to the environment.

Setting not required.

Use System Area

When Use System Area is selected, we recommend that you make the setting sothat there is no overlap. Overlap between system areas can affect operation.

Use System Areas 3,
4
Watch Dog

Set according to your application.

DeviceTime

562

Not Supported.
Touch:

External Device Setup Manual

3 Communication Service

3

Communication Service

The Master is equipped with registers for changing the slave connection settings and for monitoring the online status of the slaves.
In addition, the slaves are equipped with a register that can be used to monitor the polling period of the master.

Online status indicates that the master and a slave are communicating normally, and offline status indicates that either the
master is not communicating with a slave or there is a problem with the communication.

3.1

Slave Registration Setting Register (LSD102 in the master)This register can be used to change the slave connection settings. You can freely add and remove slaves using this master register. The
configuration of the register is given below.

3
3
3
3

Slaves whose corresponding bit is “1” are registered.

3
3

3.2

Slave Online Data Register (LSD104 in the master)This register can be used to monitor the online status of the slaves registered to the O/I Link. The configuration of the register is given
below.

O/I Link Communication

After power is applied or the screen data is downloaded, the slaves to be used are cleared in accordance with the connection settings
made using WindO/I-NV2 or WindO/I-NV3. To add or remove slaves, set their corresponding bits to 1 or 0 respectively.

3
3
3
3

Bits corresponding to online slaves are 1, and bits corresponding to offline slaves or slaves not selected for connection are 0.

3
If the values of the data for the slave registration setting and the slave online data register are not the same, either the registered slave does not exist, or there is some problem with the slave connection. Check the wiring and the settings.

3.3

O/I Link Polling Period Register (LSD101 in the slaves)

This register stores the value of the polling period from the master in 10 msec steps. Use it to provide an indication of the responsetime from the master.

3.4

Slave Error information Register(LSD106 in the master)

When the communication error occurred between master and any slave, the bit of each slave turns on for one scan time.

External Device Setup Manual

3
3
3
3

563

Chapter 3

4Communication Status Confirmation

4.1

Master Error Processing

The master does not display O/I Link errors. To monitor for errors, compare LSD102 and LSD104. If they are different, it indicatesthat there is a communication problem.
In the case of PLC Link communication with the PLC, errors are displayed and the error information is written to the System Area.

4.2

Slave Error Processing

When a slave is not engaged in O/I Link communication with the master, Network Offline is displayed in the center of the screen. The
screen is cleared when communication starts.

4.3

Status of a Slave in the O/I Link

If a slave unit does not exist or fails to engage in normal communication even though the slave is registered in the Slave Registration
Setting Register (LSD102 in the master), the status of the slave is referred to as “offline” status.
Conversely, the status of the slave in which normal communication is executed is referred to as “online” status.
When a slave unit is in offline status, the master always monitors the slave status if it is online. In one cycle, the master searches forone slave unit in the offline status after the master completes the communications with all slave units in online status. Two sets of O/
I cycle periods are required in order to recognize two slave units in offline status.
Fig. When 2 slave units are in offline status:
The numbers in () indicate the processing sequence.

The Time Out duration for the command that detects the presence/absence of a slave (hereafter referred to as a handshake command)is set to 30 msec on the master.

564

External Device Setup Manual

4 Communication Status Confirmation

When there are one or more slave units in the offline status, the total scanning time of the O/I Link will increase by 30 msec. Even
when 15 slave units are in offline status, the increase will remain at 30 msec.
After power is turned on, the master sends handshake commands to the registered slave units in the ascending sequence and launches
normal communication starting with the slave units that send back the response.
When 15 slave units are registered, and only the 15th slave actually exist, the master sends handshake commands sequentially startingfrom the 1st slave unit until it recognizes the 15th slave unit. The whole sequence takes approximately 420 msec (30 msec x 14).
After the data transmission with the 15th slave unit is completed, the master registers the slave to LSD102 and performs normal communications with Slave 15. During the communication, the master sends a handshake command to one slave unit in offline status per
one O/I Link scanning.

3
3
3
3
3
3
O/I Link Communication

3
3

4.4

Slave changes status from Online to Offline in the O/I Link

When a slave does not respond during normal communication between the master and a slave, the master aborts the processing andstarts communicating with the next slave unit. During the next O/I Link cycle, the master will again send a command to the slave unit
with which the error occurred during the previous cycle. If the slave does not respond again, the slave will set to the offline state andwill be deleted from Slave online information register (LSD104 in the master).

3
3
3
3
3
3
3

External Device Setup Manual565

Chapter 3

5

Notice to O/I link

5.1

Runtime System Software Version of the MICRO/I or Touch

The O/I Link communication will not function if the MICRO/I or Touch with runtime system software version 1.7 and above are usedwith older version of the software, 1.6x or earlier.

5.2

Communication Traffic Volume of the O/I Link Network

The network scanning time which includes the time to retrieve data from PLC and also to communicate to O/I link depends on theamount of communication on the network.
When there is a lot of traffic on the network, scanning may take more time, as a result it may cause O/I to operate slow.
At the worst case, O/I is not able to complete scanning, and displays an error message, “Network Off-line”.
Please follow instructions below to improve performance. These instructions should reduce amount of communication on the network.
Item

MeasureWhen Base Screen or Popup Screen is switched frequently.

Please modify the settings so that Screen isn’t switched frequently.

When monitoring schedule is set shorter than the timeneeded for scanning network.

Please consider the time needed for network scanning before setting
schedule for alarm log and parts.

When there are many devices per screen.

Please reduce number of devices set per screen.

We strongly recommend only using alarm log setting on Master.

You can check the scanning time on the network by LSD6 of the master O/I and LSD101 of the slave O/I.

5.3

Notice of the case of HG1F

• Can not use the function of using serial I/F2 (user communication, printer) and O/I Link at the same time in HG1F.
• O/I Link communication is stop, when put the maintenance cable into the serial I/F2 in HG1F.

566

External Device Setup Manual

6 Result on the Performance Evaluation of the MICRO/I

6

Result on the Performance Evaluation of the MICRO/I

Evaluation of O/I Link performance with the MICRO/I is conducted in the following conditions.

6.1

3

Conditions

PLC

PLC Link compatible MELSEC-Q Series

Baud Rate: 115200 bps

O/I Link

No. of units: 16 Total cable length: 200 m

Baud Rate: 115 kbps

6.1.1

3
3

When devices of the same type are set for Slave 1 to 15

For master unit, enable System Area 1 to 4 (12 words data).
For the Slave 1 to 15, enable System Area 1 to 4(12 words data) and 50 words data which are same as each Slaves.
O/I Link Polling Period (LSD101 in the slaves)

220 msec

Read scan of PLC device (LSD6 in the master)

150 msec *133*1. Since the master performs lump communication for the devices used redundantly with the slave units, the communication time can be reduced.

6.1.2

3

When devices of different types are set for Slave 1 to 15

O/I Link Polling Period (LSD101 in the slaves)

250 msec

Read scan of PLC device (LSD6 in the master)

1360 msec

The above measurement results vary depending on the Host I/F Driver or Communication Driver.
Use the values as a rough guide. Also make sure to evaluate the performance before constructing a system.

O/I Link Communication

For master unit, enable System Area 1 to 4 (12 words data).
For the Slave 1 to 15, enable System Area 1 to 4(12 words data) and 50 words data which are different from each Slaves.

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

External Device Setup Manual567

Chapter 3

568

External Device Setup ManualChapter 4 DM Link Communication
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

569

Chapter 4

1

Outline1.1

OutlineWith the DM Link communication, devices such as PLCs, PCs, and board computers (hereafter referred to as external device) readfrom and write to dedicated DM Link memory (hereafter referred to as data memory) in the MICRO/I or Touch. Over the serial interface, when one external device is communicating with one MICRO/I or Touch using this communication method it is called DM Link
1:1 communication, and when one external device is communicating with multiple MICRO/I or Touch units, it is called DM Link 1:N
communication. When external devices and the MICRO/I are communicating using DM Link communication over the Ethernet interface (UDP protocol), it is called DM Link Ethernet (UDP) communication.
Each methods use a special protocol developed by IDEC that does not require the external device to run a communications program.
DM Link Ethernet (UDP) Communication is only supported with HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G.

1.2

DM Link Communication

Using DM Link communication, the external device can read from and write to the MICRO/I or Touch data memory. Conversely, ofcourse, the MICRO/I or Touch can display and modify the contents of its data memory.

1.2.1

Reading Data from the External Device

By operating data input parts placed in the MICRO/I or Touch, it is possible to modify the contents of the data memory and then readthis memory using the external device.

1.2.2

Writing Data to the External Device

The external device can write to the MICRO/I or Touch data memory and thereby modify the content of display parts in the
MICRO/I or Touch.

1.2.3

Event Transmission from the MICRO/I or Touch

When values are written to the data memory on the MICRO/I or Touch, there is a function to send the values from the MICRO/I or
Touch. This is called Event Transmission.
Event transmission is not supported with DM Link 1:N communication and DM Link Ethernet (UDP) communication.

570

External Device Setup Manual

1 Outline

DM Link 1:1 Communication
MICR/I or TouchI Internal Data Memery

'0
'0
'0
'0
 㹼





㹼

 㹼
'0
'0

㹼



4
4
4
Read

Write

Event Transmission

4
4

External Devices(PC, PLC or board computer)

4
4
DM Link Station 1

DM Link Station 2

DM Link Station 3

4
DM Link Communication

4

Write
Read

4
4

External Devices(PC, PLC or board computer)

4

DM Link Ethernet (UDP) Communication
㻴㼁㻮

4
4
4

Write

Read
External Devices(PC, PLC or board computer)

External Device Setup Manual571

Chapter 4

2

System Configuration

The system configuration for the DM Link communication is shown below.

572

2.1

DM Link 1:1 Communication

2.2

DM Link 1:N Communication

External Device Setup Manual

2 System Configuration

2.3

DM Link 1:N Communication

㻴㼁㻮

Ethernet(UDP Protocol)

4
4
4
4
4
4

- When using an RS232C connection with DM Link 1:N communication, only one MICRO/I or Touch unit can be connected.

4- When constructing a system using RS422/485, design the circuit so that when the external device receiver input is notconnected, the receiver output is in the mark state.

4
DM Link Communication

4
4
4
4
4
4
4

External Device Setup Manual573

Chapter 4

3

Wiring

The following is an example of wiring for use with DM Link communication.

3.1
3.1.1

RS232CWith Hardware

External Device: DOS/V Personal Computer System.

574

D-sub, 9P connector

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector

Terminal

External Device Setup Manual

3 Wiring

44
4
4
D-sub, 9P connector

D-sub, 9P connector type44
4
4DM Link Communication

4

D-sub, 9P connector

D-sub, 25 connector type

4
4
4
4
4
4

D-sub, 9P connector

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

The pin numbers are for a typical personal computer. Be sure to check the pin arrangement for the external device that you
will be using.

External Device Setup Manual575

Chapter 4

3.1.2

Without Hardware

External Device: DOS/V Personal Computer System.

576

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector plug type

Terminal

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 9P connector type

External Device Setup Manual

3 Wiring

44
4
4
D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 25P connector type44
4
4DM Link Communication

44

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type4

The pin numbers are for a typical personal computer. Be sure to check the pin arrangement for the external device that you
will be using.

4
4
4
4

External Device Setup Manual577

Chapter 4

3.2

RS422/485

3.2.1

4-wireD-sub, 9P connector plug type

Terminal- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" onpage 4.
- Touch has no pin number corresponding to TERM. When a termination resistor is necessary, insert one with suitable resistance value between pin 8 (RDA) and pin 9 (RDB).

578

External Device Setup Manual

3 Wiring

4
4
4
4
4
D-sub, 9P connector type4
4
4
DM Link Communication

4
4

Terminal

4

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

4
4
4
4

External Device Setup Manual579

Chapter 4

D-sub, 25P connector typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

580

External Device Setup Manual

3 Wiring

3.2.2

2-wire4444D-sub, 9P connector plug type44
4
4DM Link Communication

4

Terminal- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" onpage 4.
- HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G Series uses only RDA and RDB when using RS422/485 2-wire, you don’t need to connect SDA or
SDB.
If connecting COM1 on the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G to the external device, do not insert terminating resistor to the external
device. If terminating resistor can not be removed, use COM2 on the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G instead of COM1.
- Touch has no pin number corresponding to TERM. When a termination resistor is necessary, insert one with suitable resistance value between pin 8 (RDA) and pin 9 (RDB).

4
4
4
4
4
4

External Device Setup Manual581

Chapter 4

D-sub, 9P connector type

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

582

External Device Setup Manual

3 Wiring

4
4
4
4
4
D-sub, 25P connector type4
4
4
DM Link Communication

44
4

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

4
4
4
4

External Device Setup Manual583

Chapter 4

3.2.3

RS422/485 2-wire (DM Link 1:N Communication: N=2)

In the following diagram, only describe the terminal name.
Refer to Chapter 4 "3.2.2 2-wire" on page 581 for the correspondence between the terminal name and the pin number
HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G Wiring Diagram

If more than one MICRO/I or Touch are connected to an external device, select “RS422/485 2-wire” as “Serial Interface”.
HG2G-S/-5S, HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F, Touch Wiring Diagram- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F/HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminator switch or communication switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.
- If more than one MICRO/I or Touch are connected to an external device, select “RS422/485 2-wire” as “Serial Interface”.
- Touch has no pin number corresponding to TERM. When a termination resistor is necessary, insert one with suitable resistance value between pin 8 (RDA) and pin 9 (RDB).

584

External Device Setup Manual

4 Communication Specifications

4

Communication Specifications

4.1

Communication Method

The communication method varies depending on the interface selected.

4.1.1

DM Link 1:1 Communication

Interface4

Communication Method

RS232C

Full Duplex

RS422/485 2-wireHalf Duplex

RS422/485 4-wire

Full Duplex

4.1.2

4

4
4

DM Link 1:N Communication

InterfaceCommunication Method

RS232CHalf Duplex

RS422/485 2-wire

44RS422/485 4-wire

4.1.3

DM Link Ethernet (UDP) Communication

Interface

ProtocolEthernet

UDP/IP

4
4

Item

Setting

Synchronization

Asynchronous

DM Link Communication

Baud Rate

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200bps

4

Data Bits

7 or 8 bits

Stop Bits

1 or 2 bits

ParityEven, Odd or None4

4.2

Communication Conditions

4.2.1

DM Link 1:1 Communication / DM Link 1:N Communication

4
4

4
4
4

External Device Setup Manual585

Chapter 4

4.3

Flow control

The following choices are available for the flow control method.

4.3.1

DM Link 1:1 Communication

Interface

Flow Control

RS232C

Hardware/None

RS422/485 2-wireNone

RS422/485 4-wire

4.3.2

DM Link 1:N Communication

Interface

Flow Control

RS232C

Hardware/None

RS422/485 2-wireNone

RS422/485 4-wire586

External Device Setup Manual

5 Data Memory (DM) Allocation

5

Data Memory (DM) Allocation

With the DM Link communication, DM0 to DM13 and DM16 to DM8191 are the user area that you can freely use. DM14 and DM15
are allocated as the event data transmission control area.
However, event transmission is not supported with DM Link 1:N communication and DM Link Ethernet (UDP) communication. The
address range of DM Link Ethernet (UDP) communication is DM16 to DM8191. DM0 to DM15 cannot be used.

4

Data Memory

Description

DM0 to 11

User Area (Event Transmission can be available)

DM12, 13User Area (Event Transmission is not available)

DM14

D0 to D11 Event Transmission enable/disable setting

DM15

Event area start address setting

DM16 to 8191

User Area

5.1

4

4
4
4

System Area

If you allocate DM for use as the system area, make the start address for the system area DM0 or after DM16 to avoid the overlapping
DM14 and DM15. For further details regarding the system area, refer to theWindO/I-NV2 User’s Manual or SmartAXIS Touch
User's Manual.

4

5.2

4

D0 to D11 Event Transmission (DM14)

You can set whether or not DM0 to DM11 are to perform event transmission. When the value in DM14 is 1, system area event transmission is performed, and when it is 0, it is not performed. After power up the value in DM14 is set to 0. Use this in the case that
DM0 to DM11 is specified as the system area.

(1)

When a value equal to or larger than 8192 is written to DM15.

(2)

When DM Link 1:N communication is selected.

DM Link Communication

5.3

(3)

When the serial interface is RS422/485 2-wire.

4(4)

When data in the event area is modified by a write command from the external device.

Event Area Setting (DM15)

Specify the start address for the event area in DM15. The area after the specified address is then allowed to be used for event datatransmission. For example, if the value 256 is written to DM15, the area from DM256 to DM8191 becomes the event area, and if thedata in this area changes an event data transmission is performed. After power up, the value in DM15 is 512.
Event data transmission is not performed in the following cases:

5.4

4

User Area (DM16 to DM8191)

You can freely make use of the area from DM16 to DM8191. Use this area to exchange data with the external device.

4
4
4

4
4
4

External Device Setup Manual587

Chapter 4

6

DM Link Communication Settings

The settings required in WindO/I-NV2 or WindO/I-NV3 for the using the DM Link communication are located in the Configuration - System Setup - Project dialog box. (Refer to 1.3 and 1.4 in Chapter 2 of the WindO/I-NV2 User’s Manual or SmartAXIS
Touch User's Manual. Set the items in the following table in accordance with the external device that you will be using.

6.1

DM Link 1:1 Communication / DM Link 1:N Communication

Dialog Box Name
- Tab Name

Setting Name

Description

Project Settings Host I/F Driver orCommunication
DriverManufacturer

Select IDEC HG System or IDEC System.

Host I/F DriverCommunication Driver

Select DM Link 1:1 for DM Link 1:1 communication and DM Link 1:N for
DM Link 1:N Communication.

Transmission Wait

Set the time after which the MICRO/I or Touch sends a response commandto the external device after receiving a command from the external device.
The actual time until the response is sent is greater than the Transmission
wait time and less than the Transmission wait time +10msec.

Retry Cycles

This setting is not required.

Time Out

Project Settings Communication
Interface

With BCC

Select the checkbox if you want to perform BCC checking.

Max Event Transmission
Words (Only DM Link 1:1)

Set the max number of words for event transmission.

Protocol(Only DM Link 1:1)

Select the number of protocol format.
0: Basic protocol format
1: Protocol format 1(Add an error code and “CR” to “ACK”, “NAK” in
Basic protocol format.)
2: Type 2 (follows the Basic protocol format, but ETX cannot be added
when the BCC check is appended)Type 2 can only be selected for HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G.

DM LINK No.
(Only DM Link 1:N)

Set the DM Link station number.

ProtocolSelect Host Communication.

Baud Rate

Select the same setting used for the external device.

Data Bits

Select the same setting used for the external device. (7 or 8 bits)

Stop Bits

Select the same setting used for the external device (1 or 2 bits)

ParitySelect the same setting used for the external device. (Even, Odd or None)(1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200bps)

Serial Interface

Select the serial interface that you will be using.
(RS232C, RS422/485 2-wire or RS422/485 4-wire)

Flow Control

588

Select either Hardware or None.

External Device Setup Manual6 DM Link Communication Settings

Dialog Box Name
- Tab Name

Setting Name

Project Settings System

Start Time

Set this to 0.

Use System Area

Select this if you want to use the system area.

DeviceSpecify the system area start Device address.

Use System Areas 3, 4

Select this if you want to use the system areas 3 and 4.

Watch Dog

If you select Watch Dog, set the Write Device and the Time (write interval).
If you will transmit from the MICRO/I or Touch to the external device, set a
write device for the Event Transmission area.

DeviceTime

Description

4
4
4
4

6.2

DM Link Ethernet (UDP) Communication

Dialog Box Name
- Tab Name

Setting Name

Description

Project Settings Host I/F Driver

Manufacturer

Select IDEC HG System .

Host I/F Driver

Select DM Link Ethernet (UDP) Communication.

Transmission Wait

Set the time after which the MICRO/I sends a response command to theexternal device after receiving a command from the external device.
The actual time until the response is sent is greater than the Transmission
wait time and less than the Transmission wait time +10msec.

Retry Cycles

This setting is not required.

ProtocolSelect Host Communication.

IP Address

Set the IP address for MICRO/I.

Subnet Mask

Set the subnet mask for MICRO/I.

Default Gateway

Set the default gateway for MICRO/I.

Project Settings Host Port Extension

Port Number

Select the port number used for the communication.

Project Settings System

Start Time

Set this to 0.

Use System Area

Select this if you want to use the system area.

DeviceSpecify the system area start Device address.

Use System Areas 3, 4

Select this if you want to use the system areas 3 and 4.

Watch Dog

If you select Watch Dog, set the Write Device and the Time (write interval).

44
4
DM Link Communication

Time Out
Project Settings Communication
Interface

4

4
4
4
4
4
4

Device4

Time

External Device Setup Manual589

Chapter 4

7

DM Link 1:1Communication Format

With DM Link 1:1 communication, the following communication format is used.

• Command (Response)
Read
Write
Transmission Control
Clear• Event
Event Transmission

7.1

Read

This command is used by the external device to read the MICRO/I or Touch data memory. One command can read a maximum of 255
words of data.

7.1.1

CommandFormatDetailed description
Command

Code

Description

Bytes

ENQ

05h

Command start

1

R

52h

Read Command1

DM Address

Starting DM address for read.
The hexadecimal value expressed using ASCII code.

4

Words

Number of words to read
The hexadecimal value expressed using ASCII code.

2

BCC

Only required when 'with BCC' is set.
Exclusive OR (HEX) from ENQ to before BCC converted to ASCII code.

2

End

1

CR

590

0Dh

External Device Setup Manual

7 DM Link 1:1Communication Format

7.1.2

Response

Format: Normal response44Format: Error response

44
Detailed description: Normal response
Command

Code

Description

Bytes

02h

Response start

1

R

52h

Read response1

DM address

Starting DM address for read. The hexadecimal value expressed using ASCII code.

4

Words

Number of words to read
The hexadecimal value expressed using ASCII code.

2

Data

DM address data
The hexadecimal value expressed using ASCII code.
The words are in order from the lowest address.

4xN

Only required when 'with BCC' is set.
(However, this is not added when Type 2 is selected for the Protocol.)At the end of the response data.

1

Only required when 'with BCC' is set.
Exclusive OR (HEX) from ENQ to before BCC converted to ASCII code.

2

End

1

ETX

03h

BCC
CR

7.1.3

0Dh

N is the numberof words

Response Command

44
4
DM Link Communication

STX

4

4
4
4
4

Detailed description: Error response
Command

Code

Description

Bytes

NAK

15h

Command was not received correctly.

1

Refer to 10 Error Processing. (Only Protocol format 1)

1End. (Only Protocol format 1)

1

Error Code
CR

0Dh

4
4
4

External Device Setup Manual591

Chapter 4

7.1.4

Read Sequence

Do not transmit the following command until the external device receives the response of a command which transmitted tothe display machine or serves as a timeout.

7.1.5

Read Communication Example• To read the two words of data in DM200 and DM201 (without BCC, Basic protocol format)
If the data in DM200 is 4951 (1357h), and the data in DM201 is 9320 (2468h) the sequence is as follows.

The DM address 200 (00C8h) is converted and expressed as ASCII code.

592

External Device Setup Manual

7 DM Link 1:1Communication Format

7.2

Write

This command is used by the external device to write data to the MICRO/I or Touch data memory. One command can write a maximum of 255 words of data.

7.2.1

4

CommandFormat444Detailed description
Command

Code

Description

ENQ

05h

Command start

1

W

57h

Write Command1

DM Address

DM address to begin writing fromThe hexadecimal value expressed using ASCII code.

4

Words

Number of words to write
The hexadecimal value expressed using ASCII code.

2

Data

DM ADDRESS DATA. The hexadecimal value expressed using ASCII code.
The words are in order from the lowest address.

4xN
N is the numberof words

4

Only required when 'with BCC' is set.

2

DM Link Communication

BCC

Bytes

0Dh

End

4
4

4

Exclusive OR (HEX) from ENQ to before BCC converted to ASCII code.
CR

4

1

4
4
4
4
4
4

External Device Setup Manual593

Chapter 4

7.2.2

Response

Format: Normal response

Format: Error response

Detailed description: Normal response
Command

Code

Description

Bytes

ACK

06h

Write completed normally.

1

W

57h

Write response. (Only Protocol format 1)

1

CR

0Dh

End. (Only Protocol format 1)

1

Detailed description: Error response
Command

Code

Description

Bytes

NAK

15h

Command was not received correctly.

1

Refer to 10 Error Processing. (Only Protocol format 1)

1

CR

0Dh

End. (Only Protocol format 1)

1

7.2.3

Write Sequence

Error Code

Do not transmit the following command until the external device receives the response of a command which transmitted tothe display machine or serves as a timeout.

594

External Device Setup Manual

7 DM Link 1:1Communication Format

7.2.4

Write Communication Example• Write 22136 (5678h) to DM100 and 4660 (1234h) to DM101 (without BCC, Basic protocol format)

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
DM Link Communication

4
4
4
4
4
4
4

External Device Setup Manual595

Chapter 4

7.3

Transmission Control

The external device command controls the transmission from the MICRO/I or Touch. The commands are Transmission Prohibitedand Transmission Allowed. The Transmission Control commands are the same as the general X-ON and X-OFF commands. Therefore, you can use DM Link 1:1 Communication with an external device that can perform X-ON and OFF control without making any
settings.

7.3.1

Stop Transmission Command

FormatDetailed description
Command

Code

Description

Bytes

DC3

13h

Stop Transmission

1- After the MICRO/I or Touch receives the DC3 command it sends up to a maximum of 15 bytes of data and then transmission is stopped.
- While transmission is stopped the MICRO/I or Touch can store up to 1023 bytes of transmission data. If Event Transmission occurs that would cause this number to be exceeded, the MICRO/I or Touch stops operating until the data is output.
- There is no response to the Transmission Prohibited command.

7.3.2

Transmission Allowed Command

FormatDetailed description
Command

Code

Description

Bytes

DC1

11h

Transmission Allowed1- After the MICRO/I or Touch receives DC1, it sends out all event data transmissions that were generated while transmission was stopped.
- There is no response to the Transmission Allowed command.
- When the ENQ (Start Command, 05h) is received, the MICRO/I or Touch also enters the Transmission Allowed state.
- After receiving ENQ, the MICRO/I or Touch sends out all event data transmissions generated while transmission was
stopped.
- After receiving ENQ, the MICRO/I or Touch receive buffer is cleared.

596

External Device Setup Manual

7 DM Link 1:1Communication Format

7.3.3

Transmission Control Sequence

4
4
4
7.3.4

Transmission Control Communication Example

Example 1: Transmission stopped by DC3 and started by DC1

4
4
4
4
4

Example 2: Transmission stopped by DC3 and started by ENQ

DM Link Communication

4
4
4
4
4
4
4

External Device Setup Manual597

Chapter 4

7.4

Clear Command

This external device command clears the MICRO/I or Touch receive buffer.

7.4.1

CommandFormatDetailed description
Command

Code

Description

Bytes

EOT

04h

Clear the receive buffer

1

When the MICRO/I or Touch receives the EOT command, all data received prior to receiving it is cleared.

598

External Device Setup Manual

7 DM Link 1:1Communication Format

7.5

Event Transmission

This is used to perform Event Transmission when a value in the MICRO/I or Touch data memory is changed

7.5.1

Command4

Format4
4Detailed description
Command

Code

Description

Bytes

STX

02h

Command start

1

E

45h

Event Transmission command1

DM Address

Event Transmission address. The hexadecimal value expressed using ASCII code.

4

Words

Event Transmission words. The hexadecimal value expressed using ASCII code.

2

Data

DM Address data. The hexadecimal value expressed using ASCII code.

4

Only required when “with BCC” is set.
(However, this is not added when Type 2 is selected for the Protocol.)Command end of the event transmission data.

1

Only required when 'with BCC' is set.
Exclusive OR (HEX) from ENQ to before BCC converted to ASCII code.

2

End

1

ETX

03h

BCC
0Dh

4
4
4
4
DM Link Communication

CR

4

4

- Number of Event Transmission words should not be larger than the number of Max Event Transmission Words. If Max
Event Transmission Words is 0, then Event Transmission Words is set to 1.
- The Max Event Transmission Words setting is set from 0 to 255.

4
4

7.5.2

Event Data Transmission Sequence

4
4
4
4

External Device Setup Manual599

Chapter 4

7.5.3

Event Data Transmission Communication Example

Example 1: Write 1 to DM512 (without BCC)

Example 2: When the above example occurred in the middle of a read (without BCC)

600

External Device Setup Manual8 DM Link 1:N Communication Format

8

DM Link 1:N Communication Format

The communication format with DM Link 1:N Communication is as follows.

• Command (Response)

4

Read
Write
Clear

8.1

4

Read

4

The Read command is used by the external device to read the MICRO/I or Touch data memory.
One command can read a maximum of 255 words of data.

8.1.1

4

CommandFormat4
4Detailed description
Code

Description

Bytes

ENQ

05h

Command Start

1

DM Link Station Number expressed in ASCII.

2Read Command1

DM address

DM address to start reading fromThe hexadecimal value expressed using ASCII code.

4

Words

Number of words to read
The hexadecimal value expressed using ASCII code.

2

BCC

Only required when 'with BCC' is set.
Exclusive OR (HEX) from ENQ to before BCC converted to ASCII code.

2

End

1

Station Number
R

CR

52h

0Dh

4
4
DM Link Communication

Command

4
4
4
4
4
4
4

External Device Setup Manual601

Chapter 4

8.1.2

Response

Format: Normal response

Format: Error response

Detailed description: Normal response
Command

Code

Description

Bytes

STX

02h

Response start

1

DM Link Station Number expressed in ASCII.

2

Station Number

Read response1

DM addressR

DM address to start reading fromThe hexadecimal value expressed using ASCII code.

4

Words

Number of words to read
The hexadecimal value expressed using ASCII code.

2

Data

DM Address Data
The hexadecimal value expressed using ASCII code.
The words are in order from the lowest address.

4xN

Only added when 'with BCC' is set.
End of the response data.

1

Only added when 'with BCC' is set.
Exclusive OR (HEX) from ENQ to before BCC converted to ASCII code.

2

End

1

ETX

52h

03h

BCC
CR

0Dh

N is the numberof words

Detailed description: Error response
Command

Code

Description

NAK

15h

Command was not received correctly.

1

DM Link Station Number expressed in ASCII.

2Refer to 10 Error Processing.

1

End

1

Station Number
Error Code
CR

602

0Dh

External Device Setup Manual

Bytes

8 DM Link 1:N Communication Format

8.1.3

Read Sequence44
4
4
Do not transmit the following command until the external device receives the response of a command which transmitted tothe display machine or serves as a timeout.

8.1.4

Read Communication Example• Read the two words of data from DM200 and DM201 of DM Link Station Number 1 (without BCC)

4
4

If the data in DM200 is 4951 (1357h), and the data in DM201 is 9320 (2468h) the sequence is as follows.

The DM address 200 (00C8h) is converted to ASCII code and stored.

4
4
DM Link Communication

4
4
4
4
4
4
4

External Device Setup Manual603

Chapter 4

8.2

Write

This command is used by the external device to write data to the MICRO/I or Touch data memory.
One command can write a maximum of 255 words of data.

8.2.1

CommandFormatDetailed description
Command

Code

Description

ENQ

05h

Command Start

1

DM Link Station Number expressed in ASCII.

2

Station NumberW

57h

Write Command1

DM Address

DM address to start writing fromThe hexadecimal value expressed using ASCII code.

4

Words

Number of words to write
The hexadecimal value expressed using ASCII code.

2

Data

DM Address Data
The hexadecimal value expressed using ASCII code.
The words are in order from the lowest address.

4xN

Only added when 'with BCC' is set.
Exclusive OR (HEX) from ENQ to before BCC converted to ASCII code.

2

End

1

BCC
CR

604

Bytes

0Dh

External Device Setup Manual

N is the numberof words

8 DM Link 1:N Communication Format

8.2.2

Response

Format: Normal response44Format: Error response

44
Detailed description: Normal response
Command

Code

Description

Bytes

ACK

06h

Write finished correctly.

1

DM Link Station Number expressed in ASCII.

2

Station NumberW

57h

Write response

1

CR

0Dh

End

1

Detailed description: Error response
Code

NAK

15h

Station Number
Error code
CR

0Dh

Description

Bytes

Command was not received correctly.

1

DM Link Station Number expressed in ASCII.

2Refer to 10 Error Processing.

1

End

1

4
4
4
DM Link Communication

Transmission
Command

4

4
4
4
4
4
4
4

External Device Setup Manual605

Chapter 4

8.2.3

Write Sequence

Do not transmit the following command until the external device receives the response of a command which transmitted tothe display machine or serves as a timeout.

8.2.4

Write Communication Example• Write 22136 (5678h) to DM100 and 4660 (1234h) to DM101 (without BCC, Basic protocol format)

606

External Device Setup Manual8 DM Link 1:N Communication Format

8.3

Clear

This command is used by the external device to clear the MICRO/I or Touch receive buffer.

8.3.1

Command4

Format4
4Detailed description
Command

Code

Description

Bytes

EOT

04h

Clear receive buffer

1

When the MICRO/I or Touch receives the EOT command, all data received prior to receiving it is cleared.

4
4
4

8.4

Station Number

4

Station Number

Operation

4

The station number of the MICRO/I or Touch

Reads from or writes to the data memory and returns a response. This is used innormal operation.

FFh

Writes to the data memory, but does not return a response.
This is used to write to all connected MICRO/I or Touch units at one time.

00h

Reads from the data memory, and returns a response.
This is used for monitoring.

8.4.1

Communication Example

Example: Write Ah to DM0 (with BCC)DM Link Communication

With DM Link 1:N Communication, the MICRO/I or Touch receives commands when the station number is its own station number,
FFh or 00h. The operations that take place are given in the following table.

4
4
4
4
4
4
4

External Device Setup Manual607

Chapter 4

9

DM Link Ethernet (UDP) Communication

The communication format with DM Link Ethernet (UDP) Communication is as follows.

• Command (Response)
Read
Write

9.1

Read

The Read command is used by the external device to read the MICRO/I data memory.
One command can read a maximum of 255 words of data.
The MICRO/I returns a response to the device (command source IP address and port number) that sent the command.

9.1.1

CommandFormatDetailed description
Command

Code

Description

Bytes

ENQ

05h

Command Start

1

MICRO/I sets an ID on the external device side. Specify the ID in a range from0000h to FFFFh with the hexadecimal value expressed using ASCII code.

4

Transaction ID
R

Read Command1

DM address

DM address to start reading fromThe hexadecimal value expressed using ASCII code.

4

Words

Number of words to read
The hexadecimal value expressed using ASCII code.

2

End

1

CR

608

52h

0Dh

External Device Setup Manual9 DM Link Ethernet (UDP) Communication

9.1.2

Response

Format: Normal response44Format: Error response

44
Detailed description: Normal response
Command

Code

Description

Bytes

STX

02h

Response start

1

MICRO/I stores the Transaction ID which is set by the external device. The
hexadecimal value expressed using ASCII code.

4

Transaction ID
52h

4

Read response1

DM address

DM address to start reading fromThe hexadecimal value expressed using ASCII code.

4

Words

Number of words to read
The hexadecimal value expressed using ASCII code.

2

4

Data

DM Address Data
The hexadecimal value expressed using ASCII code.
The words are in order from the lowest address.

4xN

End

1

DM Link Communication

R

4

CR

0Dh

N is the numberof words

Detailed description: Error response
Command

Code

NAK

15h

Description

Bytes

Command was not received correctly.

1

Transaction ID

MICRO/I stores the Transaction ID which is set by the external device. The
hexadecimal value expressed using ASCII code.

4

Error Code

Added for an error response. (Refer to Chapter 4 "11 Error Codes" onpage 615)

1

End

1

CR

0Dh

The external device can use the Transaction ID to determine the corresponding command for a received response.

External Device Setup Manual

4

4
4
4
4
4
4
4

609

Chapter 4

9.1.3

Read Sequence

Do not transmit the following command until the external device receives the response of a command which transmitted tothe display machine or serves as a timeout.

9.1.4

Read Communication Example• Read the two words of data from DM200 and DM201
If the data in DM200 is 4951 (1357h), the data in DM201 is 9320 (2468h) , and the Transaction ID is 1234h the sequence is as follows.

The DM address 200 (00C8h) is converted to ASCII code and stored.

610

External Device Setup Manual9 DM Link Ethernet (UDP) Communication

9.2

Write

This command is used by the external device to write data to the MICRO/I data memory.
One command can write a maximum of 255 words of data.
The MICRO/I returns a response to the device (command source IP address and port number) that sent the command.

9.2.1

4

CommandFormat444Detailed description
Command

Code

Description

Bytes

ENQ

05h

Command Start

1

MICRO/I sets an ID on the external device side. Specify the ID in a range from0000h to FFFFh with the hexadecimal value expressed using ASCII code.

4

Write Command1

DM address to start writing from4

Transaction IDW

57h

DM Address

The hexadecimal value expressed using ASCII code.
Words

Number of words to write

0Dh

4
4

DM Address Data

4xN

The hexadecimal value expressed using ASCII code.
The words are in order from the lowest address.

N is the numberof words

End

1

DM Link Communication

CR

4

2

The hexadecimal value expressed using ASCII code.
Data

4

4
4
4
4
4
4
4

External Device Setup Manual611

Chapter 4

9.2.2

Response

Format: Normal response

Format: Error response

Detailed description: Normal response
Command

Code

ACK

06h

Transaction ID

Description

Bytes

Write finished correctly.

1

MICRO/I stores the Transaction ID which is set by the external device. The
hexadecimal value expressed using ASCII code.

4

W

57h

Write response

1

CR

0Dh

End

1

Detailed description: Error response
Transmission
Command

Code

Description

Bytes

NAK

15h

Command was not received correctly.

1

Transaction ID

MICRO/I stores the Transaction ID which is set by the external device. The
hexadecimal value expressed using ASCII code.

4

Error code

Added for an error response. (Refer to Chapter 4 "11 Error Codes" onpage 615)

1

End

1

CR

0Dh

The external device can use the Transaction ID to determine the corresponding command for a received response.

612

External Device Setup Manual9 DM Link Ethernet (UDP) Communication

9.2.3

Write Sequence44
4
4
Do not transmit the following command until the external device receives the response of a command which transmitted tothe display machine or serves as a timeout.

9.2.4

Write Communication Example• Write 22136 (5678h) to DM100 and 4660 (1234h) to DM101
If the Transaction ID is 7890h the sequence is as follows.

4
4
4

The DM address 100 (0064h) is converted to ASCII code and stored.

4
DM Link Communication

4
4
4
4
4
4
4

External Device Setup Manual613

Chapter 4

10 BCC Calculation
10.1 BCC Calculation Example (for DM Link 1:N Communication)

Refer to the Exclusive OR (XOR) truth table to calculate BCC.)

614

External Device Setup Manual

11 Error Codes

11 Error Codes• When a command that starts with the ENQ (05h) code and ends with CR (0Dh) code is received, but the content is

not valid, an error response is returned. For DM Link Ethernet (UDP), a response is returned if ENQ(05h), CR(0Dh) ,and the Transaction ID are correct.

4• The error response codes are as follows.
Error CodeType

Error Description'2' (32h)

BCC

BCC doesn't match (when “with BCC” is set)

'3' (33h)

Command

A command other than 'W' or 'R' was received(with the exception of the Clear command)'4' (34h)

Address

Invalid DM address(DM Link 1:1 Communication, DM Link 1:N Communication: Outside DM0 to DM8191
DM Link Ethernet (UDP) Communication: Outside DM16 to DM8191)'5' (35h)

No. of Words

Invalid number of words specified(outside the range 1 to 255 or the DM address + No. of words - 1 exceeds 8191)'6' (36h)

Received Bytes

Received bytes invalid (the number of words of data did not exist)

The error code is a code appended to a negative acknowledgment when DM LINK(1:N), DM Link Ethernet (UDP) or 1 isselected in Protocol of DM LINK(1:1). Not used when 0 is selected in DM LINK(1:1).

4
4
4
4
4
4
4

The MICRO/I or Touch replies to commands from the external device within 10msec plus the transmission wait. However, the delay
may occur when the screen image is updating.
With DM Link Ethernet (UDP) communication, when commands are simultaneously received from multiple external devices, theresponse processing is performed in order from the received commands. However, when a command is continuously received, it may
no longer be possible to respond correctly.
If there was no response from the MICRO/I, retry seinding command on the external device side after an amount of time longer than
"2 seconds + transmission wait time" has elapsed.

DM Link Communication

11.1 Response Time

4
4
4
4
4
4
4

External Device Setup Manual615

Chapter 4616

External Device Setup ManualChapter 5 Modbus
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

617

Chapter 5

1

Connection Table

Selecting Modbus RTU Master or Modbus TCP Client for the Host I/F Driver or Communication Driver allows the user to use the 1:
N Communication function.

• 1: N Communication function (Chapter 6 1: N Communication Function)
1.1

Compatible Protocols

ProtocolWindO/I-NV2, WindO/I-NV3 Settings
Interface

Flow Control

Host I/F DriverCommunication
DriverModbus RTU Master

RS232C, RS422/485 2-wire, Hardware, None
RS422/485 4-wire

Modbus RTU Master

Modbus ASCII Master

RS232C, RS422/485 2-wire, Hardware, None
RS422/485 4-wire

Modbus ASCII Master

Modbus TCP Client

Ethernet-

Modbus TCP Client

Modbus TCP Server

Ethernet-

Modbus TCP Server

Modbus RTU Slave

RS232C, RS422/485 2-wire, Hardware, None
RS422/485 4-wire

Product Series
HG2G-5F,
HG3G/4G

HG2G-S/-5S

HG1F/
2F/ 2S/
3F/ 4F

Touch

X

X

X

X

X

---

---

X

Modbus RTU Slave

Refer to Chapter 5 "6 Modbus TCP Server/Modbus RTU Slave Function" on page 638

Modbus TCP Client or Modbus TCP Server cannot be used as Host I/F Driver by MICRO/I equipped with the Ethernet
interface.

618

External Device Setup Manual

1 Connection Table

1.2

Compatible PLCs
System(CPU unit)

Link Unit

WindO/I-NV2, WindO/I-NV3 Settings
Interface

Flow
Control

Host I/F Driver,
Communication
Driver

HardwareModbus RTU Master,
Modbus ASCII Master

Product Series
HG2G-5F, HG2G HG1F/ Touch
HG3G/4G -S/-5S 2F/ 2S/
3F/ 4F

Schneider Twido
X

X

X

5

TWD LC*A 10DRF

Not required(connects to CPU
unit directly)

RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P630)

TWD LC*A 16DRF,
TWD LC*A 24DRF,
TWD LCA* 40DRF

Not required(connects to CPU
unit directly)

RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P630)

TWD NAC 232D

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P627)

TWD NAC 485D

RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P630)

5

TWD NAC 485T

RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 3(refer to P633)

5

Not required(connects to CPU
unit directly)

RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P630)

5

TWD NOZ 485D

RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 2(refer to P630)

5

TWD NOZ 232D

RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P627)

5

TWD NOZ 485T

RS422/485 2-wireConnection Diagram 3(refer to P633)

TWD LMDA 20DTK,TWD LMDA 20DUK,TWD LMDA 20DRT,
TWD LMDA 40DTK,TWD LMDA 40DUK

X

5

5
5

5
ModbusTWD XCP ODM RS232C+TWD NAC 232D Connection Diagram 1(refer to P627)

5

TWD XCP ODM RS422/485 2-wire+TWD NAC 485D Connection Diagram 2(refer to P630)

5

TWD XCP ODM RS422/485 2-wire+TWD NAC 485T Connection Diagram 3(refer to P633)

5

Schneider Momentum
171CCC96020

Not required(connects toEthernet Port*1)(Ethernet) *1

Modbus TCP Client

X

X

-

*1 This PLC was used to test & verify communications.

X

X

5
5

Modbus TCP Client cannot be used as Host I/F Driver by MICRO/I equipped with the Ethernet interface.

External Device Setup Manual619

Chapter 52

System Configuration

This is the system configuration for the connection of Schneider PLCs to the MICRO/I or Touch.

2.1

Modbus RTU Master
MICRO/I
Touch
RS232C, RS485

Equipment for Modbus RTU Slave

2.2

Modbus ASCII Master
MICRO/I
Touch
RS232C, RS485

Equipment for Modbus ASCII Slave

2.3

Modbus TCP Client
MICRO/I
Touch
Ethernet

Equipment for Modbus TCP Server- Use a crossover cable to connect the MICRO/I or Touch and PLC directly.
- When using a hub (Ethernet switch), use a cable that can be used with the hub.

620

External Device Setup Manual

2 System Configuration

2.4

Modbus TCP Server
MICRO/I
Touch

5

Ethernet

5

Equipment for Modbus TCP Client5- Use a crossover cable to connect the MICRO/I or Touch and PLC directly.
- When using a hub (Ethernet switch), use a cable that can be used with the hub.

2.5

5Modbus RTU Slave
MICRO/I
Touch
RS232C, RS485

555Equipment for Modbus RTU Master

5
2.6

Twido

5

• Serial Port on CPU module
MICRO/I
Touch

5
Modbus

RS485
Connection Diagram 2 (refer to P630)

5

TWD LC*A 10DRF

5

TWD LC*A 16DRF
TWD LC*A 24DRF

5

TWD LCA* 40DRF
TWD LMDA 20DTKTWD LMDA 20DUK

5TWD LMDA 20DRT
TWD LMDA 40DTK

5

TWD LMDA 40DUK

In case of HG2F/3F/4F a connection cable is available. (part number: HG9Z-3C115).

External Device Setup Manual621

Chapter 5• Compact Controller + Communication Adapter
MICRO/I
Touch
RS232C
Connection Diagram 1 (refer to P627)

TWD LC*A 16DRF

TWDNAC232D

TWD LC*A 24DRF(Communication Adapter)

TWD LCA* 40DRF

MICRO/I
Touch
RS485
Connection Diagram 2 (refer to P630)

TWD LC*A 16DRF

TWDNAC485D

TWD LC*A 24DRF(Communication Adapter)

TWD LCA* 40DRF
MICRO/I
Touch
RS485
Connection Diagram 3 (refer to P633)

TWD LC*A 16DRF

TWDNAC485T

TWD LC*A 24DRF(Communication Adapter)

TWD LCA* 40DRF

622

External Device Setup Manual

2 System Configuration• Module Controller + Communication Module
MICRO/I
Touch
RS232C
Connection Diagram 1 (refer to P627)

5
5

TWD LMDA 20DTK

5TWD NOZ232DTWD LMDA 20DUK

5TWD LMDA 20DRT
TWD LMDA 40DTKTWD LMDA 40DUK

5MICRO/I
Touch
RS485
Connection Diagram 2 (refer to P630)

555

TWD LMDA 20DTKTWD NOZ485D5

TWD LMDA 20DUKTWD LMDA 20DRT
TWD LMDA 40DTK

5

TWD LMDA 40DUKRS485
Connection Diagram 3 (refer to P633)

Modbus

MICRO/I
Touch

5
5
5

TWD LMDA 20DTKTWD NOZ485T

TWD LMDA 20DUK

5TWD LMDA 20DRT

5

TWD LMDA 40DTKTWD LMDA 40DUKExternal Device Setup Manual623

Chapter 5• Module Controller + HMI Module + Communication Adapter
MICRO/I
Touch
RS232C
Connection Diagram 1(refer to P627)

TWD LMDA 20DTKTWD LMDA 20DUKTWD XCP ODM(HMI Module)

TWD NAC232D(Communication Adapter)

TWD LMDA 20DRT
TWD LMDA 40DTKTWD LMDA 40DUKMICRO/I
Touch
RS485
Connection Diagram 2(refer to P630)

TWD LMDA 20DTKTWD LMDA 20DUKTWD XCP ODM(HMI Module)

TWD NAC485D(Communication Adapter)

TWD LMDA 20DRT
TWD LMDA 40DTKTWD LMDA 40DUKMICRO/I
Touch
RS485
Connection Diagram 3(refer to P633)

TWD LMDA 20DTKTWD LMDA 20DUKTWD XCP ODM(HMI Module)

TWD NAC485T(Communication Adapter)

TWD LMDA 20DRT
TWD LMDA 40DTKTWD LMDA 40DUK

624

External Device Setup Manual

2 System Configuration

2.7

Momentum (MODUBS/TCP Client)
Ethernet
10BASE-T

5
5

HG2G-S/-5S/-5F,
HG3G/4G,
HG3F/4F,
Touch

171CCC9602

55- Use a crossover cable to connect the MICRO/I or Touch and PLC directly.
- When using a hub (Ethernet switch), use a cable that can be used with the hub.
- Please avoid using for the long distance communication because this driver may be used in the control network in thesame factory only.

2.8

5
5

1: N Communication-TWDL CAA16DRF/TWDLCAA24DRF +TWDNAC485D(Communication board)5

The 1: N communication can be established by using the following connection.
MICRO/I
Touch

5
5
RS485
Connection Diagram 2

5Modbus

5
5

...

5
PLC1

PLC2

PLC3

PLCn

5
5

External Device Setup Manual625

Chapter 5

2.9

1: N Communication- TWDLCAA16DRF/TWDLCAA24DRF +TWDNAC485T(Communication board)

The 1: N communication can be established by using the following connection.
MICRO/I
Touch

RS485
Connection Diagram 3

...

PLC1

626

PLC2

PLC3

External Device Setup Manual

PLCn

3 Connection Diagram

3

Connection Diagram
For details regarding wiring and termination resistors, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page
4.

5
5

3.1

Connection Diagram 1: TWDNAC232D to MICRO/I or Touch

5
5
5
5
5
5
Mini Din 8P

D-sub, 9P connector plug type55Modbus5555Mini Din 8P

Terminal

5

External Device Setup Manual627

Chapter 5

Mini Din 8P

D-sub, 9P connector socket typeIn case of HG1F a connection cable is available. (part number: HG9Z-XC183).

Mini Din 8P

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

- In case of HG2F/3F/4F a connection cable is available. (part number: HG9Z-3C125).
- The connection diagram 1 is not same as HG9Z-3C125. But both diagrams are available. Refer to Chapter 7 "1.4 PLC
connection cable: HG9Z-3C125" on page 671 about the connection diagram of HG9Z-3C125.

628

External Device Setup Manual

3 Connection Diagram

5
5
5
5Mini Din 8P

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

5
5
5
5
5
5
Modbus55555External Device Setup Manual629

Chapter 5

3.2

Connection Diagram 2: TWDNAC485D to MICRO/I or Touch

Mini Din 8P

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

Mini Din 8P

Terminal- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" onpage 4- HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G Series uses only RDA and RDB when using RS422/485 2-wire, you don’t need to connect SDA or
SDB.
If connecting COM1 on the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G to the external device, do not insert terminating resistor to the external
device. If terminating resistor can not be removed, use COM2 on the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G instead of COM1.
- Touch has no pin number corresponding to TERM. When a termination resistor is necessary, insert one with suitable resistance value between pin 8 (RDA) and pin 9 (RDB).

630

External Device Setup Manual

3 Connection Diagram

5
5
5
5

Mini Din 8P

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

5
5
5
5
5

Terminal

5

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

ModbusMini Din 8P

5
5

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG1F, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control to NONE.

555External Device Setup Manual631

Chapter 5

Mini Din 8P

D-sub, 25P connector socket typeIn case of HG2F/3F/4F a connection cable is available. (part number: HG9Z-3C115).

D-sub, 9P connector plug typeD-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

632

External Device Setup Manual

3 Connection Diagram

3.3

Connection Diagram 3: TWDNAC485T to MICRO/I or Touch

55
5
5
Screw terminal block

D-sub, 9P connector plug type

5
5
5
5
5

Screw terminal block

Terminal5- HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G Series uses only RDA and RDB when using RS422/485 2-wire, you don’t need to connect SDA or
SDB.
If connecting COM1 on the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G to the external device, do not insert terminating resistor to the external
device. If terminating resistor can not be removed, use COM2 on the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G instead of COM1.
- Touch has no pin number corresponding to TERM. When a termination resistor is necessary, insert one with suitable resistance value between pin 8 (RDA) and pin 9 (RDB).

Modbus- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" onpage 455
5
55

External Device Setup Manual633

Chapter 5

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 9P connector socket type

Screw terminal block

Terminal

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

When you use the Terminal Block type of HG1F, make sure to configure the Hardware Flow control to NONE.

634

External Device Setup Manual

3 Connection Diagram

5
5
5
5
5
Screw terminal block

D-sub, 25P connector socket type

5
5
5
5
5
Modbus5

Screw terminal block

D-sub, 37P connector plug type

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

5
5
5
5

External Device Setup Manual635

Chapter 5

4

Environment Settings

4.1

Twido

Items

Details

Interface
Slave Address

The same setting as MICRO/I
or Touch*1

RS232C, RS485 2-wire
1 - 247(DEC)

Baud Rate (bps)

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400

Data Bits

7 or 8

ParityNone, Even or Odd

Stop Bits

1 or 2

Flow Control

Hardware

Use No.0 as Broadcast

0: Disable, 1: Enable

Use function6 instead of function16

Use function6 for writing to HR*1 Set a decimal number for the Slave Address.

4.2

Momentum (Modbus TCP Client)

Items

Items

Details

Interface-- *1

Slave Address-- *1

Baud Rate (bps)-- *1

Data Bits-- *1

Parity-- *1

Stop Bits-- *1

Unit ID*2
Destination Address*3

Port Number*3

The same setting as MICRO/I
or Touch

1 - 247(DEC)IPv4 Typed IP address
0 to 32767 *4*1 These settings will be ignored since it is using the Ethernet port.
*2 Set a decimal number for the unit ID.
*3 Destination Address and Port Number cannot be changed from the system menu of MICRO/I or Touch . Please change it using WindO/I-NV2,
WindO/I-NV3 software.
*4 If “0” is set, this driver will set “502” (the number of Modbus TCP default port) automatically.

636

External Device Setup Manual

5 Usable Devices

5

Usable Devices

5.1

Modbus RTU Master, Modbus ASCII Master, Modbus TCP Client5

Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual5

MICRO/I, Touch

PLC

Coil

C

C

1 - 65536

R/W

Dec

Inputs Status

I

I

100001 - 165536

R

Dec

5

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual55Word Device
Device Name

Device Symbol
MICRO/I, Touch

PLC

Holding Registers

HR

HR

400001 - 465536

R/W

Dec

Inputs Registers

IR

IR

300001 - 365536

R

Dec

5.2

5

Twido (Modbus RTU Master)

Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I, Touch

PLC

Coil

C

%M

1 - 256

R/W

Dec

Inputs Status

I%M

100001 - 100256

R

Dec

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
GradualWord Device
Device Name

Device Symbol
PLC

Holding Registers

HR

%MW

400001 - 401500

R/W

Dec

Inputs Registers

IR

%MW

300001 - 301500

R

Dec

5.3

5
5
5
Modbus

MICRO/I, Touch5

5
5

Momentum (Modbus TCP Client)

Bit Device
Device Name

Device Symbol

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual

MICRO/I, Touch

PLC

Coil

C

-

1 - 65536

R/W

Dec

Inputs Status

I-

100001 - 165536

R

Dec

Address Range

Read/WriteAddress
Gradual55Word Device
Device Name

5

Device Symbol
MICRO/I, Touch

PLC

Holding Registers

HR-

400001 - 465536

R/W

Dec

Inputs Registers

IR-

300001 - 365536

R

Dec

External Device Setup Manual637

Chapter 5

6

Modbus TCP Server/Modbus RTU Slave Function

6.1

Overview of the Modbus TCP Server, Modbus RTU Slave Function

6.1.1

Overview

The Modbus TCP Server, Modbus RTU Slave function performs that PC or PLC (refers to as an external device) can read and write the MICRO/I or
Touch communication devices via the Ethernet or Serial cable.
The read/write of a device is performed using the Modbus TCP protocol (Modbus TCP Server function) or Modbus RTU protocol (Modbus RTU Slavefunction).
For Modbus TCP Server, a maximum of four external devices can be simultaneously connected to the MICRO/I or Touch.

6.1.2

Operation of the Communication

The external device is capable of reading/writing to the MICRO/I or Touch communication devices. It is also possible to read or write communication
devices from the MICRO/I or Touch.

6.1.3

Read/Write from the External Device

The external device is capable of reading or writing the data in the communication device value at the any timing.

Modbus communication is the open protocol. For detail information, visit the web site at http://www.modbus.org/.

638

External Device Setup Manual

6 Modbus TCP Server/Modbus RTU Slave Function

6.2
6.2.1

Modbus TCP Server function system configuration
System Configuration

The following is the system configuration.

5
5
HUB
Ethernet
10BASE-T

5555External devices

5- Up to 4 external devices can communicate with a single MICRO/I or Touch unit at one time.
- The MICRO/I or Touch unit and an external device can be directly connected on a 1:1 basis by bypassing a hub. In thiscase, use a crossing cable for the connection.

5
5

6.2.2

WiringMake sure to use commercially available 10BASE-T ready cables for connecting the devices.

5
ModbusUse a straight cable when using a hub, and use a crossing cable when directly connecting to the MICRO/I or Touch and an external
device.

55555External Device Setup Manual639

Chapter 5

6.3
6.3.1

Modbus TCP Slave function system configuration
System Configuration

The following is the system configuration.
External device

RS232C/RS485/RS422

6.3.2

WiringWire according to the external device.

6.4

Devices

The following devices are available for Modbus TCP Server function, Modbus RTU Slave function.
Bit Device
Device Name

DeviceSymbolAddress Range
HG2G-S/-5S/-5F,
HG3G/4G, Touch

HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F

MICRO/I or
Touch
Read/Write

External
DeviceRead/Write

Address
GradualCoil StatusC

1 - 4096

1 - 65536

R/W

R/W

DecimalInput Status

I

100001 - 104096

100001 - 165536

R/W

R

Decimal

DeviceSymbolAddress Range

External
DeviceRead/Write

Address
Gradual

HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F

MICRO/I or
Touch
Read/Write

Word Device
Device Name

HG2G-S/-5S/-5F,
HG3G/4G, Touch
Holding Register

HR

400001 - 404096

400001 - 465536

R/W

R/W

DecimalInput Register

IR

300001 - 304096

300001 - 365536

R/W

R

DecimalAll devices are general-purpose devices intended for nonspecific purposes.

640

External Device Setup Manual

6 Modbus TCP Server/Modbus RTU Slave Function

6.5
6.5.1

Settings
Settings of the Modbus TCP Server Function

The settings of the Modbus TCP Server communication can be configured in the Configuration - System Setup - Project dialog
boxes in WindO/I-NV2 or WindO/I-NV3. The following table lists the configurable settings. Configure the settings according to theexternal device to be used.

5

Dialog Box - Tab

Settings

Description

5

Project Settings - Host I/F Driveror Communication Driver

Manufacturer

Select “Modicon”.

Host I/F DriverCommunication Driver

Select “Modbus TCP Server”.

5

Refuse Access From
Unknown Clients

Check this box to refuse access from devices other than thespecified external device (client).

5

Project Settings - Communication
Interface

ProtocolWhen using the O/I Link, select “Enable”.

Project Settings - Host Port
Extension

Time OutEnter the duration after which timeout occurs if request is notsent from the external device (in units of seconds).

Port Number

Select the port number used for the communication.

Processing IntervalEnter the interval in units of milliseconds at which the
MICRO/I or Touch performs communication processing.
When the speed of other operations of the MICRO/I or Touch
seems slow this is due to a large amount of communications,
therefore, set a large value here to maybe increase the communication processing speed.

5

Client Address 1- 4

5
5
5
5

Settings of the Modbus RTU Slave Function

The settings of the Modbus RTU Slave communication can be configured in the Configuration - System Setup - Project dialog
boxes in WindO/I-NV2 or WindO/I-NV3. The following table lists the configurable settings. Configure the settings according to theexternal device to be used.
Dialog Box - Tab

Settings

Description

Project Settings - Host I/F Driveror Communication Driver

Manufacturer

Select “Modicon”.

Host I/F DriverCommunication Driver

Select “Modbus RTU Slave”.

Slave address

Set the MICO/I or Touch slave address.

ProtocolWhen using the O/I Link, select “Enable”.

Project Settings - Communication
Interface5

Modbus

6.5.2

When “Refuse Access From Unknown Clients” is checked,
specify the IP address of the external device (client) fromwhich access will be accepted.
When the number of accessible external devices is three or
less, then “0.0.0.0” to the address for unused client.

5

External Device Setup Manual

5
5
5
5

641

Chapter 5

6.6

Modbus TCP Server Function Communication Format

This chapter describes the communication format of the Modbus TCP communication.
The Modbus TCP communication supports Class 0 and Class 1 functions of the OPEN Modbus TCP SPECIFICATION Release1.0.
For details about the communication methods, refer to the OPEN Modbus TCP SPECIFICATION Release1.0 as well as this manual.

6.6.1

Preparations for Communication

The Modbus TCP Server performs communications using the TCP. Make sure to establish a connection with the specified port of the MICRO/I or Touchwith TCP before executing reading/writing of devices.

6.6.2

Basic Format

The following table lists the basic format of communications. The same format applies to both requests and responses.
Data is processed as a byte sequences.

Byte

Description

Byte 0Transaction ID*1. The same value is returned from the server. The value is normally “0”.

Byte 1

Transaction ID*1. The same value is returned from the server. The value is normally “0”.

Byte 2

Protocol ID*2. The value is always “0”.

Byte 3

Protocol ID*2. The value is always “0”.

Byte 4

Message length*3 (high byte). The value is always “0”. (Since the message is 256 bytes at maximum.)

Byte 5

Message length*3 (low byte). The length of the following message.

Byte 6

Unit ID*4

Byte 7

Function code*5

Byte 8-

Data*6*1 The data included in a request is returned from the server without changes. The client (external device) sends a different Transaction ID for eachrequest, and identifies the response by checking the Transaction ID of a response. Enter “0” to not check the Transaction ID.
*2 The number indicating the Modbus TCP protocol, and is always “0”.
*3 Indicates the length of the following message in units of bytes.
*4 ID used for identifying devices. The ID is not used with the MICRO/I or Touch. When the ID is used in a request, the returned data is unchanged.
*5 Numbers assigned for functions such as reading and writing.
*6 Data required for each processing.

642

External Device Setup Manual

6 Modbus TCP Server/Modbus RTU Slave Function

6.7

Modbus RTU Slave Function Communication Format

This chapter describes the communication format of the Modbus RTU communication.
The Modbus RTU communication supports Class 0 and Class 1 functions of the MODBUS APPLICATION PROTOCOL SPECIFICATION V1.1b3. For details about the communication methods, refer to the MODBUS over Serial Line Specification and Implementation Guide V1.02 as well as this manual.

6.7.1

Basic Format

The following table lists the basic format of communications. The same format applies to both requests and responses.
Data is processed as a byte sequences.

3.5 characters*1

Byte 0Slave address

Byte 1

Function code*2

Byte 2-

Data*3

Byte n-1

CRC*4

Specify the HG slave address.

55
5

Byte nIdle

55

DescriptionIdle

5

3.5 characters*1 Idle means no data flowing on the communication line.
Modbus RTU communication requires a minimum of 3.5-character-long idle time between frames to determine the beginning of a frame.
*2 Numbers assigned for functions such as reading and writing.
*3 Data required for each processing.
*4 CRC is calculated by the following method.
CRC
Modbus RTU communication uses CRC.
Calculating the CRC-16 (cyclic redundancy checksum)
Calculate the BCC using CRC-16 for the range from the slave number to the byte immediately before the BCC.

555
ModbusThe generation polynomial is: X16 + X15 + X2 + 1.
1. Take the exclusive OR (XOR) of FFFFh and the first 1-byte data at the slave number.
2. Shift the result by 1 bit to the right. When a carry occurs, take the exclusive OR (XOR) of A001h, then go to step 3.
If not, directly go to step 3.
3. Repeat step 2, shifting 8 times.
4. Take the exclusive OR (XOR) of the result and the next 1-byte data.
5. Repeat step 2 through step 4 up to the byte immediately before the BCC.
6. Swap the higher and lower bytes of the result of step 5, and store the resultant CRC-16 to the BCC (CRC) position.

5

5
5
5
5
5

External Device Setup Manual643

Chapter 5

6.8

Modbus TCP/Modbus RTU shared protocol format

6.8.1

Reference Numbers

Reference numbers are used to specify a device address with the Modbus TCP.
The reference number is obtained by subtracting 1 from the 1st to 5th value of the device address, and is expressed in hexadecimal format.
The following table lists the address of each device and the corresponding reference number.

Address

ReferenceNo.

Address

ReferenceNo.

Address

ReferenceNo.

Address

C10000

I 100001

0000

HR 400001

0000

IR 300001

0000

C2

0001

I 100002

0001

HR 400002

0001

IR 300002

0001

…

…

…

…

…

…

…

…

C 65535

FFFE

I 165535

FFFEHR 465535

FFFE

IR 365535

FFFE

C 65536

FFFF

I 165536

FFFF

HR 465536

FFFF

IR 365536

FFFF

6.8.2

Functions

The MICRO/I or Touch supports the following functions.
Function code

Function name

Description

3

Read multiple registers

Reading of Holding Register (HR) consecutively

16 (10Hex)

Write multiple registers

Writing to Holding Register (HR) consecutively

1

Read coils

Reading of Coil (C) consecutively

2

Read discrete inputs

Reading of Input Relay (I) consecutively

4

Read input registers

Reading of Input Register (IR) consecutively

5

Write coil

Writing to a single Coil (C)6

Write single register

Writing to a single Holding Register (HR)7

Read exception status

Reading of exception status (0 to 7th bit of HR400001)*1*1 This function is not supported in Modbus RTU Slave function.

644

Reference
No.

External Device Setup Manual

6 Modbus TCP Server/Modbus RTU Slave Function

The following section describes the details of the functions.
The communication example listed for each function is only for the function code.
The following communication examples are listed for each function code.
When use the following examples, also refer to the above basic format.(6.6.2 "Basic Format" (P.642), 6.7.1 "Basic Format" (P.643))
If Modbus TCP is selected, add byte 0 to byte6 before the following examples, if Modbus RTU is selected, add the slave address asbyte 0 and CRC as last byte.
1. FC3 Read multiple registers - Reading of Holding Register (HR) consecutively

55RequestModbus TCP

Modbus RTU

Description

Byte 1

Byte 1

Byte 1

Byte 8-9

Byte 2-3

Reference No.

Byte 10-11

Byte 4-5

Number of read words (1 to 125 words)

Modbus TCP

Modbus RTU

Description

Byte 7

Byte 1

FC (Function code) = 03

Byte 8Byte 2

Number of bytes of the response (number of read words x 2)

From Byte 9

From Byte 3

Read data

Normal response

5
5
5
5
5

Abnormal response
Modbus TCP

Modbus RTU

Description

Byte 7

Byte 1

FC (Function code) = 83 (HEX)

Byte 8Byte 2

Exception code 01 or 02

ExampleReading of HR400001 (1 word). The read value is 1234 (HEX).
03 00 00 00 01 => 03 02 12 34555
Modbus55555External Device Setup Manual645

Chapter 5

2. FC16 Write multiple registers - Writing to Holding Register (HR) consecutively
RequestModbus TCP

Modbus RTU

Description

Byte 7

Byte 1

FC (Function code) = 10 (HEX)

Byte 8-9

Byte 2-3

Reference No.

Byte 10-11

Byte 4-5

Number of write words (1 to 100 words)

Byte 12

Byte 6

Number of write bytes (2 x number of write words)

From Byte 13

From Byte 7

Write data

Modbus RTU

Description

Normal response
Modbus TCP
Byte 7

Byte 1

FC (Function code) = 10(HEX)

Byte 8-9

Byte 2-3

Reference No.

From Byte 10

From Byte 4

Number of write words

Modbus TCP

Modbus RTU

Description

Byte 7

Byte 1

FC (Function code) = 90 (HEX)

Byte 8Byte 2

Exception code 01 or 02

Abnormal response

ExampleWriting to HR400001 (1 word). The write value is 1234 (HEX).
10 00 00 00 01 02 12 34 => 10 00 00 00 01

646

External Device Setup Manual

6 Modbus TCP Server/Modbus RTU Slave Function

3. FC1 Read coils - Reading of Coil (C) consecutively
RequestModbus TCP

Modbus RTU

Description

5

Byte 7

Byte 1

FC (Function code) = 01

Byte 8-9

Byte 2-3

Reference No.

Byte 10-11

Byte 4-5

Number of read bits (1 to 2000 bits)

5

Modbus TCP

Modbus RTU

Description

Byte 7

Byte 1

FC (Function code) = 01

5

Byte 8Byte 2

Number of bytes for the response ((number of read bits +7)/8)

From Byte 9

From Byte 3

Read data

Modbus TCP

Modbus RTU

Description

Byte 7

Byte 1

FC (Function code) = 81 (HEX)

Byte 8Byte 2

Exception code 01 or 02

Normal response

Abnormal response5
5
5

ExampleReading of C1. 1 bit. The read value is 1.

5

01 00 00 00 01 => 01 01 01

5
5
5
Modbus55555External Device Setup Manual647

Chapter 5

Data sequence of read value
When two or more data are read out, the read data are arranged starting from the lowest address by 8 bits (1 byte). Within any 1
byte, data in the lower address is set to the lower bit. The data in the unread bit becomes “0”.
For example, when reading an 11-bit data as shown below, the read value becomes 21 03.

648

Address

Data

Remarks

C1

1

Data for the 1st byte

C20

Bit pattern= 00100001 = 21 (HEX)

C3

0

C4

0

C5

0

C6

1

C7

0

C8

0

C9

1

Data for 2nd byte

C 10

1

Bit pattern 00000011 = 03 (HEX)

C11

0

C12

0

C13

0

C14

0

C15

0

C16

0

External Device Setup Manual

6 Modbus TCP Server/Modbus RTU Slave Function

4. FC2 Read discrete inputs - Reading of Input Relay (I) consecutively
RequestModbus TCP

Modbus RTU

Description

5

Byte 7

Byte 1

FC (Function code)=02

Byte 8-9

Byte 2-3

Reference No.

Byte 10-11

Byte 4-5

Number of read bits (1 to 2000 bits)

5

Modbus TCP

Modbus RTU

Description

Byte 7

Byte 1

FC (Function code)=02

5

Byte 8Byte 2

Number of bytes for the response ((number of read bits+7)/8)

From Byte 9

From Byte 3

Read data

Modbus TCP

Modbus RTU

Description

Byte 7

Byte 1

FC (Function code)=82 (HEX)

Byte 8Byte 2

Exception code 01 or 02

Normal response

Abnormal response5
5
5

Example5

Reading of I100001. 1 bit. The read value is 1.
02 00 00 00 01 => 02 01 01
Data sequence of read value
The data sequence for the read value is similar to that of FC1 Read Coils.

5. FC4 Read input registers - Reading of Input Register (IR) consecutively
RequestModbus RTU

Description

Byte 7

Byte 1

FC (Function code)=04

Byte 8-9

Byte 2-3

Reference No.

Byte 10-11

Byte 4-5

Number of read words (1 to 125 words)

Modbus TCP

Modbus RTU

Description

Byte 7

Byte 1

FC (Function code)=04

Byte 8Byte 2

Number of bytes for the response (number of read words x 2)

From Byte 9

From Byte 3

Read data

Modbus TCP

Modbus RTU

Description

Byte 7

Byte 1

FC (Function code)=84 (HEX)

Byte 8Byte 2

Exception code 01 or 02

5
5
ModbusModbus TCP

555

Normal response

Abnormal response5
5
5

ExampleReading of IR300001 (1 word). The read value is 1234 (HEX).
04 00 00 00 01 => 04 02 12 34

External Device Setup Manual649

Chapter 5

6. FC5 Write coil - Writing to a single Coil (C)RequestModbus TCP

Modbus RTU

Description

Byte 7

Byte 1

FC (Function code)=05

Byte 8-9

Byte 2-3

Reference No.

Byte 10

Byte 4

Write value (FF when write value is 1, and 00 when write value is 0)

Byte 11

Byte 5

Fixed value 00

Modbus TCP

Modbus RTU

Description

Byte 7

Byte 1

FC (Function code)=05

Byte 8-9

Byte 2-3

Reference No.

Byte 10

Byte 4

Write value (FF when write value is 1, and 00 when write value is 0)

Byte 11

Byte 5

Fixed value 00

Modbus TCP

Modbus RTU

Description

Byte 7

Byte 1

FC (Function code)=85 (HEX)

Byte 8Byte 2

Exception code 01 or 02

Normal response

Abnormal response

ExampleWriting of C1 (1 bit). The write value is 1.
05 00 00 FF 00 => 05 00 00 FF 00
7. FC6 Write single register - Writing to a single Holding Register (HR)RequestModbus TCP

Modbus RTU

Description

Byte 7

Byte 1

FC (Function code) = 06 (HEX)

Byte 8-9

Byte 2-3

Reference No.

Byte 10-11

Byte 4-5

Write data

Modbus RTU

Description

Normal response
Modbus TCP
Byte 7

Byte 1

FC (Function code) = 06 (HEX)

Byte 8-9

Byte 2-3

Reference No.

Byte 10-11

Byte 4-5

Write data

Modbus TCP

Modbus RTU

Description

Byte 7

Byte 1

FC (Function code)=86 (HEX)

Byte 8Byte 2

Exception code 01 or 02

Abnormal response

ExampleWriting to HR400001. The write value is 1234 (HEX).
06 00 00 12 34 => 06 00 00 12 34

650

External Device Setup Manual

6 Modbus TCP Server/Modbus RTU Slave Function

8. FC7 Read exception status -Reading of exception status (Bit 0 to 7 of HR400001)
RequestModbus TCP

Modbus RTU

Description

Byte 7

Byte 1

FC (Function code)=07 (HEX)

5

Modbus TCP

Modbus RTU

Description

5

Byte 7

Byte 1

FC (Function code)=07 (HEX)

Byte 8Byte 2

Value of exception status

Modbus TCP

Modbus RTU

Description

Byte 7

Byte 1

FC (Function code)= 87 (HEX)

Byte 8Byte 2

Exception code 01 or 02

Normal response

Abnormal response

Communication example

555Reading of exception status. The read value is 34 (HEX).

5

07 => 07 34
The Read exception status function reads the data from the device holding special status information using the Modbus protocol.
Since the MICRO/I or Touch does not have special registers, the exception status is read by bit 0 to 7 of HR400001.

5This function is not supported in Modbus RTU Slave function.

6.8.3

5

Exception code

The following table describes the exception codes that are sent upon an abnormal response.

Exception
code

Name

Description

501

ILLEGAL FUNCTION

Indicates that a function code that is not defined by the Modbus protocol or afunction code that is not supported by the MICRO/I or Touch is designated.

502

ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESSThe address information included in the data is invalid. For example, when reading the number of read words starting from the starting reference No. for theread, this exception code is sent if the data exceeds the maximum address of thedevice.

Modbus03

ILLEGAL DATA VALUE

The value of the data is invalid. This exception code is also sent when the numberof data is invalid.

5
5
5
5
5

External Device Setup Manual651

Chapter 5652

External Device Setup ManualChapter 6 1: N Communication (Multi-drop)
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

653

Chapter 6

1

About 1: N Communication (Multi-drop)

1.1

OutlineTwo or more external devices can be connected to a single MICRO/I or Touch to perform PLC Link communication.
MICRO/I, Touch

RS485/ Ethernet...

External device 1

654

External device 2External device 3

External Device Setup Manual

External device n

2 Communication Drivers Supporting 1: N Communication

2

Communication Drivers Supporting 1: N Communication

The table below lists the Host I/F Drivers or Communication Drivers supporting 1: N communication.

2.1

Compatible Communication Drivers

Manufacturer

Host I/F Driver or Communication Driver

IDEC

OpenNet,MicroSmart,SmartAXIS Pro/Lite(RS232C/485)
OpenNet,MicroSmart,SmartAXIS Pro/Lite(Ethernet)

Mitsubishi

MELSEC-FX (LINK)MELSEC-Q/QnA (Ethernet), MELSEC-FX3U (Ethernet)

Omron

SYSMAC-CS1/CJ Series (Ethernet)

Allen-Bradley

Ethernet/IP, LogixDF1(Full Duplex), Ethernet/IP(Logix Native Tag)

Koyo Electronics

DirectLogic 205/405, DirectLogix(Ethernet)

ModiconModbus RTU Master, Modbus ASCII Master

Keyence

KV(Ethernet)

YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION

MP2000(Ethernet)

YOKOGAWA

FA-M3(Ethernet)

FUJI

MICREX-SX(Ethernet)

EmersonROC Protocol

SIEMENS

S7-1200(Ethernet)

Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems

EH(Ethernet)

Modbus TCP Client

Touch does not support the drivers provided Allen-Bradley and Emerson.

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
1:N Communication

6
6
6

External Device Setup Manual655

Chapter 6

3

Settings of the 1: N Communication

3.1

Initial Setting

When creating a project or converting the Host I/F, set the “Connection Type” to “1: N Communication”.

“Connection Type” can only be changed with the Communication Driver supporting 1: N Communication.

3.2
3.2.1

External Device Settings
Common setting

When 1: N Communication is specified, configure the device setting according to the format below. This applies to the external
device settings only.
{Station No.} {Delimiter} {Device Symbol} {Space} {Device Address}
Note: {Delimiter} is a colon “:”
Example) 1: D 1000

3.2.2

Ethernet communication driver

In case of Ethernet communication driver, attach IP address and Port number for PLC to Station number.
Configure communicated PLC information on Host I/F Network in Project Settings.

656

External Device Setup Manual

3 Settings of the 1: N Communication

3.2.3

Settings when a communication error occurs

Configure the operation settings in the event of a host communication error or communication error.
When the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G is selected as O/I type or Touch is selected as Product Series and 1:N Communications isselected as the Connection of the Host I/F Driver or Communication Driver, then these settings are displayed in the Host I/F Driver
tab or Communication Driver tab on the Project Settings dialog box.
Item

Setting

Ignore communication errors andcontinue operation

Specifies whether or not to stop MICRO/I or Touch operation if a communication error
occurs.

Display error message

Specifies whether or not to display an error message (host communication error or communication error) if operation continues after a communication error occurs. If “Ignore
communication errors and continue operation” is enabled, an Ack (acknowledge) button isdisplayed in the error message (host communication error). If it is disabled, the Ack(acknowledge) button is not displayed in the error message.

Auto retry

Batch monitoring the communication error information
for all Station Numbers

Specifies whether or not to automatically try connecting the MICRO/I or Touch to the Station No. when the communication error occurred. To retry manually, either write 1 in the
2nd bit (initialization) of the device address set under “Batch monitor error information for
all Station No.'s” (mentioned later) or write 1 in the 1st bit (connection settings) of thedevice addresses assigned to the relevant Station No.'s set under “Individually monitor
error information for each Station No.”.
The communication for the other PLC stations stop while retrying the disconnecting PLC
station.
Specifies the device address that stores communication error information for all Station
No.'s. It is only possible to set HG internal registers or HMI devices. The following kind of
information is stored as error information: (For details, refer to " Communication error
information"on page 658.)-

Monitoring communication
error information for eachstation, individually

Initialization-

Conditions under which the error occurred-

Read error log-

Write error log-

Connection settings-

Conditions under which the error occurred-

Read error log-

Write error log

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
1:N Communication

Specifies the device address that stores communication error information for each Station
No. It is only possible to set HG internal registers or HMI devices. Take care to avoid
redundant addresses when using this setting, as this error information occupies up to 256
devices.
The following kind of information is stored as error information: (For details, refer to "Communication error information for each Station Number"on page 659.)

6

6
6
6

External Device Setup Manual657

Chapter 6

Communication error information
It is possible to check the conditions of the communication and the error log. It is also possible to initialize the connection status for each Station
No.

658

-

Bit 1: Initialization
Writing 1 initializes all values related to error information and communication error information for each Station No. Whenthe value turns to 0 after 1 is written, this indicates that initialization is complete.
When “Auto retry” is disabled, communication is not made with the Station No. where the communication error occurred,
but if this bit is used for initialization, communication is resumed with all Station No.'s.

-

Bit 4: Conditions under which the error occurred
If an error is occurring at a Station No., this bit turns to 1.
When the system recovers from the communication error, it automatically turns to 0. It is always 0 when “Auto retry” is disabled. When the Bit 0 (connection settings) of the “Communication error information for each Station No.” settings is 0, theconditions under which the error occurred at each Station No. are not reflected in this bit.

-

Bit 6: Read error log
If a read error occurs on a device used on the MICRO/I or Touch, 1 is written.
It will not change to 0 even after the system recovers from the read error. To make it 0, write 1 in the Bit 1 (initialization).

-Bit 7: Write error log
If a write error occurs on a device used on the MICRO/I or Touch, 1 is written.
It will not change to 0 even after the system recovers from the write error. To make it 0, write 1 in the Bit 1 (initialization).

External Device Setup Manual

3 Settings of the 1: N Communication

Communication error information for each Station Number
The “Communication error Information” setting stores all communication error information. To refer to error information for each Station No., use
this setting. “Communication error information for each Station No.” occupies the same number of devices as the set number of words for each HostI/F Driver or Communication Driver, starting with the set device first.

6
6
6
-

Bit 0: Connection settings
Instructs whether or not to communicate with the relevant Station No.
Communication is made if this bit is 1. Communication is not made if this bit is 0.
When the power is turned on, the default value of this bit is 1.
When “Auto retry” is enabled, this bit is always 1.
When “Auto retry” is disabled, this bit is 0 if a communication error occurs.

-

Bit 4: Conditions under which the error occurredThis bit turns to 1 when an error is occurring at a relevant Station No.
When the system recovers from the communication error, it automatically turns to 0.

-

Bit 6: Read error log
If a read error occurs at a relevant Station No., 1 is written.
It will not change to 0 even after the system recovers from the read error. To make it 0, write 1 in the Bit 1 (initialization) of
the communication error information.

-

Bit 7: Write error log
If a write error occurs at a relevant Station No., 1 is written.
It will not change to 0 even after the system recovers from the write error. To make it 0, write 1 in the Bit 1 (initialization) of
the communication error information.

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
1:N Communication

6
6
6

External Device Setup Manual659

Chapter 6

3.3

Connection Diagram

For the wiring diagram between the PLC and MICRO/I or Touch, refer to the PLC manual for PLC pin-outs. For connecting two or
more PLC units with the MICRO/I or Touch, refer to the diagram below.

3.3.1

RS422/485 2-wire system- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" onpage 4- HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G Series uses only RDA and RDB when using RS422/485 2-wire, you don’t need to connect SDA or
SDB.
If connecting COM1 on the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G to the external device, do not insert terminating resistor to the external
device. If terminating resistor can not be removed, use COM2 on the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G instead of COM1.
- Touch has no pin number corresponding to TERM. When a termination resistor is necessary, insert one with suitable resistance value between pin 8 (RDA) and pin 9 (RDB).

660

External Device Setup Manual

3 Settings of the 1: N Communication

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

6
6
1:N Communication

6
6
6

External Device Setup Manual661

Chapter 6

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

662

External Device Setup Manual

3 Settings of the 1: N Communication

3.3.2

RS422/485 4-wire system

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
- There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminator switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" onpage 4.
- Touch has no pin number corresponding to TERM. When a termination resistor is necessary, insert one with suitable resistance value between pin 8 (RDA) and pin 9 (RDB).

66
6
1:N Communication

6
6
6

External Device Setup Manual663

Chapter 6

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG1F. When inserting a termination resistor, use a terminatorswitch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

664

External Device Setup Manual

3 Settings of the 1: N Communication

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
1:N Communication

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM on the HG2S. When inserting a termination resistor, use a communication
switch. For the setting of the switch, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Settings for PLC Link Communication" on page 4.

6
6
6

External Device Setup Manual665

Chapter 6

4

1:N Communication Operation

4.1

1:N Communication Operation

When 1:N Connection is selected as Connection in the Select/Change Host I/F Driver dialog box or Select/Change Communication
Driver dialog box, multiple external devices (PLCs, etc.,) can be connected to a single MICRO/I or Touch. These instructions
describe operation when a host communication error or communication error occurs during 1:N communication. When using HG1F/
2F/2S/3F/4F communication with the MICRO/I is stopped as soon as a host communication error occurs. When using HG2G-S/-5S/5F, HG3G/4G or Touch, it is possible to set the specific action to be taken when a host communication error or communication error
occurs. For details about settings, refer to Chapter 6 "3.2.3 Settings when a communication error occurs" on page 657.

4.1.1

When "Ignore communication errors and continue operation" is disabled

When “Ignore communication errors and continue operation” is enabled, if the MICRO/I or Touch fails to connect to the target external device, an error message and the Station No. of the external device that failed to connect are displayed, and MICRO/I or Touch
operation stops.
Settings

Action when MICRO/I or Touch fails to connect to the external device

None

Displays an error message and stops operation.
An Ack (acknowledge) button is not displayed in the error message. The error message is displayed until communication with the PLC recovers.

4.1.2

When "Ignore communication errors and continue operation" is enabled

When “Ignore communication errors and continue operation” is enabled, if the MICRO/I or Touch fails to connect to the external
device, it does not stop operation. Information related to communication errors is stored in the devices set in “Batch monitor error
information for all Station No.'s” and “Individually monitor error information for each Station No.”

Reading from an external device under the conditions in which a communication error occurred
The device value of an external device that caused a communication error is maintained as the last read value until the displayed screen changes. When the screen changes, all device values of the external device that caused the communication error
turn to 0.

Writing to an external device under the conditions in which a communication error occurred
If data is written to an external device that is experiencing a communication error, values displayed on the MICRO/I or Touchare changed, but are not written to the external device. Values displayed on the MICRO/I or Touch are maintained until thescreen changes, but are initialized to 0 when the screen changes. Values written on the MICRO/I or Touch during a communication error are not written to the external device even after the MICRO/I or Touch has recovered from the communication
error.

666

External Device Setup Manual

4 1:N Communication Operation

Options when using “Ignore communication errors and continue operation"
When "Ignore communication errors and continue operation" is enabled, several options become available. This section
describes what these optional settings do.
Settings

Action when MICRO/I or Touch fails to connect to the external device

Display error message

EnableAn error message is displayed, but operation continues(Host communication error orcommunication error ). The error message does not automatically close even if theconnection with the external device recovers. To close the error message, press theAck (acknowledge) button that is displayed on the error message itself.

DisableNo error message is displayed (Host communication error or communication error ),and operation continues.

EnableMICRO/I or Touch automatically tries to reconnect if a communication error occurs.

DisableMICRO/I or Touch does not try to reconnect if a communication error occurs.In thiscase, the bit 1 (connection settings) of the device set in "Individually monitor error
information for each Station No." automatically turns to 0.

Auto retry

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
1:N Communication

6
6
6

External Device Setup Manual667

Chapter 6

5

Restrictions

Note the following restrictions when performing 1: N communication.

• Maximum number of units to be connected
Using RS485 :31 units

Using Ethernet
HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G :32units

HG2G-S/-5S,HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F,Touch : 16 units(May vary depending on the PLC type. Refer to the manual of your PLC for details.)• Maximum number of source devices at one time
The maximum number of devices (including O/I Link) that can be read at one time is 8192. Devices exceeding this limit cannot be read out.

• Precautions for using the Simulation Mode
When the communication setting on the HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F is set to 1:1, the external device values are retained even after
the screen is changed. However, if set to 1:N, or when using the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, Touch, the external device
values are not retained.

668

External Device Setup ManualChapter 7 Communication Cables
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7

669

Chapter 7

1

Communication Cables

1.1

Maintenance Cable: HG9Z-XCM22

Connection cable for the HG2G-S/-5S, HG1F/2F/2S/3F/4F maintenance port and DOS/V-family personal computers.

1.2

PLC connection cable: FC4A-KC2C

Direct connection cable for the HG2F/3F/4F SIO1 and the IDEC MICROSmart.

670

External Device Setup Manual

1 Communication Cables

1.3

PLC connection cable: HG9Z-3C115

Direct connection cable for the HG2F/3F/4F SIO1 and the Schneider Twido Serial Port on CPU module.

7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
1.4

PLC connection cable: HG9Z-3C125

Direct connection cable for the HG2F/3F/4F SIO1 and the IDEC OpenNet Controller, MicroSmart.

7
7
Communication Cables

7
7
7
7
7

External Device Setup Manual671

Chapter 7

1.5

PLC connection cable: HG9Z-3C135

Connection cable for the HG2F/3F/4F and PLC (RS232C, D-sub 25P, Mitsubishi and Omron Link Units).

1.6

PLC connection cable: HG9Z-3C145

Connection cable for the HG2F/3F/4F and PLC (RS232C, D-sub 9P, Mitsubishi Link Units).

672

External Device Setup Manual

1 Communication Cables

1.7

PLC connection cable: HG9Z-3C155

Connection cable for the HG2F/3F/4F and PLC (RS232C, D-sub 9P, Omron CPU Unit RS232C I/F).

7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
Communication Cables

7
7
7
7
7

External Device Setup Manual673

Chapter 7

1.8

PLC connection cable: HG9Z-3C165

Connection cable for the HG2F/3F/4F and Mitsubishi A and FX Series Programming Port.

674

External Device Setup Manual

1 Communication Cables

1.9

Printer/ External devices/ PLC connection cable: FC2A-KP1C

7
7
7
7
7
7
7
Please perform the following wiring when HG2F/2S/3F/4F be connected with the printer.
Refer to the printer instruction manual for details.

7
77Communication Cables

7

Refer to "1.19 PLC connection cable: HG9Z-XC275" (P.680) in this chapter when the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G be connectedwith the PLC.

Terminate any unused wires properly to make sure that these wires do not contact other wires or metal parts electrically.

7
7
7
7

External Device Setup Manual675

Chapter 7

1.10 PLC connection cable: FC4A-KC1C
Direct connection cable for the HG1F (RS232C type) SIO1 and the IDEC MICROSmart Programming Port.

1.11 PLC connection cable: HG9Z-XC145
Direct connection cable for the HG1F (RS232C type) SIO1 and PLC (RS232C, D-sub 25P, Mitsubishi Computer Link Unit).

676

External Device Setup Manual

1 Communication Cables

1.12 PLC connection cable: HG9Z-XC155
Direct connection cable for the HG1F (RS232C type) SIO1 and PLC (RS232C, D-sub 25P, Omron Host Link Unit).

7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
1.13 PLC connection cable: HG9Z-XC183

7

Direct connection cable for the HG1F (RS232C type) SIO1 and the IDEC OpenNet Controller and MICROSmart Port2.

Communication Cables

7
7
7
7
7

External Device Setup Manual677

Chapter 7

1.14 PLC connection cable: HG9Z-XC203
Direct connection cable for the HG1F (RS232C type) SIO1 and PLC (RS232C, D-sub 9P, Mitsubishi Computer Link Unit).

1.15 PLC connection cable: HG9Z-XC213
Direct connection cable for the HG1F (RS232C type) SIO1 and PLC (RS232C, D-sub 9P, Omron CPU Unit RS232C I/F except for
C20H/28H/40H).

678

External Device Setup Manual

1 Communication Cables

1.16 PLC connection cable: HG9Z-XC245
Direct connection cable for the HG1F (RS422/485 type) SIO1 and the Mitsubishi FX Series.

7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
1.17 PLC connection cable: HG9Z-XC255
Direct connection cable for the HG1F (RS422/485 type) SIO1 and the Mitsubishi A/QnA Series.

7
7
Communication Cables

7
7
7
7
7

External Device Setup Manual679

Chapter 7

1.18 PLC connection cable: HG9Z-XC265
Direct connection cable for the HG1F (RS232C type) SIO1 and the Mitsubishi Q Series.

1.19 PLC connection cable: HG9Z-XC275
Communication cable for the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G (RS232C type) Serial 1 and the IDEC MICROSmart or the Mitsubishi FX
Series.

680

External Device Setup Manual

1 Communication Cables

The following wiring is for the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G and the IDEC MICROSmart.

7
7
7
7
7
The following wiring is for the HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G and the Mitsubishi FX Series (except the FX3U and FX3UC-32MT-LT).

7
7
7
7
7

- Please do not use the communication cable part number HG9Z-XC275 for FX3U/FX3UC-32-MT-LT of the MELSEC-FX
Series described in this manual because the Mini Din connector interferes with the housing of the PLC.

Communication Cables- Terminate any unused wires properly to make sure that these wires do not contact other wires or metal parts electrically.

7
7
7
7
7

External Device Setup Manual681

Chapter 7

1.20 PLC connection cable: HG9Z-XC295
Direct connection cable for the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G Serial Interface (COM1) and the IDEC MICROSmart Programming Port.

1.21 PLC connection cable: HG9Z-XC305
Direct connection cable for the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G Serial Interface (COM1) and the Mitsubishi FX Series.

682

External Device Setup Manual

1 Communication Cables

1.22 PLC connection cable: HG9Z-XC315
Direct connection cable for the HG2G-5F, HG3G/4G Serial Interface (COM1) and the Mitsubishi Q Series.

7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
Communication Cables

7
7
7
7
7

External Device Setup Manual683

Chapter 7

684

External Device Setup ManualIndexIndex
Numerics
1:N Communication ................................................... 2
1:N Communication Operation ............................ 666

A
Abbreviations, Generic Terms, and Terminology
Used in this Manual .............................................. vii
About 1: N Communication (Multi-drop) ............. 654
Allen-Bradley .......................................................... 655
Auto retry ......................................................... 657, 667

B
Basic Format .......................................................... 642
Batch monitoring the communication error
information for all Station Numbers .................. 657
Baud Rate ................................................... 4, 562, 588
BCC Calculation ..................................................... 614
BCC Calculation Example(for DM Link 1:N Communication) ......................... 614

C
Cautions When Using Indirect Read and Indirect
Write ...................................................................... 214
Clear
DM Link 1:1Communication Format ....................... 598
DM Link 1:N Communication Format ..................... 607
Client Address 1- 4 ................................................ 641
Command 590, 593, 598, 599, 601, 604, 607, 608, 611
Command (Response) .......................... 590, 601, 608
Communication Cables ......................................... 670
Communication Conditions .................................. 585
Communication Driver .................................. 561, 588
Communication driver ........................................... 641
Communication error information ........................ 658
Communication error information for each Station
No. ......................................................................... 659
Communication Example ...................................... 607
Communication Interface ...................... 561, 562, 588
Communication Method ........................................ 585
Communication Service ........................................ 563
Communication Specifications ............................ 585
Communication Status Confirmation .................. 564

1Communication Traffic Volume of the O/I Link
Network ..................................................................566
Compatible Host I/F Drivers ..................................655
Compatible Mitsubishi Inverters ...........................434
Compatible PLCs
Allen-Bradley PLCs ...............................................157
Emerson ................................................................537
FANUC .................................................................406
FUJI .....................................................................440
GE Fanuc Automation ............................................329
Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems ......................547
IDEC ........................................................................8
JTEKT (Toyoda) ....................................................306
Keyence ................................................................240
Koyo Electronics ....................................................390
LS Industrial Systems .............................................504
Mitsubishi ...............................................................38
Modbus .................................................................619
Omron ...................................................................108
Panasonic Electric Works ........................................344
SHARP .................................................................266
SIEMENS .............................................................217
Toshiba .................................................................478
Toshiba Machine Works .........................................318
VIGOR .................................................................518
YASKAWA ..........................................................370
YOKOGAWA .......................................................418
Compatible Protocols
Modbus .................................................................618
Conditions ................................................................567
Connection Diagram
Allen-Bradley ........................................................164
Emerson ................................................................538
FANUC .................................................................408
FUJI .....................................................................447
GE Fanuc Automation ............................................331
Hitachi ..................................................................294
IDEC ......................................................................20
INVERTER ...........................................................435
JTEKT (Toyoda) ....................................................307
Keyence ................................................................244
Koyo Electronics ....................................................393
LS Industrial Systems .............................................507
Mitsubishi ...............................................................56
Modbus .................................................................627
Omron ...................................................................122
Panasonic Electric Works ........................................348
Settings of the 1: N Communication .........................660
SHARP .................................................................269
SIEMENS .............................................................219
Toshiba .................................................................483
Toshiba Machine Works .........................................320
VIGOR .................................................................520
YASKAWA ..........................................................373
YOKOGAWA .......................................................421

External Device Setup ManualIndexConnection Table
Allen-Bradley ........................................................157
Emerson ................................................................537
FANUC ................................................................406
FUJI .....................................................................440
GE Fanuc Automation ............................................329
Hitachi ..................................................................291
Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems ...................... 547
IDEC ........................................................................8
INVERTER ...........................................................434
JTEKT (Toyoda) ....................................................306
Keyence ................................................................240
Koyo Electronics ................................................... 390
LS Industrial Systems .............................................504
Mitsubishi ...............................................................38
Modbus .................................................................618
Omron ..................................................................108
Panasonic Electric Works ........................................344
SHARP .................................................................266
SIEMENS .............................................................217
Toshiba .................................................................478
Toshiba Machine Works .........................................318
VIGOR .................................................................518
YASKAWA ..........................................................370
YOKOGAWA .......................................................418
Connection Type ................................................4, 561
Cross reference table of devices name ..............205

D
D0 to D11 Event Transmission (DM14) ..............587
Data Bits ..............................................................4, 588
Data Memory (DM) Allocation ..............................587
Device ..................................................5, 562, 589, 640
Display error message ...................................657, 667
DM Link
1:1 Communication ................................................572
1:1 Communication Format .....................................590
1:N Communication .......................................572, 573
1:N Communication Format ............................601, 608
DM Link 1:1 Communication ........................585, 586
DM Link 1:N Communication ........................585, 586
DM Link Communication .......................................570
DM Link Communication Settings .......................588
DM LINK No. (Only DM Link 1:N) ........................588

E
Editing Tags ............................................................ 213
Environment Settings
Allen-Bradley ........................................................182
Emerson ................................................................540
FANUC ................................................................416
FUJI .....................................................................470
GE Fanuc Automation ............................................341

2

Hitachi .................................................................. 303
Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems ...................... 549
IDEC ...................................................................... 35
INVERTER ........................................................... 438
JTEKT (Toyoda) .................................................... 313
Keyence ................................................................ 259
Koyo Electronics ................................................... 400
LS Industrial Systems ............................................. 516
Mitsubishi ............................................................... 84
Modbus ................................................................ 636
Omron .................................................................. 145
Panasonic Electric Works ....................................... 367
SHARP ................................................................. 288
SIEMENS ............................................................. 231
Toshiba ................................................................. 501
Toshiba Machine Works ......................................... 327
VIGOR ................................................................. 535
YASKAWA .......................................................... 387
YOKOGAWA ....................................................... 429

Error Codes ............................................................. 615
Ethernet communication driver ............................ 656
Event ........................................................................ 590
Event Area Setting (DM15) ................................... 587
Event Data Transmission Communication Example
600
Event Data Transmission Sequence ................... 599
Event Transmission
DM Link 1:1Communication Format ....................... 599
Event Transmission from the MICRO/I or Touch ....
570
Exception code ....................................................... 651
External Device Settings ....................................... 656

F
Flow Control ........................................................ 4, 588
Flow control ............................................................. 586
Functions ................................................................. 644

H
Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems ................ 547
Host I/F Driver ......................................... 561, 588, 589
Host I/F driver ......................................................... 641
Host I/F Drivers Supporting 1: N Communication ...
655
Host Port Extension ............................................... 641

I
IDEC ......................................................................... 655
Ignore communication errors and continue
operation ............................................................... 657

External Device Setup ManualIndexImportant Points Regarding Wiring ......................... 3
Initial Setting
Settings of the 1: N Communication ........................ 656
IP Address .................................................................. 5

DM Link Communication .......................................570
Overview of the Modbus TCP Server
Communication .....................................................638

K

P

Keyence .................................................................. 655
Koyo Electronics .................................................... 655

Parity .....................................................................4, 588
PLC
Allen-Bradley ........................................................157
Emerson ................................................................537
FANUC .................................................................406
FUJI .....................................................................440
GE Fanuc Automation ............................................329
Hitachi ..................................................................291
Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems ......................547
IDEC ........................................................................8
INVERTER ...........................................................434
JTEKT (Toyoda) ....................................................306
Keyence ................................................................240
Koyo Electronics ....................................................390
LS Industrial Systems .............................................504
Mitsubishi ...............................................................38
Omron ...................................................................108
Panasonic Electric Works ........................................344
SHARP .................................................................266
SIEMENS .............................................................217
Toshiba .................................................................478
Toshiba Machine Works .........................................318
VIGOR .................................................................518
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION ..............370
YOKOGAWA .......................................................418
PLC connection cable
FC4A-KC1C ..........................................................676
FC4A-KC2C ..........................................................670
HG9Z-3C115 .........................................................671
HG9Z-3C125 .........................................................671
HG9Z-3C135 .........................................................672
HG9Z-3C145 .........................................................672
HG9Z-3C155 .........................................................673
HG9Z-3C165 .........................................................674
HG9Z-XC145 ........................................................676
HG9Z-XC155 ........................................................677
HG9Z-XC183 ........................................................677
HG9Z-XC203 ........................................................678
HG9Z-XC213 ........................................................678
HG9Z-XC245 ........................................................679
HG9Z-XC255 ........................................................679
HG9Z-XC265 ........................................................680
HG9Z-XC275 ........................................................680
HG9Z-XC295 ........................................................682
HG9Z-XC305 ........................................................682
HG9Z-XC315 ........................................................683
PLC Link Communication ..........................................2
Port Number ........................................................5, 641
Precautions for using the Simulation Mode ........668
Preparations for Communication ..........................642

M
Maintenance Cable
HG9Z-XCM22 ...................................................... 670
Manufacturer .............................. 4, 561, 588, 589, 641
Master Error Processing ....................................... 564
Max Event Transmission Words (Only DM Link
1:1) ......................................................................... 588
Maximum number of source devices at one time ...
668
Maximum number of units to be connected ...... 668
Mitsubishi ................................................................ 655
Modbus RTU Slave communication format ....... 643
Modbus RTU Slave Function ............................... 638
Modbus TCP Server communication format ..... 642
Modbus TCP Server Function ............................. 638
Modicon ................................................................... 655
Monitoring communication error information foreach station, individually .................................... 657

N
Notice of the case of HG1F .................................. 566
Notice to O/I link ..................................................... 566

O
O/I Link .................................................................... 562
O/I Link Communication ....................................... 554
O/I Link Communication Settings ........................ 561
O/I Link Polling Period Register .......................... 563
O/I Link Station ....................................................... 561
O/I Link Wiring Diagram ........................................ 555
Omron ...................................................................... 655
Operation
O/I Link Communication ........................................ 554
PLC Link Communication .......................................... 2
Operation of the Communication ........................ 638
Options when using"Ignore communication errors
and continue operation" ..................................... 667

OutlineExternal Device Setup Manual3IndexPrinter/ External devices/ PLC connection cable
FC2A-KP1C ..........................................................675
Processing Interval .................................................641
Protocol ................................................4, 588, 589, 641
Protocol (Only DM Link 1:1) .................................588

R
Read .........................................................................590
DM Link 1:N Communication Format .............. 601, 608
Read Communication Example ...........592, 603, 610
Read Sequence ......................................592, 603, 610
Read/Write from the External Device ..................638
Reading Data from the External Device ............. 570
Reading from an external device under theconditions in which a communication error
occurred ................................................................666
Reading from the PLC .......................................2, 554
Reference Numbers ...............................................644
Refuse Access From Unknown Clients ..............641
Required Optional Parts
O/I Link Communication ........................................555
Response .........................591, 594, 602, 605, 609, 612
Response Command .............................................591
Response Time .......................................................615
Restrictions ...................................................... 216, 668
Result on the Performance Evaluation of the
MICRO/I ................................................................567
Retry Cycles ........................................ 5, 561, 588, 589
RS232C ...................................................................574
RS422/485 ...............................................................578
Runtime System Software Version of the MICRO/I
or Touch ................................................................566

S
SERIAL 1/COM1 ....................................................561
SERIAL 2/COM2 ....................................................562
Serial Interface ....................................................4, 588
Setting Example for WindO/I-NV2 .......................210
Setting prosess .......................................................212
Setting Tags ............................................................ 213
Settings ....................................................................641
Settings for PLC Link Communication ....................4
Settings of the 1: N Communication ....................656
Settings when a communication error occurs ....657
Slave address .........................................................641
Slave changes status from Online to Offline in the
O/I Link ..................................................................565
Slave Error information Register ..........................563

4

Slave Error Processing .......................................... 564
Slave Online Data Register .................................. 563
Slave Registration Setting Register .................... 563
Slave Station ........................................................... 561
Start Time ........................................................ 562, 589
Start Time (sec.) ......................................................... 5
Station Number ................................................... 5, 607
Status of a Slave in the O/I Link .......................... 564
Stop Bits .............................................................. 4, 588
Stop Transmission Command .............................. 596
Supported data type .............................................. 211
Symbols Used in this Document ............................. vi
System ............................................................. 562, 589
System Area ............................................................ 587
System Configuration .................................... 639, 640
Allen-Bradley ........................................................ 160
DM Link Communication ....................................... 572
Emerson ............................................................... 537
FANUC ................................................................ 407
FUJI ..................................................................... 443
GE Fanuc Automation ............................................ 330
Hitachi .................................................................. 292
Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems ...................... 548
IDEC ...................................................................... 12
INVERTER ........................................................... 434
JTEKT (Toyoda) .................................................... 306
Keyence ................................................................ 241
Koyo Electronics ................................................... 391
LS Industrial Systems ............................................. 505
Mitsubishi ............................................................... 46
Modbus ................................................................ 620
Omron .................................................................. 113
Panasonic Electric Works ....................................... 345
SHARP ................................................................. 267
SIEMENS ............................................................. 218
Toshiba ................................................................. 480
Toshiba Machine Works ......................................... 319
VIGOR ................................................................. 519
YASKAWA .......................................................... 371
YOKOGAWA ....................................................... 419

T
The mapping table of devices between PROSEC T
Series and V Series ............................................. 503
The process to select device address ................ 209
The way of mapping .............................................. 209
The way to select device address in WindO/I-NV2
209
The way to set device address when use
ControlLogix, CompactLogix series .................. 209
The way to set device address when use Ethernet/
IP (Logix Native Tag) .......................................... 211
Time .................................................................. 562, 589
Time (sec.) .................................................................. 5External Device Setup ManualIndexTime Out ...................................... 5, 561, 588, 589, 641
Transmission Allowed Command ........................ 596
Transmission Control ............................................ 596
Transmission Control Communication Example 597
Transmission Control Sequence ......................... 597
Transmission Wait ............................. 5, 561, 588, 589

U

Write
DM Link 1:1Communication Format ........................593
DM Link 1:N Communication Format ..............604, 611

Write Communication Example ............595, 606, 613
Write Sequence ......................................594, 606, 613
Writing Data to the External Device .....................570
Writing to an external device under the conditions inwhich a communication error occurred .............666
Writing to the PLC ..............................................2, 554

Usable Devices
Allen-Bradley ....................................................... 187
Emerson ............................................................... 541
FANUC ................................................................ 417
FUJI ..................................................................... 474
GE Fanuc Automation ............................................ 343
Hitachi ................................................................. 304
Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems ..................... 550
IDEC ..................................................................... 37
INVERTER .......................................................... 439
JTEKT (Toyoda) ................................................... 314
Keyence ............................................................... 261
Koyo Electronics ................................................... 402
LS Industrial Systems ............................................ 517
Mitsubishi ............................................................... 90
Modbus ................................................................ 637
Omron .................................................................. 151
Panasonic Electric Works ....................................... 369
SHARP ................................................................ 289
SIEMENS ............................................................. 235
Toshiba ................................................................ 502
Toshiba Machine Works ......................................... 328
VIGOR ................................................................ 536
YASKAWA .......................................................... 389
YOKOGAWA ...................................................... 430

Use System Area ....................................... 5, 562, 589
Use System Areas 3, 4 ............................. 5, 562, 589
User Area (DM16 to DM8191) ............................. 587

W
Watch Dog .................................................. 5, 562, 589
When "Ignore communication errors and continue
operation" isdisabled ................................................................ 666
enabled ................................................................. 666
When devices of different types are set for Slave 1
to 15 ....................................................................... 567
When devices of the same type are set for Slave 1
to 15 ....................................................................... 567
Wiring ............................................................... 639, 640
DM Link Communication ....................................... 574
With BCC ................................................................ 588
With Hardware ........................................................ 574
Without Hardware .................................................. 576

External Device Setup Manual5